Errata

Title & Document Type: 54501A Digitizing Oscilloscope Programming Reference

Manual Part Number: 54501-90907

Revision Date: May 1989

HP References in this Manual

This manual may contain references to HP or Hewlett-Packard. Please note that Hewlett-
Packard's former test and measurement, semiconductor products and chemical analysis
businesses are now part of Agilent Technologies. We have made no changes to this
manual copy. The HP XXXX referred to in this document is now the Agilent XXXX.
For example, model number HP8648A is now model number Agilent 8648A.

About this Manual

We’ve added this manual to the Agilent website in an effort to help you support your
product. This manual provides the best information we could find. It may be incomplete
or contain dated information, and the scan quality may not be ideal. If we find a better
copy in the future, we will add it to the Agilent website.

Support for Your Product

Agilent no longer sells or supports this product. You will find any other available
product information on the Agilent Test & Measurement website:
www.tm.agilent.com

Search for the model number of this product, and the resulting product page will guide
you to any available information. Our service centers may be able to perform calibration
if no repair parts are needed, but no other support from Agilent is available.
Programming Reference
HP 54501A Digitizing Oscilloscope
Printing History

New editions are complete revisions of the manual. Update packages,

which are issued between editions, contain additional and replacement
pages to be merged into the manual by the customer. The dates on the
title page change only when a new edition is published.

A software code may be printed before the date; this indicates the version
of the software product at the time the manual or update was issued.
Many product updates and fixes do not require manual changes and,
conversely, manual corrections may be done without accompanying
product changes. Therefore, do not expect a one to one correspondence
between product updates and manual updates.

Edition 1 June 1989 54501-90907

List of Effective Pages

The List of Effective Pages gives the date of the current edition and of any
pages changed in updates to that edition. Within the manual, any page
changed since the last edition is indicated by printing the date the changes
were made on the bottom of the page. If an update is incorporated when
a new edition of the manual is printed, the change dates are removed from
the bottom of the pages and the new edition date is listed in the Printing
History and on the title page.

Pages Effective Date

Product This Hewlett-Packard product has a warranty against defects in
material and workmanship for a period of three years from date of
Warranty shipment. During warranty period, Hewlett-Packard Company will, at
its option, either repair or replace products that prove to be defective.

For warranty service or repair, this product must be returned to a

service facility designated by Hewlett-Packard. However, warranty
service for products installed by Hewlett-Packard and certain other
products designated by Hewlett-Packard will be performed at the
Buyer's facility at no charge within the Hewlett-Packard service travel
area. Outside Hewlett-Packard service travel areas, warranty service
will be performed at the Buyer's faculty only upon Hewlett-Packard's
prior agreement and the Buyer shall pay Hewlett-Packard's round trip
travel expenses.

For products returned to Hewlett-Packard for warranty service, the

Buyer shall prepay shipping charges to Hewlett-Packard and
Hewlett-Packard shall pay shipping charges to return the product to
the Buyer. However, the Buyer shall pay all shipping charges, duties,
and taxes for products returned to Hewlett-Packard from another
country.

Hewlett-Packard warrants that its software and firmware designated by

Hewlett-Packard for use with an instrument will execute its
programming instructions when properly installed on that instrument.
Hewlett-Packard does not warrant that the operation of the instrument
software, or firmware will be uninterrupted or error-free.
Limitation of The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from
Warranty improper or inadequate maintenance by the Buyer, Buyer-supplied
software or interfacing, unauthorized modification or misuse, operation
outside of the environmental specifications for the product, or
improper site preparation or maintenance.

NO OTHER WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED OR IMPUED.

HEWLETT-PACKARD SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE
IMPUED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

Exclusive THE REMEDIES PROVIDED HEREIN ARE BUYER'S SOLE

Remedies AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. HEWLETT-PACKARD SHALL
NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER
BASED ON CONTRACT, TORT, OR ANY OTHER LEGAL
THEORY.

Assistance Product maintenance agreements and other customer assistance

agreements are available for Hewlett-Packard products.

For assistance, contact your nearest Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service

Office.

Certification Hewlett-Packard Company certifies that this product met its published
specifications at the time of shipment from the factory.
Hewlett-Packard further certifies that its calibration measurements are
traceable to the United States National Bureau of Standards, to the
extent allowed by the Bureau's calibration facility, and to the
calibration facilities of other International Standards Organization
members.

Safety This product has been designed and tested according to International
Safety Requirements. To ensure safe operation and to keep the
product safe, the information, cautions, and warnings in this manual
must be heeded.
Introduction

This manual explains how to program the HP 54501A Digitizing

Oscilloscope and lists the commands and queries associated with this
instrument. It is divided into 17 chapters and 2 appendices.

Chapter 1 introduces you to the programming syntax required to

program this instrument and provides some basic programming
concepts to get you started programming..

Chapter 2 describes the interface functions and some general

concepts of HP-IB.

Chapter 3 describes the operation of instruments that operate in

compliance with the IEEE 4882 standard. This chapter also
describes the status reporting features that are available over the
HP-IB.

Chapter 4 covers the conventions which are used to program the

instrument as well as conventions used in the remainder of this
manual. This chapter also includes a complete command tree and
alphabetic command cross-reference.

Chapter 5 lists the Common Commands which are the commands

defined by IEEE 488.2. These commands control some functions
that are common to all IEEE 488.2 instruments.

Chapter 6 lists the Root Level Commands which control many of

the basic functions of the instrument.

Chapter 7 lists the System Subsystem Commands which control

some basic functions of the oscilloscope.

Chapter 8 lists the Acquire Subsystem Commands which set the

parameters for acquiring and storing data.

Chapter 9 lists the Calibrate Subsystem Commands which set time

nulls (channel-to-channel skew).

HP 54501A
Programming Introduction-1
 Chapter 10 lists the Channel Subsystem Commands which control
all Y-axis oscilloscope functions.

Chapter 11 lists the Display Subsystem Commands which control

how waveforms, voltage and time markers, graticule, and text are
displayed and written on the screen.

Chapter 12 lists the Function Subsystem Commands which control

the waveform math functions of the oscilloscope.

Chapter 13 lists the Hardcopy Subsystem Commands which

control the parameters used during the printing of waveforms.

Chapter 14 lists the Measure Subsystem Commands which select

the automatic measurements to be made.

Chapter 15 lists the Timebase Subsystem Commands which

control all X-axis oscilloscope functions.

Chapter 16 lists the Trigger Subsystem Commands which control

the trigger modes and parameters for each trigger mode.

Chapter 17 lists the Waveform Subsystem Commands which

provide access to waveform data, including active data from
channels and functions as well as static data from waveform
memories.

Appendix A provides details on how automatic measurements are

calculated and offers some tips on how to improve results.

Appendix B contains example programs using the command set

from the HP 54501A.

At the end of the manual is Quick Reference Guide that lists the
commands and queries with their corresponding arguments and
returned formats. Also, at the end of the manual is a complete index
for easy reference of commands and functions.

HP 54501A
Introduction-2 Programming
Contents
Introduction

Chapter 1: Introduction to Programming an Oscilloscope

Introduction 1-1
................................................ 1-2
Programming Syntax
......................................... 1-2
Talking to the Instrument
Addressing the Instrument .................................. 1-3
Program Message Syntax
................................. 1-4
Separator ................................... 1-5
................................................ 1-5
Command Syntax
Query Command ......................................... 1-7
......................................... 1-8
Program Header Options
Program Data
.................................. 1-8
Program
............................................
Message Terminator 1-9
Selecting Multiple Subsystems ..............................1-10
Summary
............................. 1-10
...............................................
Programming an Oscilloscope 1-11
................................ 1-11
Initialization.............................................
Autoscale 1-12
............................................... 1-12
Setting Up the Instrument
................................. 1-13
Receiving Information from the Instrument
Response Header Options
.................. 1-14
Response Data Formats
................................ 1-15
String Variables .................................. 1-16
Numeric Variables......................................... 1-17
.......................................
Definite-Length Block Response Data 1-18
Multiple ...................... 1-19
Queries......................................... 1-19
Instrument Status
Digitize Command ........................................ 1-20
.......................................

HP 54501A Contents-1
Programming
Chapter 2: Interface Functions
Introduction 2-1
................................................ 2-1
Interface Capabilities
........................................
Command and Data Concepts
Addressing .................................2-1
.................................................2-1
Remote, Local and Local Lockout
Bus Commands
.............................2-2
2-3
Device Clear .............................................
.............................................2-3
Group Execute Trigger (GET)
Interface Clear (IFC)
..............................2-3
Status Annunciators
......................................2-3
.........................................2-3
I——————————————————————————————————————

Chapter 3: Message Communication and System Functions

Protocols
...................................................3-1
Functional Elements 3-1
Protocol Overview ......................................3-2
Protocol ........................................3-2
Operation........................................
Protocol Exceptions
Syntax Diagrams .......................................3-3
3-5
Syntax ............................................
3-5
Overview.............................................
Device Listening Syntax
Device Talking Syntax
....................................3-8
Common
....................................3-21
3-27
Commands........................................
Status Reporting
Bit Definitions ...........................................3-28
Key Features
...........................................3-30 3-31
Serial ............................................
Poll...............................................3-32
Parallel Poll
.............................................3-34
Polling HP-IB Devices.
...................................3-36
Configuring Parallel Poll Responses 3-36
Conducting a Parallel ........................
Disabling Parallel PollPoll.................................3-37
Responses
HP-IB Commands
..........................3-37
.......................................3-37

Contents-2 HP 54501A
Programming
Chapter 4: Programming and Documentation Conventions
Introduction 4-1
................................................ 4-1
Truncation Rules
The Command Tree ............................................
Command Types .........................................4-4
..........................................4-4
Tree Traversal Rules
Examples ......................................4-54-5
................................................
Infinity Representation
.......................................4-6
Sequential and Overlapped Commands. 4-7
Response Generation ........................
........................................4-7
Notation Conventions and Definitions 4-7
Syntax Diagrams ..........................
Command Structure ............................................4-8 4-9
Common Commands ......................................... 4-9
Root Level Commands...................................... 4-9
Subsystem Commands .................................... 4-9
Program Examples .....................................
.........................................4-11
Command Set Organization
..................................4-12
I————————————————————————————————————————

Chapter 5: Common Commands

*CLS
*ESE ......................................................5-4
*ESR ......................................................5-5
*IDN ......................................................5-7
*IST ......................................................5-9
......................................................5-10
*LRN.....................................................5-11
*OPC.....................................................5-12
*OPT
*PRE .....................................................5-13
.....................................................5-14
*RCL.....................................................5-15
*RST
*SAV .....................................................5-16
*SRE .....................................................5-18
*STB .....................................................5-19
*TRG .....................................................5-21
*TST ....................................................5-23
.....................................................5-24
*WAI.....................................................5-25

HP 54501A Contents-3
Programming
Chapter 6: Root Level Commands
Introduction
AUToscale ................................................6-1
BEEPer .................................................6-4
BLANk ....................................................6-5
DIGitize ....................................................6-6
EOI ...................................................6-7
ERASe.......................................................6-8
....................................................6-9
LER......................................................6-10
LTER
MENU ....................................................6-11
MERGe ...................................................6-12
PRINt ..................................................6-13
RUN ....................................................6-14
SERial.....................................................6-15
.6-16
STOP ...................................................
STORe.....................................................6-17
.6-18
TER ..................................................
VIEW......................................................6-19
....................................................6-20
I————————————————————————————————————————

Chapter 7: System Subsystem

Introduction
DSP ................................................7-1
.......................................................7-3
ERRor.....................................................7-4
HEADer
...................................................7-6
KEY.......................................................7-7
LONGform.................................................7-9
SETup
....................................................7-10

Contents-4 HP 54501A
Programming
Chapter 8: Acquire Subsystem
Introduction
................................................8-1
(Normal) Persistence Mode
Averaging Mode ...................................8-1
Envelope Mode ............................................8-2
.............................................8-2
COMPlete..................................................8-4
COUNt
POINts ....................................................8-5
TYPE ....................................................8-6
.....................................................8-7
I——————————————————————————————————————

Chapter 9: Calibrate Subsystem

Introduction
................................................9-1
TNUL1.....................................................9-2
I——————————————————————————————————————

Chapter 10: Channel Subsystem

Introduction 10-1
COUPling ................................................10-3
ECL ................................................
......................................................10-4
HFReject 10-5
OFFSet .................................................
PROBe ...................................................10-6
10-7
RANGe ....................................................10-8
TTL .................................................. 10-9
......................................................
I————————————————————————————————————————

Chapter 11: Display Subsystem

Introduction 11-1
COLumn ............................................... 11-4
CONNect.................................................. 11-5
DATA ..................................................11-6
...................................................
FORMat
..................................................11-8
GRATicule 11-9
................................................11-10
INVerse..................................................
LINE
MASK....................................................11-11
11-12
................................................... 11-14
PERSistence
..............................................
HP 54501A Contents-5
Programming
 ROW
SCReen
....................................................11-15
11-16
SOURce ...................................................11-17
STRing ................................................
TEXT ..................................................11-1811-19
TMARker................................................... 11-20
VMARker ................................................ 11-21
.'...............................................
I————————————————————————————————————————

Chapter 12: Function Subsystem

Introduction 12-1
ADD ............................................... 12-4
INVert......................................................12-5
................................................... .12-6
MULTiply................................................
OFFSet
ONLY ...................................................12-7
12-8
RANGe.....................................................12-9
SUBTract .................................................. 12-10
VERSUS ................................................ 12-11
.................................................
I——————————————————————————————————————

Chapter 13: Hardcopy Subsystem

Introduction 13-1
LENGth ................................................13-2
PAGE .................................................
....................................................13-3
I————————————————————————————————————————

Chapter 14: Measure Subsystem

Introduction 14-1
...............................................
Measurement Setup 14-1
User-Defined ........................................
14-1
Measurements................................. 14-2
Measurement
Error.........................................
Making Measurements 14-2
ALL ......................................
14-11
.....................................................
COMPare 14-12
CURSor .................................................14-14
DEFine ................................................
..................................................14-15
14-17
DELay...................................................
DESTination .14-18
DUTycycle ............................................ .14-19
ESTArt .............................................. .14-20
.................................................
Contents-6 HP 54501A
Programming
 ESTOp .14-22
.................................................
FALLtime................................................14-24
FREQuency 14-25
...............................................14-26
LIMittest................................................
LOWer .14-27
MODE ................................................. .14-28
NWIDth .................................................
OVERshoot
.................................................14-29
.14-30
PERiod .............................................
..................................................14-31
POSTfailure
PRECision ..............................................14-32
.14-33
.............................................. .14-34
PREShoot...............................................
PWIDth..................................................14-35
RESults .14-36
RISetime................................................. 14-37
SCRatch .................................................
SOURce .................................................14-38
.14-39
STATistics................................................
...............................................14-40
14-41
TDELta.................................................. 14-42
TMAX...................................................
TMIN
TSTArt ...................................................14-43
TSTOp ..................................................14-44
TVOLt ..................................................14-45
UNITs ..................................................14-46
UPPer
...................................................14-48
.14-49
.................................................. .14-50
VAMPlitude
............................................. .14-51
VAVerage...............................................
VBASe .14-52
VDELta ................................................. .14-53
VFIFty ................................................ 14-54
VMAX ....................................................14-55
VMIN .................................................
VPP ...................................................14-56
.....................................................14-57
VRELative 14-58
VRMS ...............................................
VSTArt ...................................................14-60
.14-61
VSTOp ................................................. .14-62
VTIMe .................................................
VTOP ..................................................14-63
...................................................14-64

HP 54501A Corrtents-7
Programming
Chapter 15: Timebase Subsystem
Introduction 15-1
...............................................
DELay....................................................15-3
MODE 15-4
RANGe ................................................... 15-5
................................................... 15-6
REFerence
WINDOW ................................................ 15-7
.................................................. 15-8
WINDowDELay...........................................
WINDowRANGe 15-9
..........................................
I——————————————————————————————————————

Chapter 16: Trigger Subsystem

Introduction 16-1
............................................... 16-3
The EDGE Trigger Mode
The Pattern Trigger Mode ................................... 16-4
The State Trigger Mode ................................... 16-5
The Delay Trigger Mode ..................................... 16-6
The TV Trigger Mode .................................... 16-7
CONDition ......................................16-13
...............................................
DELay...................................................16-16
DELaySLOPe .16-17
DELay:SOURce........................................... .16-18
FIELd .........................................
...................................................16-19
HOLDoff .16-20
LEVel ............................................... 16-21
LINE ...................................................
LOGic
....................................................16-22
16-23
MODE ....................................................16-24
................................................. 16-25
Occurrence
OCCurrence:SLOPe..............................................
.16-26
OCCurrence:SOURce ......................................
16-27
PATH .....................................
...................................................16-28
POLarity .16-29
................................................ .16-30
QUALify................................................
SLOPe .16-32
SOURce.................................................. .16-33
STANdard................................................ .16-34
..............................................

Contents-8 HP 54501A
Programming
Chapter 17: Waveform Subsystem
Introduction 17-1
............................................... 17-2
Data Acquisition Types
Normal ..................................... 17-2
Average ................................................. 17-3
Envelope ................................................ 17-3
............................................... 17-4
Data Conversion
Conversion from...........................................
Data Value to Voltage 17-4
Conversion from Data Value to Time
..................... 17-4
Data Format for HP-IB Transfer ....................... 17-5
WORD Format ..............................17-5
BYTE Format ......................................... 17-6
COMPRESSED...........................................
Format 17-6
ASCII Format .................................. 17-6
COUNt ........................................... 17-9
DATA ...................................................
FORMat
...................................................17-10
17-12
POINts .................................................
PREamble..................................................17-13
.17-14
SOURce .............................................. .17-16
TYPE ................................................
...................................................17-17
XINCrement .17-18
XORigin ............................................. .17-19
................................................ 17-20
XREFerence
..............................................17-21
YINCrement.............................................
YORigin .17-22
YREFerence................................................ .17-23
............................................

HP 54501A Contents-9
Programming
Appendix A: Algorithms
Introduction A-l
............................................... A-l
Measurement Setup
Making Measurements ........................................ A-l
Automatic Top-Base ...................................... A-2
Edge Definition ........................................ A-2
............................................ A-3
Algorithm Definitions
delay .......................................
...................................................A-3
+ width

-
width ................................................A-4
Period .................................................A-5
..................................................A-5
Frequency
Duty Cycle ..............................................A-5
Risetime ..............................................A-5
A-5
Falltime ................................................ A-5
Vmax ................................................
Vmin ..................................................A-5
Vp-p
...................................................A-5
A-5
Vtop ...................................................
Vbase
...................................................A-5
Vamp
..................................................A-6
Vavg
..................................................A-6
Vrms
...................................................A-6
A-6
...................................................
I————————————————————————————————————————

Appendix B: Example Programs

Introduction B-l
............................................... B-2
Vertical Channel Setup Program
Timebase Program .............................. B-4
......................................... B-6
Measurement Setup Program
Digitize Program ................................ B-9
........................................... B-ll
Hardcopy Program (Service Request using OPC)
Waveform Template Program
.............. B-12
...............................
Quick Reference Guide

Index

Contents-10 HP 54501A
Programming
Introduction to Programming an Oscilloscope 1
Introduction This chapter introduces you to the basic concepts ofHP-IB
communication and provides information and examples to get you started
programming. The exact mnemonics for the commands are listed in
chapters 5 through 17.

There are four basic operations that can be done with a controller and an
oscilloscope via HP-IB. You can:

1. Set up the instrument and start measurements

2. Retrieve setup information and measurement results
3. Digitize a waveform and pass the data to the controller
4. Send measurement data to the instrument

Other more complicated tasks are accomplished with a combination of

these four basic functions.

This chapter deals mainly with how to set up the instrument, how to
retrieve setup information and measurement results, how to digitize a
waveform, and how to pass data to the controller. The chapter is divided
into two sections. The first section (page 1-2) concentrates on program
syntax, and the second section (page 1-11) discusses programming an
oscilloscope. Refer to the chapter "Measure Subsystem" for information
on sending measurement data to the instrument.

Note
The programming examples in this manual are written in
HP Basic 4.0 for an HP 9000 Series 2001300 Controller.

HP 54501A Introduction to Programming an Oscilloscope

Programming 1-1
Programming
Syntax

Talking to the In general, computers acting as controllers communicate with the

Instrument instrument by passing messages over a remote interface using the I/O
statements provided in the instruction set of the controller's host
language. Hence, the HPSL 1.0 messages for programming the
HP 54501A, described in this manual, will normally appear as ASCII
character strings imbedded inside the I/O statements of your controller's
program. For example, the HP 9000 Series 200/300 BASIC and PASCAL
language systems use the OUTPUT statement for sending program
messages to theHP 54501A, and the ENTER statement for receiving
response messages from the HP 54501A.

Messages are placed on the bus using an output command and passing the
device address, program message, and terminator. Passing the device
address ensures that the program message is sent to the correct interface
and instrument.

The following command turns the command headers on:

OUTPUT < device address > ;":SYSTEM:HEADER ON" < terminator >

< device address > represents the address of the device being
programmed.

Note
The programming examples in this manual are written in
HP Basic 4.0 for an HP 9000 Series 200/300 Controller.

Introduction to Programming an Oscilloscope HP 54501A

1-2 Programming
 Note
The actual OUTPUT command you use when programming is
dependent on the controller and the programming language you
are using.

Angular brackets "< >," in this manual, enclose words or

characters that symbolize a program code parameter or a bus
command.

Information that is displayed in quotes represents the actual

message that is sent across the bus. The message terminator
(NL orEOI) is the only additional information that is also sent
across the bus.

For HP 9000 Series 200/300 controllers, it is not necessary to type

in the actual terminator > at the end of the program message.
<

These controllers automatically terminate the program message

internally when the return key is pressed.

AddreSSiDQ the Since HP-IB can address multiple devices through the same interface
Instrument cazd, the device address passed with the program message must include
not only the correct interface select code, but also the correct instrument
address.

Interface Select Code (Selects Interface). Each interface card has a

unique interface select code. This code is used by the controller to direct
commands and communications to the proper interface. The default is
typically "7' for HP-IB controllers.

Instrument Address (Selects Instrument). Each instrument on an HP-IB

bus must have a unique instrument address between decimal 0 and 30.
The device address passed with the program message must include not
only the correct instrument address, but also the correct interface select
code.

DEVICE ADDRESS =
(Interface Select Code
•
100) + (Instrument Address)

HP 54501A Introduction to Programming an Oscilloscope

Programming 1-3
 For example, if the instrument address for the HP 54501A is 4 and the
interface select code is 7, when the program message is passed, the
routine performs its function on the instrument at device address 704.

For the HP 54501A, the instrument address is typically set to "7" at the
factory. This address can be changed in the HP-IB menu of the Utility
menu.

Note
The program examples in this manual assume the HP 54501A is
at device address 707.

Program Message To program the instrument over the bus, you must have an understanding
Syntax of the command format and structure expected by the instrument. The
instrument is remotely programmed with program messages. These are
composed of sequences of program message units, with each unit
representing a program command or query. A program command or
query is composed of a sequence of functional elements that include
separators, headers, program data, and terminators. These are sent to the
instrument over the system interface as a sequence of ASCII data
messages. For example:

PROGRAM MESSAGE UNIT

OUTPUT XXX;":SYSTEM:HEADER ON"

T COMMAND ——————————————————

E ADDRESS —————————————————————————

ONAL) —————————————————————————————————
AM MNEMONICS ——————————————————————————————

ATOR —————————————————————————————————————————————————

DATA

Introduction to Programming an Oscilloscope HP 54501A

1-4 Programming
 Separator The < separator > shown in the program message refers to a blank space

which is required to separate the program mnemonic from the program

data.

Command Syntax A command is composed of a header, any associated data, and a

terminator. The header is the mnemonic or mnemonics that represent the
operation to be performed by the instrument. The different types of
headers are discussed in the following paragraphs.

Simple Command Header. Simple command headers contain a single

mnemonic. AUTOSCALE and DIGITIZE are examples of simple
command headers typically used in this instrument. The syntax is:

< program mnemonic > < terminator >

When program data must be included with the simple command header
(for example, :DIGITIZE CHAN1), a separator is added. The syntax is:

< program mnemonic > < separator > < program data > < terminator >

Compound Command Header. Compound command headers are a

combination of two or more program mnemonics. The first mnemonic
selects the subsystem, and the last mnemonic selects the function within
that subsystem. Additional mnemonics appear between the subsystem
mnemonic and the function mnemonic when there are additional levels
within the subsystem that must be transversed. The mnemonics within the
compound message are separated by colons. For example:

To execute a single function within a subsystem, use the following:

: < subsystem >: < function > < separator > < program data > < terminator >

(For example :SYSTEM:LONGFORM ON)

To transverse down a level of a subsystem to execute a subsystem within

that subsystem:

: < subsystem >: < subsystem >: < function > <
separator > < program
data> < terminator >

(For example :TRIGGER:DELAY:SOURCE CHAN1)

HP 54501A Introduction to Programming an Oscilloscope

Programming 1-5
 To execute more than one function within the same subsystem a
semi-colon is used to separate the functions:

: < subsystem >: < function > < separator > < data >; < function > < separator > <data >

< terminator >

(For example :SYSTEM:LONGFORM ON;HEADER ON)

Identical function mnemonics can be used for more than one subsystem.
For example, the function mnemonic RANGE may be used to change the
vertical range or to change the horizontal range:

:CHANNEL1:RANGE .4

-
sets the vertical range of channel 1 to 0.4 volts full scale.

:TIMEBASE:RANGE 1

sets the horizontal timebase to 1 second full scale.

CHANNELl and TIMEBASE are subsystem selectors and determine

which range is being modified.

Common Command Header. Common command headers control IEEE

488.2 functions within the instrument (such as clear status, etc.). Their
syntax is:

-
< command header > < terminator >

No space or separator is allowed between the asterisk and the command

header. *CLS is an example of a common command header.

Introduction to Programming an Oscilloscope HP 54501A

1-6 Programming
 Query Command Command headers immediately followed by a question mark (?) are
queries. After receiving a query, the instrument interrogates the
requested function and places the answer in its output queue. The answer
remains in the output queue until it is read or another command is issued.
When read, the answer is transmitted across the bus to the designated
listener (typically a controller). The query :TIMEBASE:RANGE? places
the current timebase setting in the output queue. The controller input
statement:

ENTER < device address > ;Range

passes the value across the bus to the controller and places it in the
variable Range.

Query commands are used to find out how the instrument is currently
configured. They are also used to get results of measurements made by
the instrument, with the query actually activating the measurement. For
example, the command :MEASURE:RISETIME? instructs the
instrument to measure the risetime of your waveform and place the result
in the output queue.

Note
The output queue must be read before the next pro/yam message
is sent. For example, when you send the query
:MEASURE:RISETIME? you must follow that query with the
program statement ENTER Value jisetime to read the result of
the query and place the result in a variable (Value jisetime).

Sending another command before reading the result of the query

will cause the output buffer to be cleared and the current
response to be lost. This will also generate an error in the error
queue.

HP 54501A Introduction to Programming an Oscilloscope

Programming 1-7
 Program Header Program headers can be sent using any combination of uppercase or
Options lowercase ASCII characters. Instrument responses, however, are always
returned in uppercase.

Both program command and query headers may be sent in either

longform (complete spelling), shortform (abbreviated spelling), or any
combination of longform and shortform. Either of the following examples
turn the headers on.

:SY?TEM:HEADERON -longform

:SYCT:HEAD ON -
shortform

Programs written in longform are easily read and are almost

self-documenting. The shortform syntax conserves the amount of
controller memory needed for program storage and reduces the amount
of I/O activity.

Note
The rules for shortform syntax are shown in the chapter
"Programming and Documentation Conventions."

Program Data Program data is used to convey a variety of types of parameter

information related to the command header. At least one space must
separate the command header or query header from the program data.

< program mnemonic > < separator > <data> < terminator >

When program mnemonic or query has multiple data parameters

a a

comma separates sequential program data.

<
program mnemonic > < separator > < data < data > <
terminator >
>,

For example, :TRIGGER:DELAY TIME,1.23E-01 has two data

parameters: TIME and 1.23E-01.

Introduction to Programming an Oscilloscope HP 54501 A

1-8 Programming
 Character Program Data. Character program data is used to convey
parameter information as alpha or alphanumeric strings. For example,
the timebase command MODE can be set to auto, trigger, or single. The
character program data in this case may be AUTO, TRIGGER, or
SINGLE. :TIMEBASE:MODE SINGLE sets the timebase mode to
single.

Numeric Program Data. Some command headers require program data

to be a number. For example, :TIMEBASE:RANGE requires the desired
full scale range to be expressed numerically. The instrument recognizes
integers, real numbers, and scientific notation. For more information see
the chapter "Message Communication and System Functions."

Program Message The program codes within a data message are executed after the program
Terminator message terminator is received. The terminator may be either an NL
(New Line) character, an EOI (End-Or-Identify) asserted, or a
combination of the two. All three ways are equivalent with the exact
encodings for the program terminators listed in the chapter "Message
Communication and System Functions." Asserting the EOI sets the EOI
control line low on the last byte of the data message. The NL character is
an ASCII linefeed (decimal 10).

Note
The NL (New Line) terminator has the same function as an
EOS (End Of String) and EOT (End Of Text) terminator.

HP 54501 A Introduction to Programming an Oscilloscope

Programming 1-9
 Selecting Multiple You can send multiple program commands and program queries for
Subsystems different subsystems on the same line by separating each command with a
semicolon. The colon following the semicolon enables you to enter a new
subsystem. For example:

< program mnemonic > < data >;: < program mnemonic > < data > <
terminator >

:CHANNEL1:RANGE 0.4;:TIMEBASE RANGE 1

Note
Multiple commands may be any combination of compound and
simple commands.

Summary The following illustration summarizes the syntax for programming over
the bus.

PROGRAM MESSAGE UNIT

OUTPUT XXX;
"

.-SYSTEM: HEADER ON"

T COMMAND ————————————————————

E ADDRESS —————————————————————————

AM MNEMONICS ——————————————————————————————————————————

ATOR ——————————————————————————————————————————————————

DATA

Introduction to Programming an Oscilloscope HP 54501A

1-10 Programming
Programming
an Oscilloscope

Initialization To make sure the bus and all appropriate interfaces are in a known state,
begin every program with an initialization statement. For example:

CLEAR 707 ! initializes the interface of the instrument.

Then initialize the instrument to a preset state. For example:

OUTPUT 707;"*RST" ! initializes the instrument to a preset state.

Note
The actual commands and syntax for initializing the instrument
are discussed in the chapter "Common Commands."

Refer to your controller manual and programming language

reference manual for information on initializing the interface.

HP 54501A Introduction to Programming an Oscilloscope

Programming 1-11
 Autoscale The AUTOSCALE feature of Hewlett-Packard digitizing oscilloscopes
performs a very useful function on unknown waveforms by setting up the
vertical channel, timebase, and trigger level of the instrument.

The syntax for Autoscale is:

:AUTOSCALE < terminator >

Setting Up A typical oscilloscope setup would set the vertical range and offset

the Instrument voltage, the horizontal range, delay time, delay reference, trigger mode,
trigger level, and slope. A typical example of the commands sent to the
oscilloscope are:

:CHANNEL1:RANGE 0.64;OPPSET 0.25 < terminator >

:TIMEBASE:RANGE 1E-6;DELAY 20E-9;MODE TRIGGERED < terminator >

:TRIGGER:LEVEL 0.25;SLOPE POSITIVE < terminator >

This example sets the vertical to 0.64 volts full-scale (80 mV/div) centered
at 0.25 V. The horizontal time is 1 ms full-scale with 20 ns delay. The
timebase mode is set to triggered, and the trigger circuit is programmed to
trigger at 0.25 volts on a positive slope.

Introduction to Programming an Oscilloscope HP 54501A

1-12 Programming
 Receiving After receiving a query (command header followed by a question mark),

Information from the instrument interrogates the requested function and places the answer
in its output queue. The answer remains in the output queue until it is
the Instrument
read or another command is issued. When read, the answer is transmitted
across the bus to the designated listener (typically a controller). The input
statement for receiving a response message from an instrument's output
queue typically has two parameters; the device address and a format
specification for handling the response message. For example, to read the
result of the query command :SYSTEM:LONGFORM? you would
execute the statement:

ENTER < device address > ;SettingS

where < device address > represents the address of your device. This
would enter the current setting for the longform command in the string
variable SettingS.

Note
All results for queries sent in a program message must be read
before another program message is sent. For example, when you
send the query :MEASURE:RISETIME?, you must follow that
query with the program statement ENTER Risetime$ to read the
result of the query and place the result in a variable (Risetime$).

Sending another command before reading the result of the query

will cause the output buffer to be cleared and the current
response to be lost. This will also cause an error to be placed in
the error queue.

Executing an ENTER statement before sending a query will

cause the controller to wait indefinitely.

The actual ENTER program statement you use when

programming is dependent on the programming language you are
using.

The format specification for handling the response messages is

dependent on both the controller and the programming language.

HP 54501A Introduction to Programming an Oscilloscope

Programming 1-13
 Response Header The format of the returned ASCII string depends on the current settings
Options of the SYSTEM HEADER and LONGFORM commands. The general
format is:

< header > < separator > <data> < terminator >

The header identifies the data that follows and is controlled by issuing a
:SYSTEM:HEADER ON/OFF command. If the state of the header
command is OFF, only the data is returned by the query. The format of
the header is controlled by the :SYSTEM:LONGFORM ON/OFF
command. If longform is OFF, the header will be in its shortform and the
header will vary in length depending on the particular query. The
following would be returned from a :MEASURE:FREQUENCY?
frequency measurement query:

< data > < terminator > (with HEADER OFF)

:MEAS:FREQ < separator > < data > < terminator > (with HEADER ON/LONGFORM OFF)

:MEASURE:FREQUENCY < separator > < data > < terminator > (with HEADER ON/LONGFORM ON)

Note
A command or query may be sent in either longform or
shortform, or in any combination of longform and shortform.
The HEADER and LONGFORM commands only control the
format of the returned data and have no effect on the way
commands are sent. Common commands never return a header.

Refer to the chapter "System Subsystem" for information on

turning the HEADER and LONGFORM commands on and off.

Introduction to Programming an Oscilloscope HP 54501A

1-14 Programming
 Response Data Most data will be returned as exponential or integer numbers. However,
Formats query data of instrument setups may be returned as character data.
Interrogating the trigger SLOPE? will return one of the following:

:TRIGGER:SLOPE POSITIVE < terminator > (with HEADER ON/LONGFORM ON)

:TRIG:SLOP POS < terminator > (with HEADER ON/LONGFORM OFF)

POSITIVE < terminator > (with HEADER OFF/LONGFORM ON)

POS < terminator > (with HEADER OFF/LONGFORM OFF)

Note
Refer to the individual commands in this manual for
information on the format (alpha or numeric) of the data
returned from each query.

HP 54501A Introduction to Programming an Oscilloscope

Programming 1-15
 String Variables If you want to observe the headers for queries, you must bring the
returned data into a string variable. Reading queries into string variables
is simple and straightforward, requiring little attention to formatting. For
example:

ENTER < device address > ;Result$

places the output of the query in the string variable ResultS.

Note
String variables are case sensitive and must be expressed exactly
the same each time they are used.

The output of the instrument may be numeric or character data

depending on what is queried. Refer to the specific commands for the
formats and types of data returned from queries.

Note
For the example programs, assume that the device being
programmed is at device address 707. The actual address will
vary according to how you have configured the bus for your own
application.

The following example shows the data being returned to a string variable
with headers off:

10 DIM Rang$[30]
20 OUTPUT 707;":SYSTEM:HEADER OFF"
30 OUTPUT 707;":CHANNEL1:RANGE?"
40 ENTER 707;Rang$
50 PRINT RangS
60 END

After running this program, the controller displays:

+1.00000E-1

Introduction to Programming an Oscilloscope HP 54501A

1-16 Programming
Numeric Variables If you do not need tosee the headers when a numeric value is returned
from the instrument, then you can use a numeric variable. When you are
receiving numeric data into a numeric variable, turn the headers off.

Note
When you are receiving numeric data into numeric variables, the
headers should be turned off. Otherwise the headers may cause
misinterpretation of returned data.

The following example shows the data being returned to a numeric

variable.

10 OUTPUT 707;":SYSTEM:HEADER OFF"

20 OUTPUT 707;":CHANNEL1:RANGE?"
30 ENTER 707;Rang
40 PRINT Rang
50 END

After running this program, the controller displays:

.1

HP 54501A Introduction to Programming an Oscilloscope

Programming 1-17
 Definite-Length Definite-length block response data allows any type of device-dependent
BIOCk Response data to be transmitted over the system interface as a series of 8-bit binary
Data ^ata ^y^- Th^ ls particularly useful for sending large quantities of data
or 8-bit extended ASCII codes. The syntax is a pound sign (#) followed
by a non-zero digit representing the number of digits in the decimal
integer. After the non-zero digit is the decimal integer that states the
number of 8-bit data bytes being sent. This is followed by the actual data.

For example, for transmitting 80 bytes of data, the syntax would be:

NUMBER OF DIGITS
THAT FOLLOW
ACTUAL DATA

#800000080<eighty bytes of dota><terminator>

NUMBER OF BYTES
TO BE TRANSMITTED i6500B03

The "8" states the number of digits that follow, and "00000080" states the

number of bytes to be transmitted.

Introduction to Programming an Oscilloscope HP 54501A

1-18 Programming
 Multiple Queries You can send multiple queries to the instrument within a single program

message, but you must also read them back within a single program
message. This can be accomplished by either reading them back into a
string variable or into multiple numeric variables. For example, you could
read the result of the query :TIMEBASE:RANGE?;DELAY? into the
string variable Results$ with the command:

ENTER 707;Results$

When you read the result of multiple queries into string variables, each
response is separated by a semicolon. For example, the response of the
query :TIMEBASE:RANGE?;DELAY? with HEADER and
LONGFORM on would be:

:TIMEBASE:RANGE <range_setting>;:TIMEBASE:DELAY <delay_setting>

If you do not need tosee the headers when the numeric values are
returned, then you could use following program message to read the query
:TIMEBASE:RANGE?;DELAY? into multiple numeric variables:

ENTER 707;Resultl,Result2

Note
When you are receiving numeric data into numeric variables, the
headers should be turned off. Otherwise the headers may cause
misinterpretation of returned data.

Instrument Status Status registers track the current status of the instrument. By checking the
instrument status, you can find out whether an operation has been
completed, whether the instrument is receiving triggers, and more. The
chapter "Message Communication and System Functions" explains how to
check the status of the instrument.

HP 54501A Introduction to Programming an Oscilloscope

Programming 1-19
Digitize Command The ACQUIRE and WAVEFORM subsystems are subsystems that affect
the DIGITIZE command. The DIGITIZE command is used to capture a
waveform in a known format which is specified by the ACQUIRE
subsystem. When the DIGITIZE command is sent to an instrument, the
specified channel signal is digitized with the current ACQUIRE
parameters. To obtain waveform data, you must specifythe
WAVEFORM parameters for the waveform data prior to sending the
:WAVEFORM:DATA? query.

The number of data points comprising a waveform varies according to the

number requested in the ACQUIRE subsystem. The ACQUIRE

subsystem determines the number of data points, type of acquistion, and
number of averages used by the DIGITIZE command. This allows you to
specify exactly what the digitized information will contain. A typical setup
is:

OUTPUT 707;'":ACQUIRE:TYPE AVERAGE" < terminator >

OUTPUT 707;'":ACQUIRE:COMPLETE 100" < terminator >
OUTPUT 707;'":WAVEFORM:SOURCE CHANNELl' < terminator >
OUTPUT 707;'":WAVEFORM:FORMAT ASCII" < tenninator>
OUTPUT 707;'":ACQUIRE:COUNT 4" < terminator >
OUTPUT 707;'":ACQUIRE:POINTS 500" < terminator >
OUTPUT 707;'":DIGmZE CHANNELl" < terminator>
OUTPUT 707; ":WAVEFORM:DATA?" < terminator >

This setup places the instrument into the average mode with four averages
and defines the data record to be 500 points. This means that when the
DIGITIZE command is received, the waveform will not be stored into
memory until 500 points have been averaged at least four times.

After receiving the :WAVEFORM:DATA? query, the instrument will start

passing the waveform information when addressed to talk.

Digitized waveforms are passed from the instrument to the controller by

sending a numerical representation of each digitized point. The format of
the numerical representation is controlled with the
:WAVEFORM:FORMAT command and may be selected as ASCII,
WORD, BYTE, or COMPRESSED.

Introduction to Programming an Oscilloscope HP 54501A

1-20 Programming
 The easiest method of entering a digitized waveform from the instrument
is to use the ASCII format and place the information in an integer array.
The data point is represented by signed six-digit integers whose values
range from 0 to 32,640. You must scale the integers to determine the
voltage value of each point. These integers are passed starting with the
leftmost point on the instrument's display. For more information, refer to
the chapter "Waveform Subsystem."

HP 54501A Introduction to Programming an Oscilloscope

Programming 1-21
Interface Functions 2

Introduction This section describes the interface functions and some general concepts
of the HP-IB. In general, these functions are defined by IEEE 488.1.
They deal with general bus management issues, as well as messages which
can be sent over the bus as bus commands.

Interface The interface capabilities of the HP 54501A, as defined by IEEE 488.1 are
Capabilities SH1, AH1, T5, L4, SRI, RL1, PP1, DC1, DT1, CO, and E2.

Command and The HP-IB has two modes of operation: command mode and data mode.
The bus is in command mode when the ATN line is true. The command
Data Concepts
mode is used to send talk and listen addresses and various bus commands,
such as a group execute trigger (GET). The bus is in the data mode when
the ATN line is false. The data mode is used to convey device-dependent
messages across the bus. The device-dependent messages include all of
the instrument command and responses found in chapters 5 through 17 of
this manual.

Addressing By using the front-panel controls, the instrument can be placed in either
talk-only mode or addressed (talk/listen) mode (see your front-panel
reference). Talk-only mode should be used when you want the instrument
to talk directly to a printer without the aid of a controller. Addressed
mode is used when the instrument will operate in conjunction with a
controller. When the instrument is in the addressed mode, the following
is true:

HP 54501A Interface Functions

Programming 2-1
 Each device on the HP-IB resides at a particular address, ranging
from 0 to 30.

The active controller specifies which devices will talk, and which will
listen.

• An instrument, therefore, may be talk addressed, listen addressed, or

unaddressed by the controller.

If the controller addresses the instrument to talk, it will remain configured

to talk until it receives an interface clear message (IFC), another
instrument's talk address (OTA), its own listen address (MLA), or a
universal untalk command (UNT).

If the controller addresses the instrument to listen, it will remain

configured to listen until it receives an interface clear message (IFC), its
own talk address (MTA), or a universal unlisten command (UNL).

Remote, Local The local, remote, and remote with local lockout modes may be used for
various degrees of front-panel control while a program is running. The
and Local
instrument will accept and execute bus commands while in local mode,
Lockout and the front panel will also be entirely active. If the HP 54501A is in
remote mode, all controls (except the power switch and the LOCAL key)
are entirely locked out. Local control can only be restored by the
controller or pressing the front-panel LOCAL key.

Note
Cycling the power will also restore local control, but this will also
reset certain HP-IB states.

The instrument is placed in remote mode by setting the REN bus control
line true, and then addressing the instrument to listen. The instrument
can be placed in local lockout mode by sending the local lockout
command (LLO). The instrument can be returned to local mode by
either setting the REN line false, or sending the instrument the go-to-local
command (GTL), or simulating a front-panel LOCAL key press using the
SYSTEM:KEY command.

Interface Functions HP 54501A

2-2 Programming
Bus Commands The following commands are IEEE 488.1 bus commands (ATN true).
IEEE 488.2 defines many of the actions which are taken when these
commands are received by the instrument.

Device Clear The device clear (DCL) or selected device clear (SDC) commands clear
the input and output buffers, reset the parser, and clear any pending
commands.

GrOUp Execute The group execute trigger (GET) command arms the trigger which is the
Trigger (GET) same action produced by sending the RUN command.

Interface Clear The interface clear (IFC) command halts all bus activity. This includes
(IFC) unaddressing all listeners and the talker, disabling serial poll on all
devices, and returning control to the system controller.

Status The HP 54501A will display the HP-IB status on the CRT. The message
will indicate whether the instrument is in the remote mode, whether talk
Annunciators
or listen is addressed, and whether the instrument has requested service.
When the instrument is in the local mode only the SRQ annunciator may
be displayed.

HP 54501A Interface Functions

Programming 2-3
Message Communication 3
and System Functions

This chapter describes the operation of instruments that operate in

compliance with the IEEE 488.2 standard. Instruments that are
compatible with IEEE 488.2 must also be compatible with IEEE 488.1,
however IEEE 488.1 compatible instruments may or may not conform to
the IEEE 488.2 standard. The IEEE 488.2 standard defines the message
exchange protocols by which the instrument and the controller will
communicate. It also defines some common capabilities, which are found
in all IEEE 488.2 instruments. This chapter also contains a few items
which are not specifically defined by IEEE 488.2, but deal with message
communication or system functions.

Protocols The protocols of IEEE 488.2 define the overall scheme used by the
controller and the instrument to communicate. This includes defining
when it is appropriate for devices to talk or listen, and what happens when
the protocol is not followed.

Functional Elements Before proceeding with the description of the protocol, a few system
components should be understood.

Input Buffer. The input buffer of the instrument is the memory area
where commands and queries are stored prior to being parsed and
executed. It allows a controller to send a string of commands to the
instrument which could take some time to execute, and then proceed to
talk to another instrument while the first is parsing and executing
commands. The HP 54501A's input buffer will hold 300 characters, or
bytes of data.

HP 54501A Message Communication and System Functions

Programming 3-1
 Output Queue. The output queue of the instrument is the memory area
where all output data (< response messages > ) are stored until read by
the controller. The HP 54501A's output queue will hold 300 characters,
however the instrument will handle block data of greater than 300
characters where appropriate.

Parser. The instrument's parser is the component that interprets the

commands sent to the instrument and decides what actions should be
taken. "Parsing" refers to the action taken by the parser to achieve this
goal. Parsing and executing of commands begins when either the
instrument sees a < program message terminator > (defined later in this
chapter) or the input buffer becomes full. If you wish to send a long
sequence of commands to be executed and then talk to another
instrument while they are executing, you should send all the commands
before sending the < program message terminator >.

Protocol Overview The instrument and controller communicate using < program message > s
and < response message > s. These messages serve as the containers into
which sets of program commands or instrument responses are placed.
<
program message > s are sent by the controller to the instrument, and
< response message >
are sent from the instrument to the controller in
s

response to query message. A "query message" is defined as being a

a

< program message > which contains one or more queries. The

instrument will only talk when it has received a valid query message, and
therefore has something to say. The controller should only attempt to
read a response after sending a complete query message, but before
is
sending another < program message
>. The basic rule to remember
that the instrument will only talk when prompted to, and it then expects to
talk before being told to do something else.

Protocol Operation When the instrument is turned on or when it receives a device clear

command, the input buffer and output queue are cleared, and the parser
is reset to the root level of the command tree.

The instrument and the controller communicate by exchanging complete

<
program message > s and < response message > s. This means that the
controller should always terminate a < program message > before
attempting to read a response. The instrument will terminate < response
message > s except during a hardcopy output.

Message Communication and System Functions HP 54501A

3-2 Programming
 If aquery message is sent, the next message passing over the bus should be
the < response message
>. The controller should always read the
complete < response message > associated with a query message before
sending another < program message > to the same instrument.

The instrument allows the controller to send multiple queries in one query
message. This is referred to as sending a "compound query." As will be
noted later in this chapter, multiple queries in a query message are
separated by semicolons. The responses to each of the queries in a
compound query will also be separated by semicolons.

Commands are executed in the order they are received. This also applies
to the reception of the group execute trigger (GET) bus command. The
group execute trigger command should not be sent in the middle of a
<
program message >.

Protocol Exceptions If an error

occurs during the information exchange, the exchange may not
be completed in a normal manner. Some of the protocol exceptions are
shown below.

Addressed to talk with nothing to say. If the instrument is addressed to

talk before it receives a query, it will indicate a query error and will not
send any bytes over the bus. If the instrument has nothing to say because
queries requested were unable to be executed because of some error, the
device will not indicate a query error, but will simply wait to receive the
next message from the controller.

Addressed to talk with no listeners on the bus. If the instrument is

addressed to talk and there are no listeners on the bus, the instrument will
wait for a listener to listen, or for the controller to take control.

HP 54501A Message Communication and System Functions

Programming 3-3
 Command Error. A command error will be reported if the instrument
detects a syntax error or an unrecognized command header.

Execution Error. An execution error will be reported if a parameter is

found to be out of range, or if the current settings do not allow execution
of a requested command or query.

Device-specific Error. A device-specific error will be reported if the

instrument is unable to execute a command for a strictly device dependent
reason.

Query Error. A query error will be reported if the proper protocol for
reading a query is not followed. This includes the interrupted and
unterminated conditions described below.

Unterminated Condition. If the controller attempts to read a < response

message > before terminating the program message >, a query error
<

will be generated. The parser will reset itself, and the response will be
cleared from the output queue of the instrument without being sent over
the bus.

Interrupted Condition. If the controller does not read the entire

< response message > generated by a
query message and then attempts to
send another < program message the device will generate a query
>,
error. The unread portion of the response will then be discarded by the
instrument. The interrupting < program message > will not be affected.

Buffer Deadlock. The instrument may become deadlocked if the input

buffer and output queue both become full. This condition can occur if a
very long < program message > is sent containing queries that generate a
great deal of response data. The instrument cannot accept any more
bytes, and the controller cannot read any of the response data until it has
completed sending the entire < program message >. Under this
condition the instrument will break the deadlock by clearing the output
queue, and continuing to discard responses until it comes to the end of the
current < program message The query error bit will also be set.
>.

Message Communication and System Functions HP 54501A

3-4 Programming
Syntax The syntax diagrams in this chapter are similar to the syntax diagrams in
the IEEE 488.2 specification. Commands and queries are sent to the
Diagrams
instrument as a sequence of data bytes. The allowable byte sequence for
each functional element is defined by the syntax diagram that is shown
with the element description.

The allowable byte sequence can be determined by following a path in the

syntax diagram. The proper path through the syntax diagram is any path
that follows the direction of the arrows. If there is a path around an
element, that element is optional. If there is a path from right to left
around one or more elements, that element or those elements may be
repeated as many times as desired.

Syntax This overview is intended to give a quick glance at the syntax defined by
IEEE 488.2. It should allow you to understand many of the things about
Overview the syntax you need to know. This chapter also contains the details of the
IEEE 488.2 defined syntax.

IEEE 488.2 defines the blocks used to build messages which are sent to
the instrument. A whole string of commands can therefore be broken up
into individual components.

HP 54501A Message Communication and System Functions

Programming 3-5
 Figure 3-1 shows a breakdown of an example < program message >.
There are a few key items to notice:

1. A semicolon separates
commands from one another. Each < program
message unit serves as a container for one command. The
>

<
program message unit > s are separated by a semicolon.

2. A program message > is terminated by a < NL > (new line), a

<

< NL > with EOIasserted, or EOI being asserted on the last byte of
the message. The recognition of the < program message terminator
>,
or < PMT by the parser serves as a signal for the parser to begin
>,
execution of commands. The < PMT > also affects command tree
traversal (see the Programming and Documentation Conventions
chapter).

3. Multiple data parameters are separated by a comma.

4. The first data parameter is separated from the header with one or more
spaces.

5. The header MEAS:SOURCE is a compound header. It places the

parser in the measure subsystem until the < NL> is encountered.

Message Communication and System Functions HP 54501A

3-6 Programming
 Figure 3-1. <program message > Parse Tree

HP 54501A Message Communication and System Functions

Programming 3-7
 Device Listening The listening syntax of IEEE 488.2 is designed to be more forgiving than
Syntax the talking syntax. This allows greater flexibility in writing programs, as
well as allowing them to be easier to read.

Upper/Lower Case Equivalence. Upper and lower case letters are

equivalent. The mnemonic RANGE has the same semantic meaning as the
mnemonic range.

< white space >. < white space > is defined to be one or more characters
from the ASCII set of 0 32 decimal, excluding 10 decimal (NL). < white
-

space > is used by several instrument listening components of the syntax.

It is usually optional, and can be used to increase the readability of a

program.

<wh i te spoce
choracter>

Figure 3-2. <white space >

Message Communication and System Functions HP 54501A

3-8 Programming
 <
program message >. The < program message > is a complete message
to be sent to the instrument. The instrument will begin executing
commands once it has a complete < program message >, or when the
input buffer becomes full. The parser is also repositioned to the root of
the command tree after executing a complete < program message
>.
Refer to the Tree Traversal Rules in the Programming and
Documentation Conventions chapter for more details.

Figure 3-3. <program message >

<
program message unit >. The < program message unit > is the
container for individual commands within a < program message >.

<commond messoge unil>

<query messoge unit>

Figure 3-4. <program message unit >

HP 54501A Message Communication and System Functions

Programming 3-9
 / 54120/BL41

Figure 3-5. <

command message unit >

/ 54120/BH2

Figure 3-6. <

query message unit >

<
program message unit separator >. A semicolon separates <
program
message unit > s, or individual commands.

<
command program header > / < query program header >. These
elements serve as the headers of commands or queries. They represent
the action to be taken.

Message Communication and System Functions HP 54501A

3-10 Programming
 <wh i te spoce>

Figure 3-7. < program message unit separator >

<simp Ie commond
program header>

<compound connmand
progrom header>

<corTmon command
program heoder>

Figure 3-8. < command program header>

HP 54501 A Message Communication and System Functions

Programming 3-11
 Where < simple command program header > is defined as

<pcogrom
mnemon i c>

Where < compound command program header > is defined as

<program <program
mnemon i c> mnemon i c>

Where < common command program header > is defined as

<progr om
mnemon i c>

Where < program mnemonic > is defined as

S4120/BL45
Where < upper/lower case alpha > is defined as a single ASCII encoded byte in the range
41 5A, 61 7A (65 90,97 -122 decimal).
- - -

Where < digit > is defined as a single ASCII encoded byte in the range 30 - 39 (48 - 57
decimal).

Where (_) represents an "underscore", a single ASCII-encoded byte with the value 5F (95
decimal).

Figure 3-8. < command program header > (continued)

Message Communication and System Functions HP 54501A

3-12 Programming
 <s imp Ie query
program heoder>

<compound query
program heoder>

<common query
program heoder>

Where < simple query program header > is defined as

<progrom
mnemon i c>

Where <
compound query program header > is defined as

<progr am
mnemon i c>

Where < common query program header > is defined as

<progr am
mnemon i c>

M120/BL46

Figure 3-9. < query program header >

HP 54501A Message Communication and System Functions

Programming 3-13
 <
program data >. The < program data > element represents the
possible types of data which may be sent to the instrument. The
HP 54501A will accept the following data types: < character program
data
>, decimal numeric program data >, suffix program data >,
< <

string program data arbitrary block

>, and program data >.
< <

Figure 3-10. <program data >

<progrom
mnemon i c>

Figure 3-11. < character program data >

Message Communication and System Functions HP 54501A

3-14 Programming
 <whi te
<monti sso>
1" spoce>
H" <exponent>

Where < mantissa > is defined as

<opt i ono1
di gi ts>

<digi t>

Where < optional digits > is defined as

Where < exponent > is defined as

<wh i te spoce>

Figure 3-12. < decimal numeric program data >

HP 54501A Message Communication and System Functions

Programming 3-15
 <wh i te space>
f <suf f i x mu11>
1" <su f f i x un i t>

Figure 3-13. < suffix program data >

Suffix Multiplier. The suffix multipliers that the instrument will accept
are shown in table 3-1.

Table 3-1. < suffix mult >

Value Mnemonic

1E18 EX
1E15 PE
1E12 T
1E9 G
1E6 MA
1E3 K

.1E-3 M
1E-6 U
1E-9 N
1E-12 P
1E-15 F
1E-18 A

Suffix Unit. The suffix units that the instrument will accept are shown in
table 3-2.

Table 3-2. < suffix unit >

SufTix Referenced Unit

V Volt
s Second

Message Communication and System Functions HP 54501A

3-16 Programming
 54120/BL53

Where < inserted' > is defined as a single ASCII character with the value 27 (39 decimal).

Where < non-single quote char > is defined as a single ASCII character of any value except
27 (39 decimal).

Where < inserted" > is defined as a single ASCII character with the value 22 (34 decimal).

Where < non-double quote char > is defined as a single ASCII character of any value
except 22 (34 decimal).

Figure 3-14. < string program data >

HP 54501A Message Communication and System Functions

Programming 3-17
 / <8-b i t
<non-zero \

digit>
k, <digi t> \ -^-». dota byte>

<8-b i t
data byte>

Where < non-zero digit > is defined as a single ASCII encoded byte in the range 31 - 39 (49
- 57 decimal).

Where < 8-bit byte> is defined as an 8-bit byte in the range 00 -ff (0 - 255 decimal).

Figure 3-15. < arbitrary block program data >

<
program data separator >. A comma separates multiple data
parameters of a command from one another.

<wh i <wh i te spacc>

te spoce>

Figure 3-16. <program data separator>

Message Communication and System Functions HP 54501A

3-18 Programming
 <
program header separator >. A space (ASCII decimal 32) separates
the header from the first or only parameter of the command.

<wh i te space>

Figure 3-17. < program header separator>

<
program message terminator >. The < program message terminator >
or < PMT > serves as the terminator to a complete < program message >.
When the parser sees a complete < program message > it will begin
execution of the commands within that message. The < PMT > also resets
the parser to the root of the command tree.

X
——»-

\ . /

While < NL> is defined as a single ASCII-encodcd byte OA (10 decimal).

Figure 3-18. <

program message terminator >

HP 54501A Message Communication and System Functions

Programming 3-19
 Figure 3-19. < response message > Tree

Message Communication and System Functions HP 54501A

3-20 Programming
Device Talking Syntax The talking syntax of IEEE 4882 is designed to be more precise than the
listening syntax. This allows the programmer to write routines which can
more easily interpret and use the data the instrument is sending. One of
the implications of this is the absence of < white space > in the talking
formats. The instrument will not pad messages which are being sent to the
controller with spaces.

< response message >. This element serves as a complete response from
the instrument. It is the result of the instrument executing and buffering
the results from a complete < program message
>. The complete
< response message > should be read before sending another <
program
message > to the instrument.

Figure 3-20. < response message >

<
response message unit >. This element serves as the container of
individual pieces of a response. Typically a < query message unit > will
generate one < response message unit >, although a < query message
unit > may generate multiple < response message unit > s.

<
response header >. The < response header >, when returned, indicates
what the response data represents.

HP 54501A Message Communication and System Functions

Programming 3-21
 54120/BL58

Where < simple response mnenomio is defined as

<response
mnemon i c>

Where < compound response header > is defined as

<response <response
mnemon i c> mnemon i c>

54120/BL60

Where <
common response header > is defined as

Figure 3-21. < response message unit >

Message Communication and System Functions HP 54501A

3-22 Programming
 Where < response mnemonic > is defined as

54120/BL62
Where <uppercase alpha > is defined as a single ASCII encoded byte in the range 41 -
5A
(65-90 decimal).

Where (_) represents an "underscore", a single ASCII encoded byte with the value 5F (95
decimal).

Figure 3-21. < response message unit > (continued)

<
response data >. The < response data > element represents the
various types of data which the instrument may return. These types
include: < character response data
>, nrl numeric response data
< >

(integer), < nr3 numeric response data > (exponential), < string response

>, definite length arbitrary block response

data data and arbitrary
< <
>,
ASCII response data >.

<response
mnemonic>

Figure 3-22. < character response data >

Figure 3-23. < nrl numeric response data >

HP 54501A Message Communication and System Functions

Programming 3-23
 <digit> <digi t>

Figure 3-24. <

nr3 numeric response data >

Figure 3-25. < string response data >

Message Communication and System Functions HP 54501A

3-24 Programming
 i t
# <non-zero v —

<d igi t> <8-b

digi t> dato byte>

Figure 3-26. < definite length arbitrary block >

Where < ASCII data type > represents any ASCII-cncoded byte except <NL> (OA.10
decimal).

1. The END message provides an umambiguous termination to an element that contains

arbitrary ASCII characters.

2. The IEEE 488.1 END message serves the dual function for terminating this element as
well as terminating the < RESPONSE MESSAGE >. It is only sent once with the last
byte of the indefinite block data. The NL is presented for consistency with the
< RESPONSE MESSAGE TERMINATOR >.

Figure 3-27. < arbitrary ASCII response data >

< response data separator >. A comma separates multiple pieces of

response data within a single < response message unit >.

54120/BL69

Figure 3-28. <

response data separator >

HP 54501A Message Communication and System Functions

Programming 3-25
 <
response header separator >. A space (ASCII decimal 32) delimits the
response header, if returned, from the first or only piece of data.

Figure 3-29. < response header separator >

<
response message unit separator >. A semicolon delimits the
< response message unit > s if multiple responses are returned,

Figure 3-30. < response message unit separator >

<
response message terminator >. A response message terminator >
<

(NL) terminates complete response message >. It should be read

a <

from the instrument along with the response itself.

Note
If you do not read the < response message terminator > the
HP 54501A will produce an interrupted error on the next message.

Message Communication and System Functions HP 54501A

3-26 Programming
Common IEEE 488.2 defines a set of common commands. These commands
perform functions which are common to any type of instrument. They can
Commands
therefore be implemented in a standard way across a wide variety of
instrumentation. All the common commands of IEEE 488.2 begin with an
asterisk. There is one key difference between the IEEE 488.2 common
commands and the rest of the commands found in this instrument. The
IEEE 488.2 common commands do not affect the parser's position within
the command tree. More information about the command tree and tree
traversal can be found in the Programming and Documentation
Conventions chapter.

Table 3-3. HP 54501A's IEEE 488.2 Common Commands

Command Command Name

*CLS Clear Status Command

*ESE Event Status Enable Command
*ESE? Event Status Enable Query
*ESR? Event Status Register Query
*IDN? Identification Query
*IST? Individual Status Query
*LRN? Learn Device Setup Query
*OPC Operation Complete Command
*OPC? Operation Complete Query
*OPT? Option Identification Query
*PRE Parallel Poll Enable Register Enable Command
*PRE? Parallel Poll Enable Register Enable Query
*RCL Recall Command
*RST Reset Command
*SAV Save Command
*SRE Sendee Request Enable Command
*SRE? Service Request Enable Query
*STB? Read Status Byte Query
*TRG Trigger Command
*TST? Self-Test Query
*WAI Wait-to-Continue Command

HP 54501A Message Communication and System Functions

Programming 3-27
Status The status reporting features which are available over the HP-IB include
the serial and parallel polls. IEEE 488.2 defines data structures,
Reporting
commands, and common bit definitions for each. There are also
instrument defined structures and bits.

The bits in the status byte act as summary bits for the data structures
residing behind them. In the case of queues, the summary bit is set if the
queue is not empty. For registers, the summary bit is set if any enabled bit
in the event register is set. The events are enabled via the corresponding
event enable register. Events captured by an event register remain set
until the register is read or cleared. Registers are read with their
associated commands. The "*CLS" command clears all event registers and
all queues except the output queue. If "*CLS" is sent immediately
following a < program message terminator will also
>, the output queue
be cleared.

Message Communication and System Functions HP 54501A

3-28 Programming
 OUTPUT QUEUE

N OT
QUEUE
wrr —————
————

\ P
>--fi^}.•—— REXO BY :LTER?

OIM NOT EtPTY

MESSAGE QUEUE
°|' -•"•°°
'
POWER ON
USER REQUEST
COMMAND ERROR
EXECUTION ERROR
DEVICE DEPENDENT ERROR
QUERY ERROR

^.,
3 REQUEST CONTROL
OPERATION COtfl.ETE

"I"' r
,ES;@i
)*—[TO"}*—
STANDARD
CEHERAT 101IN
REAO BY ;LE»T ;9YSTEU:DSP? 7 6 | | 1 6
EVENT STATUS REGISTER

^^
READ BY -ESR?

i ,
E

(a)^—ITRG |4— READ fir :rER?

^^
-(• J
READ BY SERIAL POLL
fROST I
-^—
—T? 6 E SB MA V 1 | fl STATUS BYTE REGISTER
c
]
~|ussl ^
•^— READ BY .STB? ; -L ),i

^)
\
"I ), )
i
————^J
]}^
^ ®,)
T
g STANDARD

^
^), 76543216 EVENT STATUS ENABLE
REGrSTER
SET BY •ESE <Wf>
READ BV •ESE?
|
^ )

1'/ )
,

^
.
| .
y i

Figure 3-31. Status Reporting Data Structures

HP 54501 A Message Communication and System Functions

Programming 3-29
 Bit Definitions MAY message available. Indicates whether there is
•
a response in the
output queue.

ESB event status bit Indicates if any of the conditions in the Standard
•

Event Status Register are set and enabled.

MSS master summary status. Indicates whether the device has

•
a reason
for requesting service. This bit is returned for the *STB? query.

RQS request service. Indicates if the device is requesting service. This

•

bit is returned during a serial poll. RQS will be set to 0 after being read via
a serial poll (MSS is not reset by -STB?).

MSG Message. Indicates whether there

- is a message in the message
queue.

PON •
power on. Always 0 in the HP 54501A.

URQ user request. Indicates whether

- a front panel key has been pressed.

CME command error. -

Indicates whether the parser detected an error.

EXE execution error. Indicates whether

• a parameter was out of range, or
inconsistent with current settings.

DDE device specific error. Indicates whether the device

•
was unable to
complete an operation for device dependent reasons.

QYE query error. Indicates whether the protocol for queries has been
-

violated.

RQC request control. Indicates whether the device

• is requesting control.
The HP 54501A will never request control.

OPC operation complete. Indicates whether the device has completed all
-

pending operations.

LCL local. Indicates whether

- a remote to local transition has occurred.

Message Communication and System Functions HP 54501A

3-30 Programming
 TRG trigger. Indicates whether
• a trigger has been received.

LTF limit test failure. Indicates whether

- a limit test failure has occurred.

Key Features A few of the most important features of Status Reporting are shown below.

Operation Complete. The IEEE 488.2 structure provides one technique

which can be used to find out if any operation is finished. The *OPC
command, when sent to the instrument after the operation of interest, will
set the OPC bit in the Standard Event Status Register. If the OPC bit and
the RQS bit have been enabled, a service request will be generated.

OUTPUT 707;"*SRE 32; *ESE 1" !enables an OPC service request

OUTPUT 707;":DIG CHAN1; *OPC" iinitiates data acquisition, and
!will generate a SRQ when the
! acquisition is complete

The Trigger Bit. The TRG bit indicates if the device has received a
trigger. The TRG event register will stay set after receiving a trigger until
it is cleared by reading it or using the *CLS command. If your application
needs to detect multiple triggers, the TRG event register must be cleared
after each one.

If you are using the Service Request to interrupt a program or controller

operation when the trigger bit is set, then you must clear the event register
after each time it has been set.

OUTPUT 707;"*SRE I"! enables a trigger service request.

! the next trigger will generate an SRQ.

OUTPUT 707;":TER?"! queries the TRG event register, thus

ENTER 707;A$! clearing it.
! the next trigger can now generate an
!SRQ

Status Byte. If the device is requesting service (RQS set), and the
controller serial polls the device, the RQS bit is cleared. The MSS bit
(read with *STB?) will not be cleared by reading it. The status byte is not
cleared when read, except for the RQS bit.

HP 54501A Message Communication and System Functions

Programming 3-31
 Serial Poll The HP 54501A supports the IEEE 488.1 serial poll feature. When a
serial poll of the instrument is requested, the RQS bit is returned on bit 6
of the status byte.

Using Serial Poll. This example will show how to use the service request
by conducting a serial poll of all instruments on the bus. In this example,
assume that there are two instruments on the bus; an oscilloscope at
address 7 and a printer at address 1. These address assumptions are made
throughout this manual, and it is also assumed that we are operating on
Interface Select Code 7.

The program command for serial poll using HP BASIC 4.0 is

Stat SPOLL(707). The address 707 is the address of the oscilloscope in
=

this example. The command for checking the printer is

Stat SPOLL(701) because the address of that instrument is 01 on bus
=

address 7. This command reads the contents of the HP-IB Status Register
into the variable called Stat. At that time bit 6 of the variable Stat can be
tested to see if it is set (bit 6 1).
=

The serial poll operation can be conducted in the following manner.

1. Enable interrupts on the bus. This allows the controller to "see" the
SRQ line.

2. If the SRQ line is high (some instrument is requesting service) then

check the instrument at address 1 to see if bit 6 of its status register is
high.

3. Disable interrupts on the bus.

Message Communication and System Functions HP 54501A

3-32 Programming
 4. To check whether bit 6 of an instruments status register is high, use the
following command line.

IF BIT (Stat, 6) then

5. If bit 6 of the instrument

at address 1 is not high, then check the
instrument at address 7 to see if bit 6 of its status register is high.

6. As soon as the instrument with status bit 6 high is found, check the
rest of the status bits to determine what is required.

The SPOLL(707) command causes much more to happen on the bus than
simply reading the register. This command clears the bus, automatically
addresses the talker and listener, sends SPE (serial poll enable) and SPD
(serial poll disable) bus commands, and reads the data. For more
information about serial poll, refer to your controller manual, and
programming language reference manuals.

After the serial poll is completed, the RQS bit in the HP 54501A Status
Byte Register will be reset if it was set. Once a bit in the Status Byte
Register is set, it will remain set until the status is cleared with a *CLS
command, or the instrument is reset. If these bits do not get reset, they
cannot generate another SRQ.

HP 54501A Message Communication and System Functions

Programming 3-33
 Parallel Poll Parallel poll is a controller initiated operation which is used to obtain
information from several devices simultaneously. When a controller
initiates a Parallel Poll, each device returns a Status Bit via one of the DIO
data lines. Device DIO assignments are made by the controller using the
PPC (Parallel Poll Configure) sequence. Devices respond either
individually, each on a separate DIO line; collectively on a single DIO line;
or any combination of these two ways. When responding collectively, the
result is a logical AND (True High) or a logical OR (True Low) of the
groups of the status bits.

Figure 3-32 shows the Parallel Poll Data Structure. The summary bit is
sent in response to a Parallel Poll. This summary bit is the "ist" (Individual
Status) local message.

The Parallel Poll Enable Register determines which events are

summarized in the individual status local register. The *PRE (Parallel
Poll Register Enable) command is used to write to the enable register and
the *PRE? query is used to read the register. The *IST? query can be
used to read the "ist" without doing a parallel poll.

Message Communication and System Functions HP 54501A

3-34 Programming
 REFER TO SERIAL POLL STATUS REPORTING

UN ••"
TIO
1
iJHHH
7 MSS ESB MAV LTF MSG LCL TRG
STATUS BYTE REGISTER
READ BY «STB?

•*-(&
t
^ ^
,

^ 5,
§ •^——
/-
s
'^ '
) 1
<
0
>—i

~\p,
8
J

M),
1

K), i

1
;
)
PARALLEL POLL

INDIVIDUAL STATUS
7654.3210 M501/BLZ1
SET BY *PRE <NRf>
READ BY «IST?

Figure 3-32. Parallel Poll Data Structure.

HP 54501A Message Communication and System Functions

Programming 3-35
Polling HP-IB Devices. Parallel Poll is the fastest means of gathering device status when several
devices are connected to the bus. Each device (with this capability) can be
programmed to respond with one bit of status when parallel polled. This
makes it possible to obtain the status of several devices in one operation.
If a device responds affirmatively to a parallel poll, more information
about its specific status can be obtained by conducting a serial poll of the
device.

Configuring Parallel Certain devices, including the HP 54501A, can be remotely programmed
Poll Responses by a controller to respond to a parallel poll. A device which is currently
programmed for a parallel poll responds to the poll by placing its current
status on one of the bus data lines. The response and the data-bit number
can be programmed by the PPC (Parallel Poll Configure) statement.
Multiple listeners cannot be specified in this statement. If more than one
device is to respond on a single bit, each device must be configured with a

separate PPC statement.

Example: ASSIGN ©Device to 707

PPOLL CONFIGURE @Device;Mask

The value of Mask (any numeric expression can be specified) is first

rounded and then used to configure the device's parallel response. The
least significant 3 bits (bits 0 through 2) of the expression are used to
determine which data line the device is to respond on (place its status on).
Bit 3 specifies the "true" state of the parallel poll response bit of the device.
A value ofO implies that the device's response is 0 when its status bit
message is true.

Example: The following statement configures the device at address 07 on the

interface select 7 to respond by placing a 0 on DI04 when its status
response is "true."

PPOLL CONFIGURE 707;4

Message Communication and System Functions HP 54501A

3-36 Programming
 Conducting a Parallel The PPOLL (Parallel Poll) function returns a single byte containing up to
Poll 8 status bit messages for all devices on the bus capable of responding to
the poll. Each bit returned by the function corresponds to the status bit of
the devices(s) configured to respond to the parallel poll (one or more
devices can respond on a single line). The PPOLL function can only be
executed by the controller. It is initiated by the simultaneous assertion of
ATNandEOL

Example: Response = PPOLL(7)

Disabling Parallel Poll The PPU (Parallel Poll Unconfigure) statement gives the controller the
Responses capability of disabling the parallel poll response of one or more devices on
the bus.

Examples: The following statement disables device five only:

PPOLL UNCONFIGURE 705

This statement disables all devices on interface select code eight from
responding to a parallel poll:

PPOLL UNCONFIGURE 8

If no primary address is specified, all bus devices are disabled from

responding to a parallel poll. If a primary address is specified, only the
specified devices (which have the parallel poll configure capability) are
disabled.

HP-IB Commands The following paragraphs describe actual HP-IB command which can be
used to perform the functions of the Basic commands shown in the
previous examples.

Parallel Poll Unconfigure Command. The parallel poll Unconfigure

command (PPU) resets all parallel poll devices to the idle state (unable to
respond to a parallel poll).

Parallel Poll Configure Command. The parallel poll configure command

(PPC) causes the addressed listener to be configured according to the
parallel poll enable secondary command PPE.

HP 54501A Message Communication and System Functions

Programming 3-37
 Parallel Poll Enable Command. The parallel poll enable secondary
command (PPE) configures the devices which have received the PPC
command to respond to a parallel poll on a particular HP-IB DIO line
with a particular level.

Parallel Poll Disable Command. The Parallel Poll disable secondary

command (PPD) disables the devices which have received the PPC
command from responding to parallel poll.

Table 3-4. Parallel Poll Commands

Command Mnemonic Decimal ASCII/ISO

Code Character

Parallel Poll Unconfigure PPU 21 NAK

(Multiline Command)

Parallel Poll Configure PPC 05 ENQ

(Secondary Command)

Parallel Poll Enable PPE 96-111 1-0

(Secondary Command)

Parallel Poll Disable PPD 112 P

(Secondary Command)

Message Communication and System Functions HP 54501A

3-38 Programming
Programming and 4
Documentation Conventions

Introduction This section covers conventions which are used in programming the
instrument, as well as conventions used in the remainder of this manual.
This chapter contains a detailed description of the command tree and
command tree traversal. For more information on command syntax refer
to the chapter "Message Communication and System Functions."

Truncation The truncation rule for the mnemonics used in headers and alpha
Rules arguments is:

The mnemonic is the first four characters of the keyword unless:

The fourth character is a vowel, then the mnemonic is the first three
characters of the keyword.

This rule will not be used if the length of the keyword is exactly four
characters.

Some examples of how the truncation rule is applied to various commands

are shown in table 4-1.

Table 4-1. Mnemonic Truncation

Longfonn Shortform

RANGE RANG
PATTERN PATT
TIME TIME
DELAY DEL

HP 54501A Programming and Documentation Conventions

Programming 4-1
 .(root)

*CLS AUT oscoIe System: ACQuire: CAL ibrote: CHANneKN>: DISPlay: FUNCtion<
*ESE BEE Per
•ESR BLA Nk DSP COMPIete TNUL 1 COUP 1 i ng COLu mn ADD
DIG ITize ERRor COUNt ECL CONN ect INVert
*IDN DATA
-1ST EOI HEADer POINts HFRe ject MULTiply
ERA ep KEY TYPE OFFSet FORM ot OFFSet
*LRN GRAT i cu Ie
-OPC 1F R LONGform PROBe ONLY
<OPT LTER SETup RANG e INVe rse RANGE
«
ppr
'• MENU TTL LINE SUBTract
nr\L
»RCL MERGe WSK VERSUS
PERS i stence
*RST PRINt
*SAV RUN KUW
*SRE SER i a 1 SCRe en
•STB STOP auUKce
«TRG STORe ^^"S
ILX 1
•TST
<WAI VTFW TMARker
•1[- VMARker
Root Leve 1
Common
Comn onds
Commands
(IEEE 488.2) 54501S30

This instrument contains four identical channel subsystems and two

identical function subsystems. The "N"
the Channel header must be
in 1

through 4. and the Function header must be 1•'--"'

or Z.

Figure 4-1. The HP 54501A Command Tree

Programming and Documentation Conventions HP 54501A

4-2 Programming
 HARDcopy: MEASure: TIMebose: TRIGger: WAVeform:
LENGth ALL DELoy CONDilion COUNt
PAGE COMPore MODE DELoy DATA
CURSor RANGe DELoy: FORMat
DEF ine REFerence SLOPE POINts
DELoy WINDOW SOURce PREamble
DEST motion WINDOW: FIELd SOURce
DUTycycle DELay HOLDoff TYPE
ESTArt RANGe LEVe I
XINCrement
ESTOp LINE XORig in
FALLtime LOGic XREFerence
FREOuency MODE YINCrennent
LIMi ttesi Occurrence YOR i g i n

LOWer OCCur rence: YREFerence

MODE SLOPe
NWIDth SOURce
OVERshoot PATH
PERiod POLar i ty
POSTfoi lure OUAL i fy
PRECis i on SLOPe
PREShoot SOURce
PWIDth STANdard
RESults
RISet ime
SCRatch
SOURce
STATistics
TDELta
TMAX
TMIN
TSTArt
TSTOp
TVOLt
UNITs
UPPer
VAMPI i tude

VAVerage
VBASe
VDELta
VFIFty
VMAX
VMIN
VPP
VRELoti ve
VRMS
VSTAr t
VSTOp
VTIMe
VTOP

Figure 4-1. The HP 54501A Command Tree (continued)

HP 54501A Programming and Documentation Conventions

Programming 4-3
The Command The command tree (figure 4-1) shows all commands in the HP 54501A
and the relationship of the commands to each other. The IEEE 488.2
Tree
common commands are not listed as part of the command tree since they
do not affect the position of the parser within the tree. After a < NL >
(linefeed ASCII decimal 10) has been sent to the instrument, the parser
-

will be set to the "root" of the command tree.

Command Types The commands for this instrument can be placed into three types. The
three types are:

Common commands. Common commands are independent of the tree,

and do not affect the position of the parser within the tree. These differ
from root level commands in that root level commands place the parser
back at the root.

Example: »RST.

Root Level commands. The root level commands reside at the root of the
command tree. These commands are always parsable if they occur at the
beginning of a program message, or are preceded by a colon.

Example: :AUTOSCALE

Subsystem commands. Subsystem commands are grouped together

under a common node of the tree, such as the TIMEBASE commands.

Programming and Documentation Conventions HP 54501A

4-4 Programming
 Tree Traversal Command headers are created by traversing down the command tree. A
Rules legal command header from the command tree in figure 4-1 would be
":CHANNEL1:RANGE". This is referred to as a compound header. A
compound header is a header made of two or more mnemonics separated
by colons. The mnemonic created contains no spaces. The following rules
apply to traversing the tree:

• A leading colon or program message terminator > (either a

a <

< NL > or last byte) places the parser at the root of

EOI true on the
the command tree. A leading colon is a colon that is the first
character of a program header.

• Executing a subsystem command places you in that subsystem (until a

leading colon or a < program message terminator > is found). In the

Command Tree, figure 4-1, use the last mnemonic in the compound
header as a reference point (for example, RANGE). Then find the
last colon above that mnemonic (CHANNELl:), and that is where the
parser will be. Any command below that point can be sent within the
current program message without sending the mnemonic(s) which
appear above them (OFFSET).

Examples The OUTPUT statements are written using HP BASIC 4.0 on a HP 9000
Series 200/300 Controller. The quoted string is placed on the bus,
followed by a carriage return and linefeed (CRLF).

Example 1: OUTPUT 707;":CHANNEL1:RANGE 0.5 ;OFFSET 0"

Comments: The colon between CHANNELl and RANGE is necessary,

CHANNEL1:RANGE is a compound command. The semicolon between
the RANGE command and the OFFSET command is the required
< program message unit separator The OFFSET command does not
>.
need CHANNELl preceding it, since the CHANNEL1:RANGE
command set the parser to the CHANNELl node in the tree.

HP 54501A Programming and Documentation Conventions

Programming 4-5
 Example 2: OUTPUT 707;":TIMEBASE:REFERENCE CENTER ;DELAY 0.00001"

or

OUTPUT 707;":TIMEBASE:REFERENCE CENTER"

OUTPUT 707;":TIMEBASE:DELAY 0.00001"

Comments: In the first line of example 2, the "subsystem selector" is implied for the
DELAY command in the compound command.

The DELAY command must be in the same program message as the

REFERENCE command, because the < program message terminator >
will place the parser back at the root of the command tree.

A second way to send these commands is by placing "TIMEBASE:" before

the DELAY command as shown in example 2.

Example 3: OUTPUT 707;":TIM:REF CENTER ; :CHAN1:OFFSET 0"

Comments: The leading colon before CHAN1 tells the parser to go back to the root of
the command tree. The parser can then see the CHAN1:OFFSET
command.

Infinity The representation of infinity is 9.99999E+37. This is also the value

returned when a measurement cannot be made.
ReDresentation

Programming and Documentation Conventions HP 54501A

4.6 Programming
Sequential and IEEE 488.2 makes the distinction between sequential and overlapped
commands. Sequential commands finish their task before the execution of
Overlapped
the next command starts. Overlapped commands run concurrently, and
Commands. therefore the command following an overlapped command may be started
before the overlapped command is completed. All the commands of the
HP 54501A are sequential.

Response IEEE 488.2 defines two times at which query responses may be buffered.
The first is when the query is parsed by the instrument, the second is when
Generation
the controller addresses the instrument to talk so that it may read the
response. The HP 54501A will buffer responses to a query when the query
is parsed.

Notation The following conventions are used in this manual in descriptions of

remote (HP-IB) operation:
Conventions
and Definitions < > Angular brackets enclose words or characters that are used to
symbolize a program code parameter or an HP-IB command.

"is defined as." For A

:: =
example, <A>::= <B> indicates that < >

can be replaced by < B > in any statement containing < A

>.

| "or." Indicates a choice of one element from a list. For example,

< A > | < B > indicates < A > or < B > but not both.

An ellipsis (trailing dots) is used to indicate that the preceding element

...
may be repeated one or more times.

[ ] Square brackets indicate that the enclosed items are optional.

{ } When several items are enclosed by braces, one, and only one of these
elements must be selected.

HP 54501A Programming and Documentation Conventions

Programming 4-7
 The following definitions are used:

d:: = A single ASCII numeric character, 0-9.

n:: = A single ASCII non-zero, numeric character, 1-9.

< NL > :: =
Newline or Linefeed (ASCII decimal 10).

<sp> ::= < white space >

< white space > :: = 0 through 32 (decimal) except linefeed

(decimal 10).

Syntax At the beginning of each of the following chapters are syntax diagrams
showing the proper syntax for each command. All characters contained in
Diagrams a circle or oblong are literals, and must be entered exactly as shown.

Words and phrases contained in rectangles are names of items used with
the command and are described in the accompanying text of each
command. Each line can only be entered from one direction as indicated
by the arrow on the entry line. Any combination of commands and
arguments that can be generated by following the lines in the proper
direction is syntactically correct. An argument is optional if there is a
path around it. Where there is a rectangle which contains the word
"space" a white space character must be entered. White space is optional
in many other places.

Programming and Documentation Conventions HP 54501A

4-8 Programming
Command The HP 54501A programming commands are divided into three types:

Structure common commands, root level commands, and subsystem commands. A

programming command tree is shown in figure 4-1.

Common The common commands are the commands defined by IEEE 488.2.
Commands These commands control some functions that are common to all IEEE
488.2 instruments. Sending the common commands do not take the
instrument out of a selected subsystem.

ROOt L6Vel The root level commands control many of the basic functions of the
Commands instrument.

Subsystem There are several subsystems in this instrument. Only one subsystem may
Commands be selected at any given time. At power on, the command parser is set to
the root of the command tree, therefore no subsystem is selected.

Note

When a a leading colon (:) is

program message terminator or
sent in program message, the command parser is returned to
a

the root of the command tree

HP 54501A Programming and Documentation Conventions

Programming 4-9
 The 11 subsystems in the HP 54501A are:

System -
controls some basic functions of the oscilloscope.

Acquire -
sets the parameters for acquiring and storing data.

Calibrate sets the time nulls (channel-to-channel skew).

-

Channel -
controls all Y-axis oscilloscope functions.

Display controls how waveforms, voltage and time markers,

-

graticule, and text are displayed and written on the screen.

Function -
controls the waveform math functions of the oscilloscope.

Hardcopy -
controls the parameters used during the printing of
waveforms.

Measure -
selects the automatic measurements to be made.

Timebase -
controls all X-axis oscilloscope functions.

Trigger -
controls the trigger modes and parameters for each trigger
mode.

Waveform provides access to waveform data, including active data

-

from channels and functions as well as static data from waveform

memories.

Programming and Documentation Conventions HP 54501A

4-10 Programming
Program The program examples given for each command in the following chapters
and appendices were written on an HP 9000 Series 200/300 controller
Examples using the HP BASIC 4.0 programming language. The programs always
assume the oscilloscope is at address 707. If a printer is used, it is always
assumed to be at address 701.

In these examples, special attention should be paid to the ways in which

the command/query can be sent. The way the instrument is set up to
respond to a command/query has no bearing on how you send the
command/query. That is, the command/query can be sent using the
longform or shortfonn if one exists for that command. You can send the
command/query using upper case (capital) letters or lower case (small)
letters, both work the same. Also, the data can be sent using almost any
form you wish. If you were sending a channel 1 range value of 100 mV,
that value could be sent using a decimal (.1), or an exponential (le-1 or
l.OE-1), or a suffix (100 mV or 100MV).

As an example, set channel 1 range to 100 mV by sending one of the

following:

• commands in longform and using the decimal format.

OUTPUT 707;":CHANNEL1:RANGE .1"

• commands in shortfonn and using an exponential format.

OUTPUT 707;":CHAN1:RANG 1E-1"

• commands using lower case letters, shortforms, and a suffix.

OUTPUT 707;":chanl:rang 100 mV

Note

In these examples, the colon as the first character of the

command is optional. The space between RANGE and the
argument is required.

HP 54501A Programming and Documentation Conventions

Programming 4-11
 If you want to observe the headers for the queries, you must bring the
returned data into a string variable. Generally, you should dimension all
string variables before reading the data.

If you do not need to see the headers

and a numeric value is returned
from the HP 54501A, then you should use a numeric variable. In this case
the headers should be turned off.

Command Set The command set for the HP 54501A is divided into 13 separate groups:
Common commands, root level commands and 11 sets of subsystem
Organization
commands. Each of the 13 groups of commands is described in the
following chapters. Each of the chapters contain a brief description of the
subsystem, a set of syntax diagrams for those commands, and finally, the
commands for that subsystem in alphabetic order. The commands are
shown in the longform and shortform using upper and lowercase letters.
As an example, AUToscale indicates that the longform of the command is
AUTOSCALE and the shortform of the command is AUT. Each
command listing contains a description of the command and its
arguments, the command syntax, and a programming example.

Table 4-2 lists the commands for the HP 54501A in alphabetical order
with their corresponding subsystem or command type.

Programming and Documentation Conventions HP 54501A

4-12 Programming
 Table 4-2. Alphabetic Command Cross-Reference

Command When! Used Command Where Used

ADD FUNCtion Subsystem ERRor SYSTem Subsystem

ALL MEASure Subsystem •ESE Common Command
AUToscale Root Level Command •ESR Common Command
BEEPer Root Level Command ESTArt MEASure Subsystem
BLANk Root Level Command ESTOp MEASure Subsystem

•CLS Common Command FALLtime MEASure Subsystem

COLumn DISPlay Subsystem PIELd TRIGger Subsystem
COMPare MEASure Subsystem FORMat DISPlay Subsystem
COMPlete ACQuire Subsystem FORMat WAVefonn Subsystem
CONDition TRIGger Subsystem FREQuency MEASure Subsystem

CONNect DISPlay Subsystem GRATicule DISPlay Subsystem

COUNt ACQuire Subsystem HEADer SYSTem Subsystem
COUNt WAVefonn Subsystem HFReject CHANnel Subsystem
COUPling CHANnel Subsystem HOLDoff TRIGger Subsystem
CURSor MEASure Subsystem •IDN Common Command

DATA DISPlay Subsystem INVeise DISPlay Subsystem

DATA WAVefonn Subsystem INVen FUNCtion Subsystem
DEFine MEASure Subsystem •1ST Common Command
DELay MEASure Subsystem KEY SYSTem Subsystem
DELay TIMebase Subsystem LENGth HARDcopy Subsystem

DELay TRIGger Subsystem LER Root Level Command

DELay:SLOPe TRIGger Subsystem LEVel TRIGger Subsystem
DELay:SOURce TRIGger Subsystem LIMittest MEASure Subsystem
DESTination MEASure Subsystem LINE DISPlay Subsystem
DIGitize Root Level Command UNE TRIGger Subsystem

DSP SYSTem Subsystem LOGic TRIGger Subsystem

DUTycycle MEASure Subsystem LONGfonn SYSTem Subsystem
ECL CHANnel Subsystem LOWer MEASure Subsystem
EOI Root Level Command •LRN Common Command
ERASe Root Level Command LTER Root Level Command

HP 54501A Programming and Documentation Conventions

Programming 4-13
 Table 4-2. Alphabetic Command Cross-Reference (Continued)

Command Where Used Command Where Used

MASK DISPlay Subsystem PROBe CHANnel Subsystem

MENU Root Level Command PWIDth MEASure Subsystem
MERGe Root Level Command QUALify TRIGger Subsystem
MODE MEASure Subsystem RANGe CHANnel Subsystem
MODE TIMebase Subsystem RANGe FUNCtion Subsystem

MODE TRIGger Subsystem RANGe TIMebase Subsystem

MULTiply FUNCtion Subsystem •RCL Common Command
NWIDth MEASure Subsystem REPerence TIMebase Subsystem
Occurrence TRIGger Subsystem RESults MEASure Subsystem
OCCurrence:SLOPe TRIGger Subsystem RISetime MEASure Subsystem

OCCurrence:SOURce TRIGger Subsystem ROW DISPlay Subsystem

OFFSet CHANnel Subsystem •RST Common Command
OFFSet FUNCtion Subsystem RUN Root Level Command
ONLY FUNCtion Subsystem •SAV Common Command
•OPC Common Command SCRatch MEASure Subsystem

•OPT Common Command SCReen DISPlay Subsystem

OVERshoot MEASure Subsystem SERial Root Level Command
PAGE HARDcopy Subsystem SETup SYSTem Subsystem
PATH TRIGger Subsystem SLOPe TRIGger Subsystem
PERiod MEASure Subsystem SOURce DISPlay Subsystem

PERSistence DISPlay Subsystem SOURce MEASure Subsystem

POINts ACQuire Subsystem SOURce TRIGger Subsystem
POINts WAVefonn Subsystem SOURce WAVefonn Subsystem
POLarity TRIGger Subsystem •SRE Common Command
POSTfailure MEASure Subsystem STANdard TRIGger Subsystem

•PRE Common Command STATistics MEASure Subsystem

PREamble WAVefonn Subsystem •STB Common Command
PRECision MEASure Subsystem STOP Root Level Command
PREShoot MEASure Subsystem STORe Root Level Command
PRINt Root Level Command STRing Display Subsystem

Programming and Documentation Conventions HP 54501A

4-14 Programming
 Table 4-2. Alphabetic Command Cross-Reference (Continued)

Command Where Used Command Where Used

SUBTract FUNCtion Subsystem VMARker DISPlay Subsystem

TDELta MEASure Subsystem VMAX MEASure Subsystem
TER Root Level Command VMIN MEASure Subsystem
TEXT DISPlay Subsystem VPP MEASure Subsystem
TMARker DISPlay Subsystem VRELative MEASure Subsystem

TMAX MEASure Subsystem VRMS MEASure Subsystem

TMIN MEASure Subsystem VSTArt MEASure Subsystem
TNUL1 CALibrate Subsystem VSTOp MEASure Subsystem
•TRG Common Command VTIMe MEASure Subsystem
•TST Common Command VTOP MEASure Subsystem

TSTArt MEASure Subsystem •WAI Common Command

TSTOp MEASure Subsystem WINDOW TIMebase Subsystem
TTL CHANnel Subsystem WINDowDELay TIMebase Subsystem
TVOLt MEASure Subsystem WINDowRANGe TIMebase Subsystem
TYPE ACQuire Subsystem XINCrement WAVeform Subsystem

TYPE WAVeform Subsystem XORigin WAVeform Subsystem

UNTTs MEASure Subsystem XREPerence WAVeform Subsystem
UPPer MEASure Subsystem YINCrement WAVeform Subsystem
VAMPlitude MEASure Subsystem YORigin WAVeform Subsystem
VAVerage MEASure Subsystem YREPerence WAVeform Subsystem

VBASe MEASure Subsystem

VDELta MEASure Subsystem
VERSUS FUNCtion Subsystem
VFIFty MEASure Subsystem
VIEW Root Level Command

HP 54501A Programming and Documentation Conventions

Programming 4-15
Common Commands 5

The common commands are defined by the IEEE 488.2 standard. These
commands will be common to all instruments that comply with this
standard. They control some of the basic instrument functions, such as
instrument identification and reset, reading the learn (instrument setup)
string, how status is read and cleared, and how commands and queries are
received and processed by the instrument.

Common commands can be received and processed by the HP 54501A

whether they are sent over the HP-IB as separate program messages or
within other program messages. If an instrument subsystem has been
selected and a common command is received by the instrument, the
instrument will remain in the selected subsystem. For example, if the
program message "ACQUIRE:COUNT 1024; *CLS; TYPE AVERAGE" is
received by the instrument, the instrument will set the acquire count and
type, and clear the status information. This would not be the case if some
other type of command were received within the program message. For
example the program message ":ACQUIRE:COUNT 1024; :AUTOSCALE;
:ACQUIRE:TYPE AVERAGE" would set the acquire count, complete the
autoscale, then set the acquire type. In this example :ACQUIRE must be
sent again in order to reenter the acquire subsystem and set the type.

Refer to figure 5-1 for common commands syntax diagram.

Note

Each of the status registers mentioned in this chapter has an

enable (mask) register. By setting the bits in the enable register
you can select the status information you wish to use. For a
complete discussion of how to read the status registers and how
to use the status information available from this instrument refer
to chapter 3.

HP 54501A Common Commands

Programming 5-1
 Figure 5-1. Common Commands Syntax Diagram

Common Commands HP 54501A

5-2 Programming
 mask_arg = An integer, 0 through 255. This number is the sum of all the bits in the
mask corresponding to conditions that are enabled. Refer to the *ESE and *SRE
commands for bit definitions in the enable registers.

mask_value = An integer, 0 through 255. This number is the sum of all the bits in the
mask corresponding to conditions that are enabled. Refer to the *IST? query.

recall_buffer_number =
An integer, 0 through 4.

save_buffer_number =
An integer, 1 through 4.

Figure 5-1. Common Commands Syntax Diagram (continued)

HP 54501A Common Commands

Programming 5-3
*CLS

*CLS (Clear Status) command

The *CLS (clear status) common command clears the status data
structures, including the device defined error queue. This command also
clears the Request-for-OPC flag.

If the *CLS command immediately follows a PROGRAM MESSAGE

TERMINATOR, the output queue and the MAV (message available) bit
will be cleared.

Command Syntax: -CLS

Example: OUTPUT 707;"*CLS"

Note
Refer to chapter 3 for a complete discussion of status.

Common Commands HP 54501 A

5-4 Programming
 *ESE

*ESE (Event Status Enable) command/query

The *ESE command sets the Standard Event Status Enable Register bits.
The Standard Event Status Enable Register contains a mask value for the
bits to be enabled in the Standard Event Status Register. A one in the
Standard Event Status Enable Register will enable the corresponding bit
in the Standard Event Status Register, a zero will disable the bit. Refer to
table 5-1 for the information about the Standard Event Status Enable
Register bits, bit weights, and what each bit masks.

The *ESE query returns the current contents of the register.

Command Syntax: *ESE<mask>

Where:

< mask > :: = 0 to 255

Example: OUTPUT 707;"*ESE 64"

In this example, the *ESE 64 command will enable URQ (user request)
bit 6 of the Standard Event Status Enable Register. Therefore, when a
front panel key is pressed, the ESB (event summary bit) in the Status Byte
Register will also be set.

HP 54501A Common Commands

Programming 5-5
*ESE

Query Syntax: *ESE?

Returned Format: < mask > < ML >

Where:

<mask> :: = Oto 255 (integer- NR1 format)

Example: OUTPUT 707;"*ESE?"

ENTER 707; Event
PRINT Event

Table 5-1. Standard Event Status Enable Register

Event Status Enable Register

(High Enables the ESR bit)
•

Bit Weight Enables

7 128 PON Power On

-

6 64 URQ User Request -

5 32 CME Command Error -

4 16 EXE Execution Error

-

3 8 DDE Device Dependent Error

-

2 4 QYE Query Error-

1 2 RQC Request Control

-

0 1 OPC Operation Complete

-

Note
Refer to chapter 3 for a complete discussion of status.

Common Commands HP 54501A

5-6 Programming
 *ESR

*ESR (Event Status Register) query

The *ESR query returns the contents of the Standard Event Status
Register.

Note
Reading the register clears the Standard Event Status Register.

Query Syntax: *ESR?

Returned Format: < status > < ML >

Where:

< status > :: = 0 to 255 (integer -

NR1 format)

Example: OUTPUT 707;"*ESR?"

ENTER 707; Event
PRINT Event

HP 54501A Common Commands

Programming 5-7
*ESR

Table 5-2 shows each bit in the Event Status Register and its bit weight.
When you read the Event Status Register, the value returned is the total
bit weights of all bits that are high at the time you read the byte.

Table 5-2. Standard Event Status Register

Bit Bit Bit Condition

Weight Name

7 128 PON 1 =
an OFF to ON transition has occurred
6 64 URQ 0 =
no front-panel key has been pressed
1 =
front-panel key has been pressed
5 32 CME 0 =
no command errors
1 = a command error has been detected

4 16 EXE 0 =
no execution error
1 =
an execution error has been detected
3 8 DDE 0 =
no device dependent errors
1 = a device dependent error has been detected
2 4 QYE 0 =
no query errors
1 = a query error has been detected

1 2 RQC 0 =
request control NOT used always 0
- -

0 1 OPC 0 =
operation is not complete
1 =
operation is complete

0 =
False Low
=

1 =
True =High

Common Commands HP 54501A

5-8 Programming
 *IDN

*IDN (Identification Number) query

The *IDN query allows the instrument to identify itself. It returns the
string:

"HEWLETT-PACKARD,54501A, < XXXXAYYYYY < MMDD > -

>,

Where:

<XXXXAYYYYY> :: = the serial number of this instrument.

< MMDD> :: = the software revision of this instrument. The first two parameters
represent the month and the second two parameters represent the day of the month.

An *IDN query must be the last query in a message. Any queries after the

*IDN query in this program message will be ignored.

Query Syntax: -IDN?

Returned Format: HEWLETT-PACKARD,54501A,XXXXAYYYYY,MMDD<NL>

Example: DIM id$[50]

OUTPUT 707;"*IDN?"
ENTER 707; ld$
PRINT ld$

HP 54501A Common Commands

Programming 5-9
*IST

*IST (Individual Status) query

The *IST query allows the instrument to identify itself during a parallel
poll by allowing the controller to read the current state of the IEEE 488.1
defined "ist" local message in the instrument. The response to this query is
dependent upon the current status of the instrument

Query Syntax: *IST?

Returned Format: < id > < NL>

Where:

<id> ::= Oor 1

Where:

0 indicates the "ist" local message is false.

1 indicates the "ist" local message is true.

Example: OUTPUT 707;"*iST?"

ENTER 707; ld$
PRINT ld$

Common Commands HP 54501A

5-10 Programming
 *LRN

*LRN (Learn) query

The *LRN query returns a program message that contains the current
state of the instrument.

This command allows you to store an instrument setup in the controller.

The stored setup can then be returned to the instrument when you want
that setup at a later time.

This command performs the same function as the :SYSTEM:SETUP?

query. The data can be sent to the instrument using the
:SYSTEM:SETUP command.

Note

The returned header for the *LRN query is :SYSTEM:SETUP.

The :SYSTEM:HEADER command does NOT effect this
returned header.

Query Syntax: *LRN?

Returned Format: :SYSTem:SETup <setup> <NL>

Where:

< setup >

::= #800001024 < learn string > <NL>

The learn string is 1024 data bytes in length.

Example: DIM Lrn$[20001

OUTPUT 707-,-LRN?"
ENTER 707 USING "-K";Un$

HP 54501A Common Commands

Programming 5-11
*OPC

*OPC (Operation Complete) command/query

The *OPC (operation complete) command will cause the instrument to

set the operation complete bit in the Standard Event Status Register
when all pending device operations have finished.

The *OPC query places an ASCII "1" in the output queue when all
pending device operations have finished.

Command Syntax: -OPC

Example: OUTPUT 707;"*OPC"

Query Syntax: •OPC?

Returned Format: 1 < ML >

Example: OUTPUT 707;°:AUTOSCALE;*OPC?"

ENTER 707;0p$

Common Commands HP 54501A

5-12 Programming
 *OPT

*OPT (Option) query

The *OPT query is used to report the options installed in the instrument.
This query will always return a zero because the HP 54501A does not have
any possible options to report.

Query Syntax: •OPT?

Returned Format: 0<NL>

Example: OUTPUT 707;"*OPT?"

ENTER 707;Value
PRINT Value

HP 54501A Common Commands

Programming 5-13
*PRE

*PRE (Parallel Poll Register Enable) command/query

The *PRE command sets the parallel poll register enable bits.

The Paralled Poll Enable Register contains a mask value for the bits to be
enabled that can produce an "ist" during a parallel poll.

The *PRE query returns the current value.

Command Syntax: *PRE <mask>

Where:

<mask> ::= 0 to 255

Example: OUTPUT 707;"*PRE16"

Note

This example will allow the HP 54501A to generate an "ist" when

a message is available in the output queue. When a message is
available, the MAVbit in the Status Byte Register will be high.

Query Syntax: *PRE?

Returned Format: < mask_vaiue > < ML >

Where:

< mask_value > :: =

sum of all bits that are set • 0 through 255 (integer - NR1 format).

Example: OUTPUT 707;"*PRE?"

ENTER 707;Vl$
Print Vl$

Common Commands HP 54501A

5-14 Programming
 *RCL

*RCL (Recall) command

The *RCL command restores the state of the instrument from the
specified save/recall register. An instrument setup must have been stored
previously in the specified register. Registers 1 through 4 are general
purpose and can be used with the *SAV command. Register 0 is special
because it recalls the state that existed before the last AUTOSCALE,
RECALL, ECL, or TTL operation.

Note

An error message will appear on screen if nothing has been

previously saved in the specified register.

Command Syntax: *RCL < reregister >

Where:

< reregister > ::= Othrough4

Example: OUTPUT 707;"*RCL 3" <NL>

HP 54501A Common Commands

Programming 5-15
*RST

*RST (Reset) command

The *RST command places the instrument in a known state. Refer to

table 5-3 for the reset conditions.

Command Syntax: *RST

Example: OUTPUT 707;"*RST"

Table 5-3. Reset Conditions/or the HP 54501A

Timebase Menu
reference cntr
Time/Div 100 \is
delay O.OOs
timebase window off

Channel Menu
Channel 1 on
Channel 2,3, and 4 off
Volts/Div 500 mV
offset 0.00
coupling dc
probe attenuation 1.000:1

Trigger Menu
Mode edge
triggering auto
source Channel 1
level 0.0 V
slope positive
holdoff 40ns

Common Commands HP 54501A

5-16 Programming
 *RST

Table 5-3. Reset Conditions for the HP 54501A (continued)

Display Menu
Mode norm
persistence minimum
off/frame/axes/grid axes
connect dots off
# of screens 1

At/AV
At markers off
AV markers off

Waveform Math Menu

fl off
f2 off
display off
chan/mem chani
operator +

chan/mem chani
function sensitivity 1.00 V/div
function offset 0.0V

Waveform Save Menu

waveform/pixel waveform
nonvolatile ml
display off
source chani

Define Meas Menu

meas/def.limit meas
continuous on
statistics off

Utility Menu
clicker on

HP 54501A Common Commands

Programming 5-17
*SAV

*SAV (SAVE) command

The *SAV command stores the current state of the device in a save
register. The data parameter is the number of the save register where the
data will be saved. Registers 1 through 4 are valid for this command.

Command Syntax: *SAV <save_register>

Where;

<save_register> ::= 1 through 4

Example: OUTPUT 707;"*SAV 3"

Common Commands HP 54501A

5-18 Programming
 *SRE

*SRE (Service Request Enable) command/query

The *SRE command sets the Service Request Enable Register bits. The
Service Request Enable Register contains a mask value for the bits to be
enabled in the Status Byte Register. A one in the Service Request Enable
Register will enable the corresponding bit in the Status Byte Register, a
zero will disable the bit. Refer to table 5-5 for the bits in the Service
Request Enable Register and what they mask.

The *SRE query returns the current value.

Command Syntax: *SRE <mask>

Where:

<mask> ::= Oto255

Example: OUTPUT 707;"*SRE i6"

Note
This example enables a service request to be generated when a

message is available in theoutput queue. When a message is

available the MAY bit will be high.

Query Syntax: *SRE?

Returned Format: < mask > < NL>

Where:

< mask > :: =

sum of all bits that are set 0 through 255 (integer
- -
NR1 format)

Example: OUTPUT 707;"*SRE?"

ENTER 707;Value
PRINT Value

HP 54501A Common Commands

Programming 5-19
*SRE

Table 5-4. Service Request Enable Register

Service Request Enable Register

(High Enables the SRE bit)
•

Bit Weight Enables

7 128 not used

6 64 RQS -
Request Service
5 32 ESB -
Event Status Bit
4 16 MAV -

Message Available
3 8 LTF -
Limit Test Fail
2 4 MSG Message -

1 2 LCL Local -

0 1 TRG Trigger -

Common Commands HP 54501A

5-20 Programming
 *STB

*STB (Status Byte) query

The *STB query returns the current value of the instrument's status byte.
The MSS (Master Summary Status) bit is reported on bit 6 instead of the
RQS (request service) bit. The MSS indicates whether or not the device
has at least one reason for requesting service. Refer to table 5-6 for the
meaning of the bits in the status byte.

Note

To read the instrument's status byte with RQS reported on bit 6,

use the HP-IB Serial Poll.

Query Syntax: *STB?

Returned Format: < value > <NL>

Where:

<value> ::== 0 through 255 (integer -NR1)

Example: OUTPUT 707;"*STB?"

ENTER 707;Value
PRINT Value

HP 54501A Common Commands

Programming 5-21
*STB

Table 5-5. The Status Byte Register

Bit Bit Bit Condition

Weight Name

7 128 0 =
not used
...
6 64 ROS/MSS 0 =
instrument has no reason for service
1 =
instrument is requesting service
5 32 ESB 0 =
no event status conditions have occurred
1 =
an enabled event status condition has occurred
4 16 MAV 0 =
no output messages are ready
1 =
an output message is ready
3 8 LTP 0= no limit test has failed
1 =
limit test has failed
2 4 MSG 0 =
no message has been displayed
1 =
message has been displayed
1 2 LCL 0 = a remote-to-local transition has not occurred
1 = a remote-to-local transition has occurred

0 1 TRG 0 =
no trigger has occurred
1 = a trigger has occurred
0 = False =
Low
1 =
True =High

Common Commands HP 54501A

5-22 Programming
 *TRG

*TRG (Trigger) command

The *TRG command has the same effect as the Group Execute Trigger
(GET). That effect is as if the RUN command had been sent.

Command Syntax: *TRG

Example: OUTPUT 707;"*TRG"

HP 54501A Common Commands

Programming 5-23
*TST

*TST (Test) query

The *TST query causes the instrument to perform a self-test. The result of
the test will be placed in the output queue.

Note
Prior to sending this command all front panel inputs must be
disconnected.

A 0 indicates the test passed and a non-zero value indicates the test failed.

If a test fails refer to the troubleshooting section of the Service Manual.

Query Syntax: *TST?

Returned Format: < result > < ML >

Where:

< result > :: = 0 or non-zero value

Where:

0 indicates the test passed.

non-zero indicates the test (ailed.

Example: OUTPUT 707;"*TST?"

ENTER 707; Result
PRINT Result

Common Commands HP 54501A

5-24 Programming
 *WAI

*WAI (Wait) command

The '"'WAI command has no function in the HP 54501A, but is parsed for
compatibility with other instruments.

Command Syntax: *WAI

Example: OUTPUT 707;°*WAi"

HP 54501A Common Commands

Programming 5-25
Root Level Commands 6

Introduction Root Level commands control many of the basic operations of the
oscilloscope. These commands will always be recognized by the parser if
they are prefixed with a colon, regardless of current command tree
position. After executing a root level command, the parser is positioned
at the root of the command tree. Figure 6-1 lists the root level commands
syntax diagram.

Figure 6-1. Root Level Commands Syntax Diagram

HP 54501A Root Level Commands

Programming 6-1
 Figure 6-1. Root Level Commands Syntax Diagram (continued)

Root Level Commands HP 54501A

6-2 Programming
 space ———»\PMEMory)—»^ pmemory_num

.PRINt?.

/^M^,

SERiol

h-—{s7oP)—

STORe»-»^ space , CHANnel)—^\ channel_num

,FUNCtion}»f funct ion-num

,W>4EMory )—»^ wmemory_num

,WMEMory)—»^ wmemory_num

TER?

''VIEW) CHANnel)
,
chonneI_num

^FUNCtion '

funct i on_num

^WMEMory^ wmemory_num

[pMEMorv pmemory_num

channel_num =
an integer 1,2,3, or 4.

function_num =
an integer 1 or 2.

wmemory_num =
an integer 1 through 4.

pmemory_num =
an integer 1 or 2.

ser_arg = a 10 character quoted string.

Figure 6-1. Root Level Commands Syntax Diagram (continued)

HP 54501A Root Level Commands

Programming 6-3
AUToscale

AUToscale command

The AUTOSCALE command causes the oscilloscope to evaluate all input

signals and set the correct conditions to display the signals. When the
AUTOSCALE command is sent the following conditions are set:

the vertical sensitivity,

the vertical offset;
the trigger to edge mode with minimum persistence;
the trigger level, holdoff, and slope; and
the sweep speed of the displayed channel.

In addition, the AUTOSCALE command turns off:

markers;
all measurements;
functions;
windows;
memories; and
connect the dots.

If input signals are present on more than one vertical input, the sweep will
be triggered on channel 1 if a signal is present on that channel. If a signal
is not present on channel 1 then the oscilloscope will be triggered on

channel 4 if a signal is present on that channel. If a signal is not present

on channel 4 then the oscilloscope will be triggered on channel 2 if a signal
is present on that channel, or on channel 3 if no other signals are found. If

no signals are found on any vertical input, the oscilloscope is returned to

its former state.

Command Syntax: AUToscale

Example: OUTPUT 707;":AUTOSCALE"

Root Level Commands HP 54501A

6-4 Programming
 BEEPer

BEEPer command/query

The BEEPER command sets the beeper mode, which controls the sound
of the instrument. The beeper can be set to on or off. If the BEEPER
command is sent without an argument the beeper will be sounded without
effecting the current mode of the instrument.

The BEEPER query returns the current state of the beeper mode.

Command Syntax: :BEEPer [{{ON 11} | {OFF [ o}}]

Example: OUTPUT 707;":BEEPER 1"

Query Syntax: :BEEPer?

Returned Format: [:BEEPer] {l | 0} < NL>

Example: OUTPUT 707;":BEEP?"

ENTER 707;Click$
PRINT ClickS

HP 54501A Root Level Commands

Programming 6-5
BLANK

BLANk command

The BLANK command causes the instrument to turn off (stop displaying)
the specified channel, function, pixel memory, or waveform memory. To
blank a channel display use the command :BLANK
CHANNEL{ 1121314}. To blank a waveform memory display use
:BLANK WMEMORY{ 1121314}, to blank a pixel memory display use
the command :BLANK PMEMORY{ 112}, and to blank a function use
the command :BLANK FUNCTION{ 112}.

Command Syntax: :BLANk < display >

Where:

<display> ::= {CHANnel{l | 2 | 3 | 4} | FUNCtion{l | 2} | WMEMoiy{l | 2 | 3 | 4}

PMEMoiy{l | 2}}

Example: OUTPUT 707;":BLANK CHANNELI"

Root Level Commands HP 54501A

6-6 Programming
 DIGitize

DIGitize command

The DIGITIZE command is used to acquire waveform data for transfer

over the HP-IB. It causes an acquisition to take place on the specified
channel(s) with the resulting data being placed in the channel buffer.

The ACQUIRE subsystem commands are used to set up conditions such

as TYPE, number of POINTS, and the COUNT for the next DIGITIZE
command. See the ACQUIRE subsystem for a description of these
commands. To determine the actual number of points that are acquired
and how the data will be transferred, refer to the WAVEFORM
Subsystem commands. For more information on the DIGITIZE
command refer to the section on the DIGITIZE command in the chapter
"Introduction to Programming an Oscilloscope."

Note
Sending the DIGITIZE command will turn off any unused
channels.

When the Digitize operation is complete the instrument is placed in the

stopped mode. When the instrument is restarted, with a RUN command
or the front panel RUN key, the digitized data stored in the channel
buffers will be overwritten. Therefore, ensure all operations that require
the digitized data are completed before restarting the HP 54501A.

The speed of the total digitize operations may be improved if two or more
DIGITIZE commands are sent without changing other parameters.

The sources for the :DIGITIZE command are channels 1 through 4.

Command Syntax: :DIGitizc CHANnel < N > [,CHANnel < N >

]...

Where:

<N> ::= 1,2, 3, or 4.

Example: OUTPUT 707;":DlGmZE CHANNELI.CHANNELZ"

HP 54501A Root Level Commands

Programming 6-7
EOI

EOI (End or Identify) command/query

The EOI command specifies whether or not the last byte of a reply from
the HP 54501A is to be sent with the EOI bus control line set true or not
true. The last byte of a response is usually a "new line" character, ASCII
decimal 10 (LF).

Note

EOI must be turned on for response messages to be in

compliance with IEEE 488.2.

The EOI query returns the current state of EOI.

Command Syntax: :EOI {{ON 11} | {OFF | 0}}

Example: OUTPUT 707;":EOI OFF"

Query Syntax: :EOI?

Returned Format: (:EOI] {l | 0} < NL>

Example: OUTPUT 707;":EOI?"

ENTER 707;End$
PRINT End$

Root Level Commands HP 54501A

6-8 Programming
 ERASe

ERASe command

The ERASE command erases a specified pixel memory.

Erasing pixel memory 0 is a special case which is the same as pressing the
CLEAR DISPLAY front-panel key. If the scope is running and being
triggered and ERASE PMEMORYO is executed, the instrument will
momentarily stop acquiring data, clear the CRT and continue with data
acquisition.

Erasing pixel memory 1 or 2 clears the specified pixel memory and

anything on the display from that pixel memory.

Note

Once you erase pixel memory lor 2 there is no way to retrieve the
original information.

Command Syntax: :ERASe {PMEMoryO | PMEMoiyl I PMEMoiy2}

Example: OUTPUT 707;":ERASE PMEMORY1"

HP 54501A Root Level Commands

Programming 6-9
LER

LER (Local Event Register) query

The LER query allows the LCL (Local) Event Register to be read. After
the LCL Event Register is read, it is cleared. A one indicates a remote to
local transition has taken place due to the front-panel LOCAL key being
pressed. A zero indicates a remote to local transition has not taken place.

Once this bit is set it can only be cleared by reading the Event Register or
sending a *CLS command.

A Service Request (SRQ) can only be generated when the bit transitions
0
from to 1, therefore the bit must be cleared each time you would like a
new Service Request to be generated.

Query Syntax: :LER?

Returned Format: [:LER] {l | 0} <NL>

Example: OUTPUT 707;":LER?"

ENTER 707;Event$
PRINT EventS

Root Level Commands HP 54501A

6-10 Programming
 LTER

LTER (Limit Test Event Register) query

The LTER query allows the Limit Test Event Register to be read. The
Limit Test Event Register contains the Limit Test Fail bit. This bit is set
when the limit test is active and a limit test has failed. After the Limit Test
Event Register is read, it is cleared.

A Service Request (SRQ) can only be generated when the bit transitions
from to 1, therefore the bit must be cleared each time you would like a
0
new Service Request to be generated.

Query Syntax: :LTER?

Returned Format: [:LTER] {l | 0} <NL>

Example: OUTPUT 707;":LTER?"

ENTER 707;Lmt$
PRINT Lmt$

HP 54501A Root Level Commands

Programming 6-11
MENU

MENU command/query

The MENU command selects one of the 10 menus on the front panel.

The MENU query returns the current menu.

Command Syntax: :MENU < name > < NL >

Where:

<name> ::= {TIMebase | CHANnel | TRIGger | DISPlay | DELTa | MATH | SAVE |

MEASure | UTILity | SHOW}

Example: OUTPUT 707;":MENU DISPLAY"

Query Syntax: :MENU?

Returned Format: [:MENU] <

name > < NL >

Where:

<name> ::= {TIMebase | CHANnel | TRIGger | DISPlay |

DELTa | MATH [ SAVE | MEASure | UTILity | SHOW}

Example: DIM Name$[30]

OUTPUT 707;":MENU?"
ENTER 707;Name$
PRINT NameS

Root Level Commands HP 54501A

6-12 Programming
 MERGe

MERGe command

The MERGE command stores the contents of the active display into the
specified pixel memory. The pixel memories are PMEMORY 1 or 2.

This command has a similar function as the "add to memory" key in the
pixel menu of the Waveform Save menu.

Command Syntax: :MERGe {PMEMoiyl PMEMoiy2}

Example: OUTPUT 707;":MERGE PMEMoiy2"

HP 54501A Root Level Commands

Programming 6-13
PRINt

PRINt query

The PRINT query outputs a copy of the display as soon as the

oscilloscope is addressed to talk.

The output includes the displayed waveforms, the graticule, time and
voltage markers, trigger setup, and measurement results.

Query Syntax: :PRINt?

Example: OUTPUT 707;":HARDCOPY:PAGE AUTOMATIC"

OUTPUT 707;":PRINT?"
SEND7;UNTUNL
SEND 7;LISTEN 1 !Assumes printer is at address 1
SEND 7;TALK 7
SEND 7;DATA

Root Level Commands HP 54501A

6-14 Programming
 RUN

RUN command

The RUN command acquires data for the active waveform display. The
data is acquired in the manner defined by the timebase mode.

If the timebase mode SINGLE, the RUN command enables the

is in
trigger once and displays the acquired data on the CRT. This also occurs
when the front panel SINGLE key is pressed when the instrument is
STOPPED.

If the timebase mode is AUTO or TRIGGERED, the RUN command

will enable the trigger repeatedly and display the data it acquires
continuously on the CRT. This is the same thing that happens when the
front panel RUN key is pressed. See the :TIMEBASE:MODE command
for a description of the various modes.

Command Syntax: :RUN

Example: OUTPUT 707;":RUN"

HP 54501A Root Level Commands

Programming 6-15
SERlal

SERial (Serial Number) command

The SERIAL command allows you to enter a serial number in the

instrument. The instrument serial number is entered at the factory,
therefore this will normally not be required.

The serial number is placed in protected non-volatile ram, so the

protection switch must be in the unprotected position to write a new serial
number to the instrument.

This serial number is part of the string returned for the *IDN? query.

Note
A serial number corresponding to the serial number of the board
in the HP 54501A is loaded at the factory. Do not use this
command unless you need to serialize the instrument for a
different application.

Command Syntax: :SERial < string >

Where:

< string > :: = 10 character serial number within quotes

Example: OUTPUT 707;":SER "1234A56789"""

Root Level Commands HP 54501A

6-16 Programming
 STOP

STOP command

The STOP command causes the instrument to stop acquiring data for the
active display.

The RUN command must be executed to restart the acquisition.

Command Syntax: :STOP

Example: OUTPUT 707;":STOP"

HP 54501A Root Level Commands

Programming 6-17
STORe

STORe command

The STORE command moves a stored waveform, channel, or function to

a waveform memory. This command has two parameters. The first is the

source of the waveform. The source can be specified as any channel,

function, or waveform memory. The second parameter is the destination
of the waveform, which can only be waveform memory 1 through 4.

Command Syntax: :STORe <

source >,
< destination >

where:

<source> ::= {CHANnel{l | 2 | 3 | 4} | FUNCtion{l | 2} | WMEMoiy{l | 2 | 3 | 4}}

< destination >
::= WMEMoiy{l | 2 | 3 | 4}

Example: OUTPUT 707;":STORE CHANNEL2,WMEMORY4"

Root Level Commands HP 54501A

6-18 Programming
 TER

TER (Trigger Event Register) query

The TER query allows the Trigger Event Register to be read. When the
Trigger Event Register is read it is cleared. A one indicates a trigger has
occurred. A zero indicates a trigger has not occurred.

If a trigger event is not found and the sweep is auto-triggering this bit will
not be set.

A Service Request (SRQ) can only be generated when the bit transitions
from 0 to 1, therefore the bit must be cleared each time you would like a
new Service Request to be generated.

Query Syntax: :TER?

Returned Format: [:TER] {i | 0} < NL >

Example: OUTPUT 707;":TER?"

ENTER 707;Trg^event$
PRINT Trg_event$

HP 54501A Root Level Commands

Programming 6-19
VIEW

VIEW command

The VIEW command causes the instrument to turn on (start displaying)

an active channel, function, pixel memory, or waveform memory.

If you want to display a channel use the command :VIEW CHANnel{l | 2

| 3 | 4}. If you want to display a pixel memory, use the parameter :VIEW
PMEMory{l | 2}. To display a function send the command :VIEW
FUNCtion{l | 2}.

The BLANK command causes the instrument to turn off (stop displaying)
a specified channel, function, pixel memory, or waveform memory.

Command Syntax: :VIEW {CHANnel{l | 2 | 3 | 4} | FUNCtion{l I 2} ] PMEMoiy{l | 2} | WMEMory{l |

2|3|4}}

Example: OUTPUT 707;": VIEW CHANNELl"

Root Level Commands HP 54501A

6-20 Programming
System Subsystem 7

Introduction SYSTEM subsystem commands control the way in which query responses
are formatted, simulate front panel key presses, and enable reading and
writing to the advisory line of the instrument.

Refer to figure 7-1 for System subsystem commands syntax diagram.

HP 54501A System Subsystem

Programming 7-1
 dsp_arg =
any quoted string

key_arg = keycode 1 through 44

block_data = block data in IEEE 488.2 # format

Figure 7-1. System Subsystem Commands Syntax Diagram

System Subsystem HP 54501A

7-2 Programming
 DSP

DSP command/query

The :SYSTEM:DSP command writes a quoted string, excluding quotes,

to the advisory line (line 1) of the CRT.

The DSP query returns the last string written to the advisory line. This
may be a string written with a DSP command or an internally generated
advisory.

The string is actually read from the message queue. The message queue is
cleared when it is read. Therefore the displayed message can only be read
once over the bus.

Command Syntax: :SYSTem:DSP <quoted ASCII string >

Example: OUTPUT 707;"SYSTEM:DSP ""This is a message"""

Query Syntax: :SYSTem:DSP?

Returned Format: [SYSTem:DSP] <stringxNL>

Where:

< string > :: = string response data containing the last information written on the
advisory line

Example: DIM Display$[100]

OUTPUT 707;"SYSTEM:DSP?"
ENTER 707; Displays
PRINT Displays

HP 54501A System Subsystem

Programming 7-3
ERRor

ERRor query

The :SYSTEM:ERROR query outputs the next error number in the error
queue over the HP-IB. This instrument has an error queue that is 30
errors deep and operates on a first-in, first-out basis. Successively sending
the query, :SYSTEM:ERROR?, returns the error numbers in the order
that they occurred until the queue is empty. Any further queries then
return zeros until another error occurs.

When the NUMBER parameter is used in the query only the numeric
error code is output. When the STRING parameter is used the error
number is output followed by a comma and a quoted string. If no
parameter is specified then the numeric error code is output. No
parameter specified is the same as specifying NUMBER.

See table 7-1 for the ERROR numbers.

Query Syntax: ;8YSTein:ERRor? {NUMBer | STRing | (no_param)}

Returned Format: [:SYSTem:ERRor] < error >[,< quoted string>]<NL>

Where:

<error > ::= an integer error code

<quoted string > :: an alpha string specifying the error condition
=

Example: DIM Emsg$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":SYSTEM:ERROR?"
ENTER 707;Emsg$
PRINT Emsg$

System Subsystem HP 54501A

7-4 Programming
 ERRor

Table 7-1. Error Messages

Error Number Description

11 Questionable horizontal scaling

12 Edges required not found
70 Ram write protected
-100 Command error (unknown command)
-101 Invalid character received
-110 Command header error
-111 Header delimiter error
-120 Numeric argument error
-121 Wrong data type (numeric expected)
Numeric overflow
^129 Missing numeric argument
-130 Non-numeric argument error
-131 Wrong data type (char expected)
-132 Wrong data type (string expected)
-133 Wrong data type (block expected)
Data Overflow: string or block to long
^39 Missing non-numeric argument
-142 Too many arguments
-143 Argument delimiter error
-144 Invalid message unit delimiter

-200 No Can Do (generic execute error)

-201 Not executable in local mode
-202 Settings lost due to rtl or power on'
-203 Trigger ignored
-211 Legal command, but settings conflict
-212 Argument out of range
-221 Busy doing something else
-222 Insufficient capability or configuration
-232 Output buffer full or overflow
-300 Device failure
-301 Interrupt fault
-302 System error
-303 Time out
-310 RAM error
-311 RAM failure (hard error)
-312 RAM data loss (soft error)
-313 Calibration data loss
-320 ROM error
-321 ROM checksum
-322 Hardware and firmware incompatible
-330 Power on test failed
-340 Self test failed
-350 Too Many Errors (error queue overflow)
-400 Query Error (generic)
-410 Queiy INTERRUPTED
-420 Query UNTERMINATED
-421 Query received, Indefinite block response in progress
-422 Addressed to Talk, Nothing to Say
-430 Queiy DEADLOCKED

rtl remote to local

HP 54501A System Subsystem

Programming 7-5
HEADer

HEADer command/query

The :SYSTEM:HEADER command tells the instrument whether or not

to output a header for query responses. When HEADER is set to ON,
query responses will include the command header.

The HEADER query returns the state of the HEADER command.

Command Syntax: :SYSTem:HEADer {{ ON 11} | { OFF | o}}

Example: OUTPUT 707;";SYSTEM:HEADER ON"

Query Syntax: :SYSTem:HEADer?

Returned Format: [:SYSTem:HEADer] {1 | 0 } < NL>

Where:

1::= ON
0:: = OFF

Example: DIM Hdr$[20]

OUTPUT 707;":SYSTEM:HEADER?"
ENTER 707; Hdr$
PRINT Hdr$

The following example shows the response to the query

:CHANNEL1:RANGE? with the headers on and off.

With headers set to ON; longform ON: :CHANNEL1:RANGE 6.40000E-01

With headers set to ON; longform OFF: :CHAN1:RANG 6.40000E-01

With headers set to OFF: 6.40000E-01

Note
Headers should be turned off when returning values to numeric
variables.

System Subsystem HP 54501A

7-6 Programming
 KEY

KEY command/query

The :SYSTEM:KEY command simulates the pressing of a specified front

panel key. Key commands may be sent over the HP-IB in any order that
are legal key presses from the front panel. Make sure the instrument is in
the desired state before executing the KEY command.

The KEY query returns the key code for the last key pressed from the
front panel or the last simulated key press over the HP-IB. Key codes
range from 1 to 44, zero represents no key and will be returned after
power up.

Refer to table 7-2 for key codes.

Command Syntax: :SYSTem:KEY <keycode>

Where:

<keycode> ::= 1 to 44

Example: OUTPUT 707;":SYSTEM:KEY 2"

Query Syntax: :SYSTem:KEY?

Returned Format: [:SYSTem:KEY] < keycode > < NL>

Where:

< keycode > ;;= 0 through 44 (integer- NR1 format)

Example: DIM input$[io]

OUTPUT 707;":SYSTEM:KEY?"
ENTER 707; lnput$
PRINT lnput$

HP 54501A System Subsystem

Programming 7-7
KEY

Table 7-2. HP 54501A Front-Panel Key Codes

KEY KEY KEY KEY

CODE CODE

Menus TIMEBASE
- l "-"(minus) 24
Menus CHAN
- 2 "." (decimal pt.) 25
Menus TRIG
- 3 0 26
Menus DISPLAY
- 4 1 27
Menus At AV
- 5 2 28
Menus WFORM MATH
-
6 3 29
Menus WFORM SAVE
- 7 4 30
Menus- DEFINE MEAS 8 5 31
Menus UTIL
- 9 6 32
Function Select 1 10 7 33
Function Select 2 11 8 34
Function Select 3 12 9 35
Function Select 4 13 RUN/STOP 36
Function Select 5 14 SINGLE 37
Function Select 6 15 CLEAR DISPLAY 38
Function Select 7 16 LOCAL 39
FINE 17 HARDCOPY 40

sV 18 AUTO-SCALE 41

mmV 19 RECALL 42
p,s 20 SAVE 43
ns 21 SHOW 44
CLEAR 22 no key 0
Shift (blue key) 23

The function select keys are at the right of the CRT and are numbered
from the top (10) to the bottom (16).

System Subsystem HP 54501A

7-8 Programming
 LONGform

LONGform command/query

The :SYSTEM:LONGFORM command sets the longform variable which

tells the HP 54501A how to format query responses. If the LONGFORM
command is set to OFF, command headers and alpha arguments are sent
from the HP 54501A in the short form. If the LONGFORM command is
set to ON, the whole word will be output. This command does not affect
the input data messages to the HP 54501A. Headers and arguments may
be sent to the HP 54501A in either the longform or shortform regardless
of how the LONGFORM command is set. For more information refer to
the HEADER command in this chapter.

The LONGFORM query returns the state of the LONGFORM command.

Note

Even though the Longform command can be sent using an alpha

or numeric argument, the response is always a 1 or 0 (I for ON, 0
for OFF).

Command Syntax: :SYSTem:LONGform {{ ON | 1 } | { OFF | 0 }}

Example: OUTPUT 707;'-:SYST:LONG ON"

Query Syntax: :SYSTem:LONQform?

Returned Format: [:SYSTem:LONGform] {1 | 0}<NL>

Where:

1 ::= ON
0::= OFF

Example: DIM Long$[30]

OUTPUT 707;":SYSTEM:LONGFORM?"
ENTER 707; Long$
PRINT Long$

HP 54501A System Subsystem

Programming 7-9
SETup

SETup command/query

The :SYSTEM:SETUP command sets the HP 54501A as defined by the

data in the learn string sent from the controller. The setup string contains
1024 bytes of setup data. The 1024 bytes does not include the header or
"#800001024".

The SETUP query outputs the current HP 54501A setup in the form of a
learn string to the controller. The SETUP query operates the same as the
*LRN? query.

The learn string is sent and received as a binary block of data. The format
for the data transmission is the # format defined in the IEEE 488.2
specification.

Command Syntax: :SYSTem:SETup <setup>

Example: OUTPUT 707;":SYSTEM:SETUP < setup >"

Where:

<setup> ::= ^800001024 < setup data string >

System Subsystem HP 54501A

7-10 Programming
 SETup

Query Syntax: :SYSTem:SETup?

Returned Format: [:SYSTem:SETup] <setup> <NL>

Where:

<setup> ::= #800001024 < setup data string >

Example: 10 DIM Set$[2000]

20 'Setup the instrument as desired
30 OUTPUT 707;":SYST:HEAD OFF
40 OUTPUT 707;":SYSTEM:SETUP?"
50 !Trans(er the instrument setup to controller
60 ENTER 707 USING "-K";Set$ (Store the setup
70 PAUSE 'Change the setup as desired
80 OUTPUT 707 USING "#,K";":SYST:SETUP ";Set$
90 "Returns the instrument to the first setup
100 END

Note

The logical order for this instruction is to send the query first
followed by the command at a time of your choosing. The query
causes the learn string to be sent to the controller and the
command causes the learn string to be returned to the
HP 54501A.

HP 54501A System Subsystem

Programming 7-11
Acquire Subsystem 8

Introduction The ACQUIRE subsystem commands set up conditions for executing a

DIGITIZE root level command to acquire waveform data. This

subsystem selects the type of data, the number of averages, and the
number of data points. See figure 8-1 for the Acquire subsystem
commands syntax diagram.

Note
The on-screen time is divided into a specific number of
horizontal time points as defined by the ^4CQUIRE:POINTS
command. Each of these increments in time is referred to as a
time bucket with each time bucket having a fixed time associated
with it.

The ACQUIRE subsystem is also the only HP-IB control for two display
parameters: Display Mode and Number of Averages. There is a coupling
between the front panel and the ACQUIRE subsystem parameters. This
means that when the HP-IB parameters for ACQUIRE TYPE or
COUNT are changed, the front panel will change. Also, when the front
panel parameters are changed, the HP-IB parameters will change.

(Normal) The :ACQUIRE:TYPE NORMAL command will set the HP 54501A to

the variable persistence mode. The front panel user activates the same
Persistence
mode by selecting the Display menu, then setting the display mode to
Mode Normal. The persistence time is set via the HP-IB in the DISPLAY
subsystem using the :DISPLAY:PERSISTENCE command.

The :ACQUIRE:COUNT can be set in this mode, but has no impact on

the current display mode or HP-IB acquisition. The
:ACQUIRE:COUNT query will always return a 1 when the acquisition
type is set to Normal.

HP 54501A Acquire Subsystem

Programming 8-1
Averaging The :ACQUIRE:TYPE AVERAGE command sets the HP 54501A to the
Averaging mode.
Mode

COUNT can be set in AVERAGE mode by sending the

:ACQUIRE:COUNT command followed by the number of averages. In
this mode the value is rounded to the nearest power of 2. It determines
the number of averages that must be acquired.

To activate the averaging mode from the front panel, select the Display
menu, then select Average. Changing the number of averages changes the
COUNT value.

Envelope Mode The :ACQUIRE:TYPE ENVELOPE command sets the HP 54501A to

the Envelope mode.

A count value can be set in the envelope mode. This value determines the
number of values to be used, at each time point, when constructing the
envelope. The count value cannot be set from the front panel.

To activate the Envelope mode from the front panel, select the Display
menu, then select the Envelope mode.

Acquire Subsystem HP 54501A

8-2 Programming
 complete_arg:: = An integer, 0 through 100.

count_arg:: = An integer, 1 to 2048. It specifies the number of values to

average for each time point when in averaged mode, or the number of hits
per each time point to form the envelope in Envelope Acquisition mode.

points_arg:: = 32,64,128,256,500,512, or 1024.

Figure 8-1. Acquire Subsystem Commands Syntax Diagram

HP 54501A Acquire Subsystem

Programming 8-3
COMPIete

COMPIete command/query

The :ACQUIRE:COMPLETE command specifies the completion criteria

for an acquisition. The parameter determines what percentage of the time
buckets need to be "full" before an acquisition is considered complete. If
you are in the NORMAL mode the instrument only needs one data bit per
time bucket for that time bucket to be considered full. In order for the
time bucket to be considered full in the AVERAGE or ENVELOPE
modes a specified number of data points (COUNT) must be acquired.

The range for the COMPLETE command is 0 to 100 and indicates the
percentage of time buckets that must be "full" before the acquisition is
considered complete. If the complete value is set to 100%, all time buckets
must contain data for the acquisition to be considered complete. If the
complete value is set to 0 then one acquisition cycle will take place.

The COMPLETE query returns the completion criteria for the currently
selected mode.

Command Syntax: :ACQuire:COMPIete <comp>

Where:

<comp> ::= Oto 100 percent

Example: OUTPUT 707;":ACQUIRE:COMPLETE 85"

Query Syntax: :ACOuire:COMPIete?

Returned Format: [:ACOuire:COMPIete] <compxNL>

Where:

<comp> ::= Oto 100 (integer- NR1 format)

Example: DIM Cmp$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":ACQUIRE:COMPLETE?"
ENTER 707;Cmp$
PRINT Cmp$

Acquire Subsystem HP 54501A

8-4 Programming
 COUNt

COUNt command/query

In average mode the :ACQUIRE:COUNT command specifies the

number of values to be averaged for each time bucket before the
acquisition is considered complete for that time bucket.

When acquisition type is set to NORMAL the count is 1.

When the acquisition type is set to AVERAGE the count can range from
1 to 2048. Any value can be sent, however the value will be rounded to the

nearest power of 2.

When the acquisition type is set to ENVELOPE the count can be any
value between 1 and 2048.

The COUNT query returns the currently selected count value.

Command Syntax: :ACQuire:couNt <count>

Where:

< count > ::= 1 to 2048

Example: OUTPUT 707;":ACQUlRE:TYPE AVERAGE;COUNT 1024"

Query Syntax: :ACQuire:couNt?

Returned Format: [:ACQuire:couNt] < count >

<NL>

Where:

<count> ::= 1 through 2048 (integer- NR1 format)

Example: DIM Cnt$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":ACQ:COUNT?"
ENTER 707;Cnt$
PRINT Cnt$

HP 54501A Acquire Subsystem

Programming 8-5
POINts

POINts command/query

The :ACQUIRE:POINTS command specifies the number of time buckets

for each acquisition record. The legal settings are 32,64,128,256,500,
512, or 1024.

Any value between 32 and 1024 can be sent to the instrument. If a value is
sent that is not one of the legal values it is rounded to the nearest power of
2. If a number smaller than 31 or greater than 1024 is sent an error is
produced.

The POINTS query returns the number of time buckets to be acquired.

Note
Always query the Waveform Subsystem Points value to
determine the actual number of time buckets acquired.

Command Syntax: :ACQuire:POINts <points_arg>

Where:

<
points_arg >:: = 32 to 1024 (see above for legal values)

Example: OUTPUT 707;":ACQ:POiNTS 512"

Query Syntax: :ACQuire:POINts?

Returned Format: [:ACQuire:POINts] <points_argxNL>

Where:

<
points_arg > :: = 32 -1024 (see above for legal values)

Example: DIM Pnts$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":ACOUIRE:POINTS?"
ENTER 707; Pnts$
PRINT Pnts$

Acquire Subsystem HP 54501A

8-6 Programming
 TYPE

TYPE command/query

The :ACQUIRE:TYPE command selects the type of acquisition that is to

take place when a :DIGITIZE root level command is executed. There are
three acquisition types: NORMAL, AVERAGE, and ENVELOPE.

The :ACQUIRE:TYPE query returns the current acquisition type.

Command Syntax: :ACQuire:TYPE {NORMal | AVERage | ENVelope}

Example: OUTPUT 707;":ACOUIRE:TYPE ENVELOPE"

Query Syntax: :ACOuire:TYPE?

Returned Format: [:ACQuire:TYPE] <type> <NL>

Where:

<type> ::= {NORMal | AVERage | ENVelope}

Example: DIM Tpe$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":ACQU1RE:TYPE?"
ENTER 707;Tpe$
PRINT Tpe$

HP 54501A Acquire Subsystem

Programming 8-7
Calibrate Subsystem 9

Introduction The CALIBRATE subsystem contains only one command. This

subsystem calibrates the instrument for different probes, cables, or setups.

Note

The time null is set in the Probe Cal menu of the Utility menus.
For more information refer to the HP 54501A Front-Panel
Reference Manual.

.TNULI
r
fTNULI

valuel =
channel 1 to channel 2 skew

value2 =
channel 1 to channel 3 skew

value3 =
channel 1 to channel 4 skew

Figure 9-1. Calibrate Subsystem Commands Syntax Diagram

HP 54501A Calibrate Subsystem

Programming 9-1
TNULI

TNULI command/query

The :CALIBRATE:TNULL command sends the time null

(channel-to-channel skew) values into the HP 54501A. The time null
values should have been obtained from the instrument during a previous
setup.

The TNULL query tells the instrument to output the tune null values to
the controller.

Command Syntax: :CAUbrate:TNUU <null_value1>,<null_value2>,<null_value3>

Where:

< null_value1 > : =

channel 1 to channel 2 skew
< null_value2 > : =
channel 1 to channel 3 skew
<null_value3> : =
channel 1 to channel 4 skew

Example: OUTPUT 707;":CAL:TNUL <null_value1 >,<null_value2>,<null_value3>

Query Syntax: :CAUbrate:TNUU?

Returned Format: [:CAUbrate:TNUU] <null_value1 >,<null_value2>,<null_value3> <NL>

Where:

<null_value1 > :: =
channel 1 to channel 2 skew (exponential -
NR3 format)
<null value2> :: =
channel 1 to channel 3 skew (exponential •
NR3 format)
<null_value3> :: =
channel 1 to channel 4 skew (exponential - NR3 format)

Example: DIM Nii$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":CAL!BRATE:TNULL?"
ENTER 707; Nll$
PRINT Nll$

Calibrate Subsystem HP 54501A

9-2 Programming
Channel Subsystem 10
I ntrodUCtion The CHANNEL subsystem commands control the channel display and
vertical or Y axis of the HP 54501A. Channels 1,2,3, and 4 are
independently programmable for all offset, probe, coupling, and range
functions.

The channel commands can be sent with a channel number specified or

not specifed. If a channel number is specified in the command then the
specified channel is affected, however if the channel number is not
specified then channel 1 is affected.

The channel displays are toggled on and off with the root level commands
VIEW and BLANK.

HP 54501A Channel Subsystem

Programming 10-1
 :CHANnel)——»1 chonne l_number

4
1,2,3, or
=
channel_number

offset_arg = A real number defining the voltage at the center of the

display range.

probe_arg = A real number from 0.9 to 1000.0 specifying the probe

attenuation with respect to 1.

range_arg = A real number specifying the size of the acquisition window

in volts.

Figure 10-1. Channel Subsystem Commands Syntax Diagram

Channel Subsystem HP 54501A

10-2 Programming
 COUPIing

COUPIing command/query

The :CHANNEL<N> :COUPLING command selects the input coupling

for the specified channel. The coupling for each channel can be set to AC
or DC.

The COUPLING query returns the current coupling for the specified
channel.

Command Syntax: :CHANnei < N > :coupiing {AC | DC}

Where:

<N> ::= 1,2,3,or4

Example: OUTPUT 707;":CHAN2:coup DC"

Query Syntax :CHANnei < N > :coupiing?

Where:

<N> ::= 1,2,3,or4

Returned Format: [:CHANnei <N> :coupiing) {AC | DC}<NL>

Example: DIM Ch$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":CHAN2:COUPLING?"
ENTER 707;Ch$
PRINT Ch$

HP 54501A Channel Subsystem

Programming 10-3
ECL

ECL command

The :CHANNEL< N > :ECL command sets the vertical range, offset,
channel coupling, and trigger level of the selected channel for optimum
viewing of ECL signals. The offset and trigger level are set to -1.3 volts
and the range is set to 12.8 volts full scale. Channel coupling is set to DC.

There is no query form of this command.

Command Syntax: :CHANnei < N > :ECL

Example: OUTPUT 707;":CHAN1 :ECL"

Where:

<N> ::= 1,2,3,or4

Channel Subsystem HP 54501A

10-4 Programming
 HFReject

HFReject command/query

The :CHANNEL < N > :HFREJECT command controk an internal

lowpass filter. When ON the bandwidth of the specified channel is limited
to approximately 20 MHz. The bandwidth limit filter may be used when
either AC or DC coupling is used.

The HFREJECT query returns the current setting.

Command Syntax: :CHANnel<N>;HFReject {{ON I 1} I {OFF I 0}}

Where:

<N> ::= 1,2,3,or4

Example: OUTPUT 707;":CHANNEL2:HFR ON"

Query Syntax: :CHANnel < N > :HFReject?

Where:

<N> ::= 1,2,3,or4

Returned Format: [:CHANnel <N>: HFReject] {1 |0}<NL>

Example: DIM Hf$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":CHAN:HFR?"
ENTER 707; Hf$
PRINT Hf$

HP 54501A Channel Subsystem

Programming 10-5
OFFSet

OFFSet command/query

The :CHANNEL < N > :OFFSET command sets the voltage that is

represented at center screen for the selected channel. The range of legal
values varies with the value set with the RANGE command. If you set the
offset to a value outside the legal range, it will automatically be set to the
nearest legal value.

The OFFSET query returns the current offset value for the selected
channel.

Command Syntax: :CHANnel < N > :OFFSet < value >

Where:

<N> ::= l,2,3,or4

< value >
::= offset value

Example: OUTPUT 707;":CHAN1:OFFS 200M;:CHAN2:OFFSET 20E-3"

Query Syntax: :CHANnel < N > :OFFSet?

Returned Format: [:CHANnel <N> :OFFSet] <valuexNL>

Where:

<N> ::= 1,2,3,or4

< value > :: =
offset value in volts (exponential -
NR3 format)

Example: OUTPUT 707;":CHANNEL2:OFFSET?"

ENTER 707;0ffset
PRINT Offset

Channel Subsystem HP 54501A

10-6 Programming
 PROBe

PROBe command/query

The :CHANNEL < N > :PROBE command specifies the probe

attenuation factor for the selected channel. The range of the probe
attenuation factor is from 0.9 to 1000.0. This command does not change
the actual input sensitivity of the HP 54501A. It changes the reference
constants for scaling the display factors and for automatic measurements,
trigger levels, etc.

The PROBE query returns the current probe attenuation factor for the
selected channel.

Command Syntax: :CHANnel < N > :PROBe <atten >

Where:

<N> ::= 1,2,3,or4

<atten> ::= 0.9 to 1000

Example: OUTPUT 707;":CHANNEL2:PROBE 10"

Query Syntax: :CHANnel <N>: PROBe?

Where:

<N> ::= 1,2, 3, or 4

Returned Format: [:CHANnel <N> :PROBe] <attenxNL>

Where:

<N> ::= 1,2, 3, or 4

< atten > :: =
0.9 to 1000 (exponential -
NR3 format)

Example: DIM Prb$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":CHANNEL1:PROBE?"
ENTER 707; Prb$
PRINT Prb$

HP 54501A Channel Subsystem

Programming 10-7
RANGe

RANGe command/query

The :CHANNEL < N > :RANGE command defines the full scale vertical
axis of the selected channel. The RANGE for channels 1 and 4 can be set
to any value from 40 mV to 40 V, when using 1:1 probe attenuation. The
RANGE for channels 2 and 3 can be set to any value from 800 mV to
4.0 V, when using 1:1 probe attenuation. If the probe attenuation is
changed, the range value is multiplied by the probe attenuation factor.

The RANGE query returns the current range setting for the specified
channel.

Command Syntax: :CHANnel<N>:RANGe < range >

Where:

<N> ::= 1,2,3,or4

< range >
::= range value

Examples: :OUTPUT 707;"CHANNEL1 :RANGE .60"

:OUTPUT 707;"CHANNEL2:RANGE 1.2 V"

Query Syntax; :CHANnel<N>: RANGe?

Returned Format: [:CHANnel<N>:RANGe] <rangexNL>

Where:

<N> ::= 1,2,3,or4

< range > :: =
range value (exponential -
NR3 format)

Example: DIM Rng$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":CHAN2: RANGE?"
ENTER 707; Rng$
PRINT Rng$

Channel Subsystem HP 54501A

10-8 Programming
 TTL

TTL command

The :CHANNEL< N > :TTL command sets the vertical

range, offset,
channel coupling, and trigger level of the selected channel for optimum
viewing of TTL signals. The offset is set to 2.5 volts. The trigger level is set
to 1.4 volts and the range is set to 8.0 volts full scale. Channel coupling is
set to DC.

There is no query form of this command.

Command Syntax: :CHANnei < N > :TTL

Example: OUTPUT 707;":CHAN1 :TTL"

Where:

<N> ::= 1,2,3,or4

HP 54501A Channel Subsystem

Programming 10-9
Display Subsystem 11

Introduction The DISPLAY subsystem is used to control the display of data, voltage
and time markers, text, and graticules.

Note
The command that changes the Display mode is
^4CQUIRE:TYPE. The command that controls the number of
averages is ACQUIRE.-COUNT.

Figure 11-1. Display Subsystem Commands Syntax Diagram

HP 54501A Display Subsystem

Programming 11-1
 Figure 11-1. Display Subsystem Commands Syntax Diagram (continued)

Display Subsystem HP 54501A

11-2 Programming
 column_arg =
An integer from 0 through 72.

data_spec =
Block data in IEEE 488.2 # format.

mask_arg =
An integer, 0 through 255.

pers_arg
=
An real number 0.1 through 11.

pmemory_num =
An integer, 0 through 3.

=
An integer, 0 through 24.
row_arg

string_arg =
Any quoted string.

Figure 11-1. Display Subsystem Commands Syntax Diagram (continued)

HP 54501 A Display Subsystem

Programming 11-3
COLumn

COLumn command/query

The :DISPLAY:COLUMN command specifies the starting column for

subsequent STRING and LINE commands.

The COLUMN query returns the column where the next LINE or
STRING will start.

Command Syntax: : DISPlay: COLumn < number >

Where:

<number> ;:= Othrough72

Example: OUTPUT 707;":DISPLAY:COLUMN 50"

Query Syntax: :Dispiay:coLumn?

Returned Format: [:DISPIay:COLumn] <number> <NL>

Where:

<number> :: = 0 through 72 pnteger - NR1 format)

Example: DIM cimn$[30]

OUTPUT 707;":DISPLAY:COLUMN?"
ENTER 707;Clmn$
PRINT Clmn$

Display Subsystem HP 54501A

11-4 Programming
 CONNect

CONNect command/query

The :DISPLAY:CONNECT command turns the connect-the-dots

function on and off.

The CONNECT query returns the current setting of the connect-the-dots

function. The returned status is indicated by using a 1 for on and a 0 for
off.

Command Syntax: :Dispiay;coNNect {{ON 11} | {OFF | o}}

Example: OUTPUT 707;":DlSPLAY:CONNECT ON"

Query Syntax: :Dispiay:coNNecr?

Returned Format: [:Dispiay:GONNect] {1 | O}<NL>

Example: DIM Cnn$[soi

OUTPUT 707; ":DISP: CONNECT?"
ENTER 707;Cnn$
PRINT Cnn$

HP 54501A Display Subsystem

Programming 11-5
DATA

DATA command/query

The :DISPLAY:DATA command is used to write waveform data to one

of the pixel planes in the HP 54501A. The DATA command is followed
by a block of binary data that is transferred from the controller to a
specific plane in the HP 54501A. Only pixel memories 1 and 2 may be
written to. The data is in the IEEE 488.2 definite block form with 16576
bytes of data preceded by seven block header bytes. The block header
contains the ASCII characters "#800016576" and is sent prior to the data
being sent.

The :DISPLAY:DATA query is used to write waveform data from one of

the pixel planes in the HP 54501A. The pixel planes available are planes 0
through 3. The DATA query causes the HP 54501A to output pixel data
from the specified plane. If plane 0 is specified, the HP 54501A will
transfer the active display. IfPMEMORYl or PMEMORY2 is specified
that memory will be transferred. When PMEMORY3 is specifed the
half-bright portion of the display (graticule, markers, and displayed
memories) will be transferred.

Note
The pixel planes are specified by the :DISPLAY:SOURCE
command with PMEMORYO through PMEMORY3.

Command Syntax: :DISPIay:DATA < binary block >

Where:

< binary block > :: = block data in IEEE 488.2 # format

Display Subsystem HP 54501A

11-6 Programming
 DATA

Query Syntax: :Dispiay:DATA?

Returned Format: [:DISPIay;DATA] #800016576< 16576 bytes of binary data> < NL>

Example: 10 CLEAR 707

20 DIM Plane$ [17000]
30 OUTPUT 707;":SYST:HEADON;:EOI ON"
40 OUTPUT 707;":DISPLAY:SOURCE PMEMORYO;DATA?"
50 ENTER 707 USING "-K";Plane$
60 OUTPUT 707;":DISPLAY:SOURCE PMEM1"
70 OUTPUT 707 USING"#,-K";Plane$
80 END

This example transfers data from the active display memory to the
controller, then transfers the data back to pixel memory 1 in the
HP 54501A.

HP 54501A Display Subsystem

Programming 11-7
FORMat

FORMat command/query

The :DISPLAY:FORMAT command sets the number of display areas on

the CRT. FORMAT 1 provides one display area and uses eight divisions
for the full scale range. FORMAT 2 sets the number of screens to 2 and
uses four divisions for the full scale range. FORMAT 4 provides four
display areas on the CRT and uses two divisions for the full scale range.

The FORMAT query returns the current display format.

Command Syntax: : DISPlay: FORMat {1 | 2 | 4}

Example: OUTPUT 707;";DISP:FORMAT 1"

Query Syntax: : DISPlay: FORMat?

Returned Format: [: DISPlay: FORMat] {1 | 2 | 4}<NL>

Example: DIM Frmt$[30]

OUTPUT 707;":DISPLAY:FORMAT?"
ENTER 707;Frmt$
PRINT Frmt$

Display Subsystem HP 54501A

11-8 Programming
 GRATicule

GRATicule command/query

The :DISPLAY:GRATICULE command selects the type of graticule that

is displayed.

The GRATICULE query returns the type of graticule displayed.

Command Syntax: : Display: GRATicule {OFF | GRID | AXES | FRAMe}

Example: OUTPUT 707;"; DISPLAY:GRATICULE AXES"

Query Syntax: :DlSPIay:GRATicule?

Returned Format: [:DlSPIay:GRATicule] <type> <NL>

Where:

<type> ::= {OFF | GRID | AXES | FRAMe}

Example: DIM Qrt$[30]

OUTPUT 707;":DISPLAY:GRATICULE?"
ENTER 707;Grt$
PRINT Grt$

HP 54501A Display Subsystem

Programming 11-9
INVerse

INVerse command/query

The :DISPLAY:INVERSE command determines whether text sent with

the LINE or STRING command in the DISPLAY subsystem is to be
written with the INVERSE attribute. If the inverse attribute is on the text
will be written in inverse video.

The INVERSE query returns the current state of this command.

Command Syntax: : Display: INVerse {{ON 11} | {OFF | o}}

Example: OUTPUT 707;":DISPLAY:INVERSE OFF'

Query Syntax: : Display: iNVerse?

Returned format: [:Display:lNVerse] {1 |O}<NL>

Example: DIM iv$[30]

OUTPUT 707;":DISP:INVERSE?"
ENTER 707; lv$
PRINT lv$

Display Subsystem HP 54501A

11-10 Programming
 LINE

LINE command

The :DISPLAY:LINE command writes a text string to the screen. The

text is displayed starting at the location of the current row and column.
The row and column can be set by the :DISPLAY:ROW and
:DISPLAY:COLUMN commands prior to sending the :DISPLAY:LINE
command. Text can be written over the entire screen with the LINE
command.

If the text string is longer than the available space on the current line, the
text will wrap to the start of the same line. In any case, the ROW value is
incremented by one and the COLUMN value remains the same. The next
:DISPLAY:LINE command will write on the next line of the display
starting at the same column as the previous text. After writing line 24, the
last line in the display area, ROW is reset to 0.

Command Syntax: :DISPIay:LINE < quoted string >

Where:

< quoted string > :: =

any series of ASCII characters enclosed in quotes.

Example: OUTPUT 707:":DISPLAY:LINE "ENTER PROBE ATTENUATION"""

HP 54501A Display Subsystem

Programming 11-11
MASK

MASK command/query

The :DISPLAY:MASK command inhibits the instrument from writing to

selected areas of the screen. Text sent over the HP-IB with the line and
string commands, or the SYSTEM:DSP command is not affected by this
command. The purpose of the command is to allow HP-IB text to be
written anywhere on screen and to prevent the instrument from
overwriting the text through its normal operation.

The mask parameter is an 8-bit integer in which each bit controls writing
to an area of the screen. A zero inhibits writing to the area represented by
the bit, and a 1 enables writing to that area.

The MASK query returns the current value of the MASK.

Command Syntax: :Dispiay:MASK < value >

Where:

< value > :: = 0 to 255 (integer • NR1 format)

Example: OUTPUT 707;":DISPLAY:MASK 67"

The previous example enables writing to the Menu Area (bit 6), the Status
Line (bit 1), and the Advisory Area (bit 0).

Query Syntax: :Dispiay:MASK?

Return Format: [:Dispiay:MASK] <value> <NL>

Where:

< value > :: = 0 to 255 (integer NR1 format)

•

Example: DIM Msk$[30]

OUTPUT 707;":DISP:MASK?"
ENTER 707; Msk$
PRINT Msk$

Display Subsystem HP 54501A

11-12 Programming
 MASK

Table 11-1. Display Mask Byte.

Bit Weight Screen Area Effected

7 128 unused
6 64 Menu Area
5 32 Timebase Information
4 16 Measurement Result Area
3 8 Graticule Area
2 4 unused
1 2 Status Line
0 1 Advisory Area

HP 54501A Display Subsystem

Programming 11-13
PERSistence

PERSistence command/query

The :DISPLAY:PERSISTENCE command sets the display persistence.

The PERSISTENCE command is only effective in the Normal display
mode.

The parameters for this command are the keywords INFINITE, or

SINGLE, or a real numbers from 0.15 through 11.0 representing the
persistence in seconds. Any value less than 0.15 will set the
PERSISTENCE to MINIMUM. Any value greater than 10 seconds will
set the PERSISTENCE to INFINITE.

When the key word SINGLE is sent as the argument for this command,
the persistence value is set to minimum.

The PERSISTENCE query returns the current persistence value. When

Minimum is displayed, the value returned is 0. When Infinite is displayed,
the value returned is 11.

Command Syntax: ;DISPIay:PERSistence {INPinite | SINGIe | 0.1 through 11}

Example: OUTPUT 707;":DlSPLAY:PERSISTENCE 3.0"

Query Syntax: : DISPlay: PERSistence?

Returned Format: [: DISPlay: PERSistence] < value >

<NL>

Where:

< value >

::= {0 | .2-10 | 11} (exponential - NR3 format)
where 1.100E+1 = infinite

Example: DIM prs$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":DISPLAY:PERSISTENCE?"
ENTER 707; Prs$
PRINT Prs$

Display Subsystem HP 54501A

11-14 Programming
 ROW

ROW command/query

The :DISPLAY:ROW command specifies the starting row on the CRT for
subsequent STRING and LINE commands. The ROW number remains
constant until another ROW command is received, or it is incremented by
the LINE command. The ROW value is 0 through 24.

The ROW query returns the current value of ROW.

Command Syntax: :DISPIay:ROW < row number >

Where:

< row number >::= 0 through 24

Example: OUTPUT 707; ":DISPLAY:ROW io"

Query Syntax: :DISPLAY:ROW?

Returned Format: [:DISPIay:ROW] <rownumber> <NL>

Where:

< row number > :: = 0 through 24 (integer - NR1 format)

Example: DIM Rw$[30]

OUTPUT 707;":DISPLAY:ROW?"
ENTER 707; Rw$
PRINT Rw$

HP 54501A Display Subsystem

Programming 11-15
SCReen

SCReen command/query

The :DISPLAY:SCREEN command turns the displayed screen on and

off. The only part of the screen that remains on after the
:DISPLAY:SCREEN OFF command is executed is the status line. The
screen can be turned on again with the ON parameter.

The SCREEN query returns the current setting of this function. The
returned status is indicated by using a 1 for on and a 0 for off.

The command :DISPLAY:TEXT BLANK removes only the text from the
display.

Command Syntax: :oispiay:scReen {{ON 11} | {OFF | o}}

Example: OUTPUT 707;°:DISPLAY:SCREEN ON"

Query Syntax: : DISPlay :SCFteen?

Returned Format: [: Display: SCReen] {1 |O}<NL>

Example: DIM Srn$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":DISP:SCREEN?"
ENTER 707; Srn$
PRINT Srn$

Display Subsystem HP 54501A

11-16 Programming
 SOURce

SOURce command/query

The :DISPLAY:SOURCE command specifies the source or destination

for the :DISPLAY:DATA query and command. The SOURCE
command has one parameter, PMEMORYO through PMEMORY3.

The SOURCE query returns the currently specified SOURCE.

Command Syntax: : DISPlay: SOUFtee PMEMory{0 I 1 I 2 I 3}

Where:

PMEMoryO :: =
active display
PMEMoryl :: = pixel memory 1
PMEMory2 :: = pixel memory 2
PMEMory3 :: = half-bright portion of the display (graticule, markers, and displayed
memories)

Example: 10 CLEAR 707

20 DIM Plane$ [17000]
30 OUTPUT 707;":SYST:HEAD ON;:EOI ON"
40 OUTPUT 707;":DISPLAY:SOURCE PMEMORYO;DATA?"
50 ENTER 707 USING "-K";Plane$
60 OUTPUT 707;"DISPLAY:SOURCE PMEM1"
70 OUTPUT 707 USING "#,-K";Plane$
80 END

This example transfers data from the active display to the controller and
then back to pixel memory 1 in the HP 54501A.

Query Syntax: : DISPlay: SOURce?

Returned Format: [:DISPIay:SOURce] PMEMory{0 | 1 | 2 | 3}<NL>

Example: DIM Src$[30]

OUTPUT 707;":DISP:SOUR?"
ENTER 707; Src$
PRINT Src$

HP 54501A Display Subsystem

Programming 11-17
STRing

STRing command

The :DISPLAY:STRING command writes a text string to the CRT of the

HP 54501A. The text will be written starting at the current ROW and
COLUMN values. If the column limit is reached (column 72) the excess
text is written over the text on the left side of that line. If 90 or more
characters are sent an error is produced. The STRING command does
not increment the ROW value, however the LINE command does.

Command Syntax: :DISPIay:STRing < quoted string >

Example: OUTPUT 707;":oisp:STRiNG 'INPUT SIGNAL TO CHANNEL 2"

Display Subsystem HP 54501A

11-18 Programming
 TEXT

TEXT command

The :DISPLAY:TEXT command allows you to blank the user text area on
the CRT. All text on the entire screen will be blanked. This command
has only one parameter.

There is no query form of this command.

Command Syntax: :Dispiay:TDcr BLANk

Example: OUTPUT 707;":DISPLAY:TEXT BLAN"

HP 54501A Display Subsystem

Programming 11-19
TMARker

TMARker command/query

The :DISPLAY:TMARKER command turns the time markers on and off.

The TMARKER query returns the state of the time markers.

Command Syntax: :Dispiay:TMARker {{ON 11} | {OFF | o}}

Example: OUTPUT 707;":DISP:TMAR OFF'

Query Syntax: :Dispiay:TMARker?

Returned Format: [:Dispiay:TMARker] {1 [O}<NL>

Example: DIM Tmr$[30]

OUTPUT 707;°:DISP:TMARKER?"
ENTER 707; Tmr$
PRINT Tmr$

Note

It is a recommended practice to turn the Tmarkers on before

attempting to set them using a :MEASURE:TSTART or
MEASURE.-TSTOP command.

Display Subsystem HP 54501A

11-20 Programming
 VMARker

VMARker command/query

The :DISPLAY: VMARKER command turns the voltage markers on and

off.

The VMARKER query returns the state of the Vmarkers.

Command Syntax: : Display: VMARker {{ON 11} | {OFF | o}}

Example: OUTPUT 707;":DISP:VMARKER ON"

Query Syntax: : DISPlay: VMARker?

Returned Format: [: Display: VMARker] {1 | O}<NL>

Example: DIM Vmrk$[30]

OUTPUT 707;":DISP:VMARKER?"
ENTER 707;Vmrk$
PRINT Vmrk$

Note
It isrecommended practice to turn the Vmarkers on before
a

attempting to set them using a :MEASURE:VSTART or

MEASURE.-VSTOP command.

HP 54501A Display Subsystem

Programming 11-21
Function Subsystem 12
Introduction The FUNCTION subsystem defines six functions using the displayed
channek and/or the waveform memories as operands. The operators are
ADD, SUBTRACT. MULTIPLY, VERSUS, ONLY, and INVERT.

If a
channel or memory that is not on is specified as an operand, then that
channel is enabled.

See figure 12-1 for a syntax diagram of the Function subsystem commands.

Channel 1 through 4 and waveform Memories 1 through 4 are available

for functions.

HP 54501A Function Subsystem

Programming 12-1
l:FUNCtion_)—j fund ion_num

Figure 12-1. Function Subsystem Commands Syntax Diagram

Function Subsystem HP 54501A

12-2 Programming
 channel_num =
1,2,3, or 4

function_num = 1 or 2

offset_arg = 0 to ± voltage full scale

range_arg
= full screen voltage

4
wmemory_num =
1,2,3, or

Figure 12-1. Function Subsystem Commands Syntax Diagram (continued)

HP 54501A Function Subsystem

Programming 12-3
ADD

ADD command

The :FUNCTION < N > :ADD command algebraically sums the two
defined operands.

Command Syntax: :FUNCtion<N>:ADD < operand >,< operand >

Where:

1 or2
<N> ::=

<operand> ::= {CHANnell | CHANnel2 | CHANnelS | CHANnel4 | WMEMoryl

WMEMory2 | WMEMoryS | WMEMory4}

Example: OUTPUT 707;":FUNCTION2:ADD WMEMORY3.WMEMORY4"

Function Subsystem HP 54501A

12-4 Programming
 INVert

INVert command

The :FUNCTION < N > :INVERT command inverts the operand.

Command Syntax: :FUNCtion<N>:INVert <operand>

Where:

<N> ::= 1 or2

< operand >

::= {CHANneh | CHANnel2 | CHANnel3 | CHANnel4 | WMEMoryl
WMEMory2 | WMEMory3 | WMEMory4}

Example: OUTPUT 707;":FUNCT10N2:INVERT WMEMORY3"

HP 54501A Function Subsystem

Programming 12-5
MULTiply

MULTiply command

The :FUNCTION < N > :MULTIPLY command causes the instrument to

algebraically multiply the two operands.

Command Syntax: :FUNCtion<N>:MULTiply < operand >,< operand >

Where:

<N> ::= 1 or2

<operand> ::= {CHANnell | CHANnel2 | CHANnel3 | CHANnel4 | WMEMoryl |

WMEMoryZ | WMEMory3 | WMEMory4}

Example: OUTPUT 707;":FUNCTION2:MULTIPLY CHANNEL1,CHANNEL2"

Function Subsystem HP 54501A

12-6 Programming
 OFFSet

OFFSet command/query

The :FUNCTION < N > :OFFSET command sets the voltage represented,
at center screen for the selected function. The maximum value of offset is
+/- volts full screen.

The OFFSET query returns the current offset value for the selected
function.

Command Syntax: :FUNCtion < N > :OFFSet <offset>

Where:

<N> ::= 1or2

< offset > ::= offset value (see above)

Example: OUTPUT 707;":FUNCTION1 :OFFSET 650E-4"

Query Syntax: :FUNCtion < N > :OFFSet?

Where:

<N> ::= 1 or2

Returned Format: [:FUNCtion <N>:OFFSet] <offset> <NL>

Where:

1
<N> ::= or2
< offset > :: =
offset value (see above) (exponential -
NR3 format)

Example: DIM Off$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":FUNCTION2:OFFSET?"
ENTER 707;0ff$
PRINT Off$

HP 54501 A Function Subsystem

Programming 12-7
ONLY

ONLY command

The :FUNCTION < N > :ONLY command is just another copy of the
operand. The ONLY command is useful for scaling channels and
memories with the :FUNCTION < N > :RANGE and
:FUNCTION < N > :OFFSET commands.

Command Syntax: :FUNCtion<N> :ONLY < operand >

Where:

<N> ::= 1 oi2

operand >
::= {CHANnell | CHANnel2 | CHANnel3 | CHANnel4 | WMEMoryl
WMEMory2 | WMEMory3 | WMEMory4}

Example: OUTPUT 707;":FUNCTION2:ONLY WMEMORY4"

Function Subsystem HP 54501A

12-8 Programming
 RANGe

RANGe command/query

The :FUNCTION < N > :RANGE command defines the full scale vertical
axis of the selected function.

The RANGE query returns the current range setting for the specified
function.

Command Syntax: :FUNCtion<N>:RANQe < range >

Where:

<N> ;:= 1 or2

< range >
::= voltage value

Example: OUTPUT 707;":FUNCTION2:RANGE 400 MV"

Query Syntax: :FUNCtion<N>:RANGe?

Where:

<N> ::= 1 or2

Returned Format: [:FUNCtion<N>: RANGe] <range> <NL>

Where:

1
<N> ::= or2
< range > ::= current range setting (exponential -
NR3 format)

Example: DIM Rng$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":FUNCTION2:RANGE?"
ENTER 707; Rng$
PRINT Rng$

HP 54501A Function Subsystem

Programming 12-9
SUBTract

SUBTract command

The :FUNCTION < N > SUBTRACT command algebraically subtracts

operand 2 from operand 1.

Command Syntax: :FUNCtion<N>:SUBTract < operand

>,< operand >

Where:

1 or2
<N> ::=
<operand> ;:= {CHANnell | CHANnel2 | CHANnel3 | CHANneM | WMEMoryl |
WMEMory2 | WMEMory3 | WMEMory4}

Example: OUTPUT 707;":FUNCTION2:SUBTRACT WMEMORY3.WMEMORY2"

In this example Waveform Memory 2 would be algebraically subtracted

from Waveform Memory 3.

Function Subsystem HP 54501A

12-10 Programming
 VERSUS

VERSUS command

The :FUNCTION < N >: VERSUS command allows X vs Y displays with

two operands. The first operand defines the Y axis and the second defines
the X axis. The Y axis range and offset is initially equal to that of the first
operand and can be adjusted with the FUNCTION < N > :RANGE and
FUNCTION < N > :OFFSET commands.

The X axis range and offset is always equal to that of the second operand.
It can only be changed by changing the vertical settings of the second
operand. This will also change the Y axis vertical sensitivity and offset.

Command Syntax: :FUNCtion<N>: VERSUS <Y_operand>,<X_operand>

Where:

1 or 2
<N> ::=

<Y_operand> ::= {CHANneh | CHANnel2 | CHANnel3 | CHANnel4 [ WMEMory-l |

WMEMory2 | WMEMoryS | WMEMory4}

<X_operand> ::= {CHANnel-l | CHANnel2 | CHANnel3 | CHANnel4 | WMEMory-l |

WMEMory2 | WMEMory3 | WMEMory4}

Example: OUTPUT 707;":PUNCTION2:VERSUS CHAN1,CHAN2"

HP 54501A Function Subsystem

Programming 12-11
Hardcopy Subsystem 13
Introduction The HARDCOPY subsystem commands set various parameters for
printing waveforms from the HP 54501A. Everything on the display is
printed when the root level command PRINT is sent.

The portion of the waveform to be copied must be placed on the display.

To actually make the hardcopy print, refer to the root level command
:PRINT for the sequence of bus commands that actually get the data to
the printer.

Refer to figure 13-1 for the syntax diagram of the Hardcopy subsystem
commands.

V^

Figure 13-1. Hardcopy Subsystem Commands Syntax Diagram

HP 54501A Hardcopy Subsystem

Programming 13-1
LENGth

LENGth command/query

The :HARDCOPY:LENGTH command sets the length of the page to

either 11 inches or 12 inches.

The LENGTH query returns the current length setting.

Command Syntax: :HARDcopy:LENGth{n 112}

Example: OUTPUT 707;":HARDCOPY:LENGTH 12"

Query Syntax: :HARDcopy: LENGth?

Returned Format: [:HARDcopy:LENG»h] {11 112}<NL>

Example: OUTPUT 707;":HARDCOPY:LENGTH?"

ENTER 707; Lgth$
PRINT Lgth$

Hardcopy Subsystem HP 54501A

13-2 Programming
 PAGE

PAGE command/query

The :HARDCOPY:PAGE command sets the HP 54501A to send a

formfeed to the printer after a hardcopy output.

If the PAGE command is set to AUTomatic, a formfeed will occur at the

end of the hardcopy, otherwise the page will scroll up by 4 lines.

The PAGE query returns the current state of the page command.

Command Syntax: :HARDcopy:PAGE {MANual | AUTomatic}

Example: OUTPUT 707;":HARD:PAGE AUT"

Query Syntax: :HARDcopy:PAGE?

Returned Format: [:HARDcopy:PAGE] {MANual | AUTomatic} < NL>

Example: DIM pg$[30]

OUTPUT 707;":HARDCOPY:PAGE?"
ENTER 707; Pg$
PRINT Pg$

HP 54501A Hardcopy Subsystem

Programming 13-3
Measure Subsystem 14
Introduction The commands in the MEASURE subsystem are used to make
parametric measurements on displayed waveforms and to report the
settings of the voltage and time markers. Some commands in this
subsystem can be used to set the voltage and time markers to specified
voltages, times, or events.

Measurement To makea measurement, the portion of the waveform required for that

measurement must be displayed on the oscilloscope. That is:

Setup

• For a period or frequency measurement, at least one complete cycle

must be displayed.
• For a pulse width measurement, the entire pulse must be displayed.
• For a risetime measurement, the leading (positive-going) edge of the
waveform must be displayed;
• For a falltime measurement, the trailing (negative-going) edge of the
waveform must be displayed.

Note
When WINDOW is ON, measurements are ONLY applied to the
windowed portion of the waveform.

User-Defined When User-Defined Measurements are made, the defined parameters

must ^e set ^ore actually sending the measurement command or query.
MeaSLJ rementS

In User-Defined the mid threshold is the mid point between the upper
and lower threshold when the lower threshold value is less than the upper
threshold value.

HP 54501A Measure Subsystem

Programming 14-1
Measurement If a measurement cannot be made, typically because the proper portion of
the waveform is not displayed, the value returned for that parameter is
Error + 9.99999E + 37. This is an error value that is output when a

measurement cannot be made.

Making If more than one waveform, edge, or pulse is displayed, time

measurements are made on the first (left-most) portion of the displayed
Measurements
waveform that can be used. When any of the defined measurements are
requested, the oscilloscope first determines the top (100%) and base
(0%) voltages of the waveform.

From this information, it can determine the other important voltage values
(10% voltage, 90% voltage, and 50% voltage) for making the
measurements. The 10% and 90% voltage values are used in the risetime
and falltime measurements when standard measurements are selected.
The 50% voltage value is used for measuring frequency, period, pulse
width, and duty cycle with standard measurements selected..

The measurements can also be made using user defined parameters

instead of the standard measurement values.

When the command form of the front-panel measurements, preshoot, or

overshoot is used the instrument is placed into the continuous
measurement mode. When the query form of these measurements is used
continuous measurement mode is turned off, the measurement is made
one time and the measurement result is returned.

Voltage measurements are made using the entire display. Therefore, if

you want to make a measurement on a particular cycle, display only that
cycle on the display.

Measure Subsystem HP 54501A

14-2 Programming
 All voltage values are returned in volts. Returned voltage values are
measured with zero volts as the reference. The value returned for the
VDELTA? query is the difference between VMarker 1 and VMarker 2 in
volts.

All time values are returned in seconds. Returned time values are
measured with the trigger point (time 0) as the reference. The value
returned for TDELTA? is the time difference between the stop and start
markers.

Measurements are made on the displayed wavefonn(s) specified by the

SOURCE command. The SOURCE command allows two sources to be
specified. When two sources are specified, VMarker 1 is assigned to the
first specified source and VMarker 2 is assigned to the second specified
source. VDELTA is the only measurement that uses two sources.

Most measurements can only be made on a single source. If one of these

measurements is made with two sources specified, the measurement is
made on the first source specified.

More information about measurement algorithms can be found in

Appendix A.

If the horizontal scaling is questionable,

an "error 11" is placed in the error
queue. In this case the is
value returned the most accurate that can be
made using the current scaling. You might be able to obtain a more
accurate measurement by rescaling the horizontal to obtain more data
points on the edge.

Refer to figure 14-1 for the syntax diagram of the Measure subsystem
commands.

HP 54501A Measure Subsystem

Programming 14-3
 Figure 14-1 Measure Subsystem CommandsSyntax Diagram

Measure Subsystem HP 54501A

14-4 Programming
 ——»-(DUTycyc I
e\
——^DUTycycle?)-

slope—and—occurrence

sIooe-ond-occur rence

FALLtime

FALLt ime?

——^ FREOuency V

——»{FREOuency^)

Figure 14-1. Measure Subsystem Commands Syntax Diagram (continued)

HP 54501A Measure Subsystem

Programming 14-5
 —^MODE)—————

'—^('USER ")—————/

—-("MODE?.)—————

—»\W/lDth)————

—^^Nwioth'T)———

—»-(oVERshoo t')——

—»-(oVERshoot?^)—

——(PERiod)————

—»(PERiod7)————

—»^POSTfoi lure)-

'-»(I7o?)——/

—••(POSTfoi lure^}

•I spoce |————»/COARse)——————————————————————————————»•
—»^PRECision^)——I

—t^PRECision?^)-

—»{pREShoot)———

—-(PREShoot?)——

—»{pWIDTh)————

—»/PWIDthT)—————————————————————————————————— —

—»^RESults?)—————————————————————————————————————————————————————»•

—-{^RISelime?^——
5<501S26 ^

Figure 14-1. Measure Subsystem Commands Syntax Diagram (continued)

Measure Subsy stem HP 54501/

14-6 Programminc
 Figure 14-1. Measure Subsystem Commands Syntax Diagram (continued)

HP 54501 A Measure Subsystem

Programming 14-7
 —••(rvOLt?)——»^ space |—»-| tvolt-org ]—»^ '}—•^
, s I
opeondoccu r rence |————»•

——{UNITS')———fjspace |———r-»("PERCen tV-r—————————————————————————————-

^-^{'VOLTs')———/

—-CUNITS?)—————————————————————————————————————————————————————————

—^{'UPPer?')—————————————————————————————————————————————————————————»•

—»{'VAMP I i tude')——————————————————————————————————————————————————————»•

—»-{VAMPI i tude?^)—————————————————————————————————————————————————————»•

—•/VAVerage)————————————————————————————————————————————————————»•

—••(vAVerage?^)———————————————————————————————————————————————»

—»^VBASe')——————————————————————————————————————————————————————»•

—B^VBASe?)—————————————————————————————————————————————————————————»•

—»^VDELto7)————————————————————————————————————————————————————»•

—»^VFIFty )————————————————————————————————————————————————————————»•

*
54501S26

Figure 74-7. Measure Subsystem Commands Syntax Diagram (continued)

Measure Subs ystem HP 54501A

14-8 Programming
 VPP

——»-{vRELoti ve?V

Figure 14-1. Measure Subsystem Commands Syntax Diagram (continued)

HP 54501A Measure Subsystem

Programming 14-9
 channel_number =
An integer, 1,2,3, or 4.

edge_number =
An integer, 1 through 127.

func_num =
An integer, 1 or 2.

level =
MIDDle, UPPer, or LOWer.

lowerjimit =
Lower limit for compare.

lowlimit_value =
Lower threshold value in percent or volts.

measurement =
Name of measurement to be compared.

=
An integer, 1 or 2.
pmem_num

polarity = POSitive or NEGative

slope_and_occurrence =
An integer, -127 to 127 (excluding 0) specifying
a displayed edge.

tstart_arg =
Time in seconds from trigger.

tstop_arg =
Time in seconds from trigger.

tvolt_arg = A real number specifying voltage.

upperjimit =
Upper limit for compare.

upperlimit_value =
Upper threshold value in percent or volts.
=
An integer, 0 to 100.
vrel_arg

vstart_arg = A real number within voltage range.

vstop_arg = A real number within voltage range.

vtime_arg = A real number in the horizontal display window.

=
An integer, 1 through 4.
wmem_num

Figure 14-1. Measure Subsystem Commands Syntax Diagram (continued)

Measure Subsystem HP 54501A

14-10 Programming
 ALL

ALL query

The :MEASURE:ALL query makes a set of measurements on the

displayed signal and buffers the measurement results for output over the
HP-IB.

To make measurement, the portion of the waveform required for the

a

measurement must be displayed. Time measurements are made on the

first (left-most) displayed edges of the waveforms. To obtain the most
accurate measurement possible, use proper horizontal scaling.

Refer to the individual commands for information on how the

measurements are made and the returned format of the measurement
results.

Query Syntax: :MEASure:ALL?

Returned Format: [:MEASure:FREQuency] < result >;[PERiod] < result >;[PWlDth] < result >;[NWIDth]
< result >;[RISetime] < result >;[FALLtime] < result >;[VAMPIitude] < result >;[VPP]

< result >;[PREShoot] < result

>; [OVERshoot] < result >;[DUTycycle]
< result >;[VRMS] < result >;[VMAX] < result >;[VMIN] < result >;[VTOP]

< result >;[VBASe] < result >[VAVerage] < result

><NL>

Where:

< result >

::= individual measurement results (exponential -
NR3 format)

Example: DIM A$[500]

OUTPUT 707; ":MEASURE:ALL?"
ENTER 707;"A$"
PRINT A$

Note

These values can be returned to numeric variables instead of the

string variables as shown. If numeric variables are used, the
headers must be turned off.

HP 54501A Measure Subsystem

Programming 14-11
COMPare

COMPare command/query

The : MEASURE: COMPARE command specifies the measurement and

limits to be used for the measurement comparison (limit test). The first
limit is the upper limit, the second is the lower.

This command does not start the test, but only sets the test parameters.

The COMPARE query returns the current specification

Command Syntax: :MEASure:COMPare < measurement >, < upperjimit >, < lowerjimit >

Where:

< measurement > ::= {RISetime | FALLtime | FREOuency | PERiod | PWIDth |

NWlDth | VAMPIitude | VBASe | VTOP | VPP | VAVerage | VMAX | VMIN | VRMS |
DUTycycle | DELAY}

< upper limit > ::= High limit value.

<lower_limit> ;:= Low limit value.

Note

When setting the limits for Frequency the suffix "HZ" can be used.

Example: OUTPUT 707;":MEASURE:COMPARE RISETIME,90,10"

Measure Subsystem HP 54501A

14-12 Programming
 COMPare

Query Syntax: :MEASure:COMPare? < measurement >

Where:

< measurement > :;= {RISetime | FALLtime | FREQuency | PERiod | PWIDth |

NWIDth | VAMPIitude | VBASe | VTOP | VPP | VAVerage | VMAX | VMIN | VRMS |
DUTycycle | DELAY}

Returned Format: [:MEASure:COMPare] measurement >, <upperjmit>, <lower_limit> <NL>

<

Example: DIM Cmp$[50]

OUTPUT 707;"MEASure:COMPare? VPP"
ENTER 707; Cmp$
PRINT Cmp$

For example, the sequence required to do a limit test on frequency is:

OUTPUT 707;":MEASURE:FREO" !Select measurement

OUTPUT 707;":MEASURE:COMPARE FREO,1000HZ,10HZ" 'Set measurement limits
OUTPUT 707;":MEASURE:LlMITTEST MEASURE" "Start test

Note
The only way to see if a limit test failure has occurred over the
bus is by checking if bit 3 of the status byte is set to a 1.

HP 54501A Measure Subsystem

Programming 14-13
 query

The :MEASURE:CURSOR query returns the time and voltage values of

the specified marker as an ordered pair of time/voltage values.

When the CURSOR query is sent, no measurement is made and the

cursors are not moved.

If DELTA is specified:

the instrument returns the value of delta V and delta T.

If START is specified:

the positions of the start marker and VMarker 1 are returned.

If STOP is specified:

the positions of the stop marker and VMarker 2 are returned.

Query Syntax: :MEASure:CURsor? {DELTa I STARt | STOP}

Returned Format: [:MEASure:CURSoc] < time >,< voltage ><NL>

Where:

<time > :: =
delta time, start time or stop time
< voltage > :: = delta voltage, VMarker 1 voltage or VMarker 2 voltage

Example: OUTPUT 707;":MEAS:SOURCE CHAN1"

OUTPUT 707;":MEAS:CURSOR? START"
ENTER 707;Tme,Vlt
PRINT Tme.VIt

Measure Subsystem HP 54501A

14-14 Programming
 DEFine

DEFine command/query

The :MEASURE:DEFINE command sets up the definition for a

measurement.

The DEFINE query returns the current setup.

Command Syntax: :MEASure:DEFine < measurement_spec >

Where:

< measurement_spec > ::= {DELay <polarity>, <edge_num>, <level>,

{MIDDIe | UPPer | LOWer} | NWIDth
polarity
>, <edge_num>, level | PWIDth
< < >

{MIDDIe | UPPer | LOWer}}

Where:

<polarity> ::= {POSitive | NEGative}

<edge_num > :: =
an integer, -127 to 127 (excluding 0) specifying a displayed edge
< level >
::= {MIDDIe | UPPer | LOWer}

Example: OUTPUT 707;":MEAS:DEFINE DELAY,POS1TIVE,1,UPPER,NEGATIVE,2,MIDDLE"

This example will set the parameters for a time measurement from the
first positive edge at the upper threshold level to the second negative edge
at the middle threshold. If one source is specifed, both parameters apply
to that signal. If two sources are specified the measurement is from the
first positive edge on source 1 to the second negative edge on source 2.

HP 54501A Measure Subsystem

Programming 14-15
DEFine

Query Syntax: :MEASure:DEFine? {DELay | PWlDth | NWIDth}

Returned Format: [:MEASure:DEFine] <measurement_spec> <NL>

Where:

<
measurement_spec > ::= {DELay <polarity>, <edge_num>, <level>,
<polarity>, <edge_num>, <level> | PWlDth {MIDDIe | UPPer | LOWer} [ NWIDth
{MIDDIe | UPPer | LOWer}}

Where:

< polarity > ::= {POSitive | NEGative}

<edge_num > :: -127 to 127 (excluding 0) (integer
= -
NR1 format)
<level> ::= {MIDDIe | UPPer | LOWer}

Example: DIM Dfn$[ioo]

OUTPUT 707;":MEASure:DEFine? DELay"
ENTER 707; Dfn$
PRINT Dfn$

Measure Subsystem HP 54501A

14-16 Programming
 DELay

DELay command/query

The :MEASURE:DELAY command causes the instrument to determine

the delay from the first specified edge on one source to the next specified
edge on the same source, or to the first specified edge on another source.

One or two sources can be specified with the :MEASURE:SOURCE

command.

If user defined measurement specifications are selected, ensure the

defined measurement is displayed.

The DELAY query returns the specified delay value.

Command Syntax: :MEASure:DELay

Example: OUTPUT 707;":MEAS:DEL"

Query Syntax: :MEASure:DELay?

Returned Format: [:MEASure:DELay] <delay_value> <NL>

Where:

<delay_value > :: =
time value in seconds (exponential -
NR3 format)

Example: DIM Diy$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":MEAS:DELAY?"
ENTER 707; Dly$
PRINT Dly$

HP 54501A Measure Subsystem

Programming 14-17
DESTination

DESTination command/query

The :MEASURE:DESTINATION command specifies the destination to

be used when a comparison violation is found.

If a waveform memory is specified, the memory is overwritten each time a

violation is found.

The DESTINATION query returns the destination currently specified.

Note
If WMEMORIES are used as the destination, the source must be
set up separately using the WAVEFORM:SOURCE command.

Command Syntax: :MEASure:DESTination {WMEMory{1 | 2 | 3 | 4} | PMEMory{1 | 2} | OFF}

Example: OUTPUT 707;":MEAS:DEST PMEMORY2"

Query Syntax: :MEASure:DESTination?

Returned Format: [:MEASure:DESTination] {WMEMory{1 | 2 | 3 | 4} | PMEMory{1 | 2} | OFF}<NL>

Example: DIM Dst$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":MEAS:DEST?"
ENTER 707; Dst$
PRINT Dst$

Measure Subsystem HP 54501A

14-18 Programming
 DUTycycle

DUTycycle command/query

The :MEASURE:DUTYCYCLE command places the instrument in the

continuous measurement mode and starts the Dutycycle measurement.

The DUTYCYCLE query measures and outputs the duty cycle of the
signal specified by the SOURCE command. The signal must be displayed
for the measurement to be made. The value returned for duty cycle is the
ratio of the positive pulse width to period.

The positive pulse width and the period of the specified signal are
measured, then the duty cycle is calculated.

The duty cycle is calculated with the following formula:

duty cycle = + pulse width/period

Command Syntax: :MEASure:DUTycycle

Example: OUTPUT 707;":MEASURE:DUTYCYCLE"

Query Syntax: :MEASure:DUTycycle?

Returned Format: [MEASure:DUTycycle] < value >

<NL>

Where:

< value > :: =

ratio of +pulse width to period (exponential -
NR3 format)

Example: DIM Dc$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":MEASURE:DUTYCYCLE?"
ENTER 707; Dc$
PRINT Dc$

HP 54501A Measure Subsystem

Programming 14-19
ESTArt

ESTArt command/query

The :MEASURE:ESTART command causes the instrument to position

the start marker on the specified edge and slope of the displayed
waveform. All edges must be displayed and are counted from the left
edge of the display. The start marker is positioned where VMarker 1
intersects the waveform. The desired edge is specified by sending an
integer value after the command name. If a positive integer is sent, the
oscilloscope will place the start marker on a positive-going waveform
edge. If a negative integer is sent, the start marker will be placed on a
negative-going waveform edge. If VMarker 1 does not intersect the
waveform as specified, the error message "Edges required not found" is
displayed.

The ESTART query returns the currently specified edge.

Note

The short form of this command does not follow the defined
convention. The short form "EST" is the same for ESTART and
ESTOP, so be careful not to send this form for the ESTART
command. Sending "EST' will produce an error.

Command Syntax: :MEASure:ESTArt <edge>

Where:

<edge > :: =
-127 to 127 excluding 0 (if a positive value is sent the + sign may be
omitted or a space may be used)

Example: OUTPUT 707;":MEASURE:ESTART 2"

This example places the start marker at the second displayed

positive-going intersection of the waveform and VMarker 1.

Measure Subsystem HP 54501A

14-20 Programming
 ESTArt

Query Syntax: :MEASure:ESTAn?

Returned Format: [:MEASure:ESTArt] <edge> <NL>

Where:

<edge> :: =
edge number (integer - NR1 format)

Example: OUTPUT 707;";MEAS: ESTART?"

ENTER 707; Estart
PRINT Estart

HP 54501A Measure Subsystem

Programming 14-21
ESTOp

ESTOp command/query

The :MEASURE:ESTOP command causes the instrument to position the

stop marker on the specified edge and slope of the displayed waveform.
All edges must be displayed and are counted from the left edge of the
display. The stop marker is positioned where VMarker 2 intersects the
waveform. The desired edge is specified by sending an integer value after
the command name. If a positive integer is sent, the oscilloscope places
the stop marker on a positive-going waveform edge. If a negative integer
is sent, the stop marker is placed on a negative-going waveform edge.

If VMarker 2does not intersect the waveform as specified, the error

message "Edges required not found" is displayed.

The ESTOP query returns the currently specified edge.

Note
The short form of this command does not follow the defined
convention. The short form "EST' is the same for ESTART and
ESTOP, so be careful not to send this form for the ESTOP
command. Sending "EST' will produce an error.

Command Syntax: :MEASure:ESTOp <edge>

Where:

<edge > :: =
-127 to 127 excluding 0 (if a positive value is sent the + sign may be
omitted or a space may be used)

Example: OUTPUT 707;°:MEAS:ESTOP -2"

This example places the stop marker at the second displayed

negative-going intersection of the waveform at VMarker 2.

Measure Subsystem HP 54501A

14-22 Programming
 ESTOp

Query Syntax: :MEASure:ESTOp?

Returned Format: [:MEASure:ESTOp] <edge> <NL>

Where:

<edge> ::= edge number (integer- NR1 format)

Example: OUTPUT 707;°:MEASURE:ESTOP?"

ENTER 707; Estop
PRINT Estop

HP 54501A Measure Subsystem

Programming 14-23
FALLtime

FALLtime command/query

The :MEASURE:FALLTIME command places the instrument in the

continuous measurement mode and starts a Falltime measurement.

The FALLTIME query measures and outputs the fall time of the first
displayed falling (negative-going) edge. For best measurement accuracy
set the sweep speed as fast as possible while leaving the falling edge of the
waveform on the display. The falltime is determined by measuring the
time at the upper threshold of the falling edge then measuring the time at
the lower threshold of the falling edge and calculating the falltime with the
formula:

fall time =
time at lower threshold point -
time at upper threshold point

If the horizontal scaling is questionable when this measurement is made

and "error 11" is placed in the error queue.

Command Syntax: :MEASure:FALLtime

Example: OUTPUT 707;":MEAS:FALL"

Query Syntax: :MEASure:FALLtime?

Returned Format: [:MEASure:FALLtime] <valuexNL>

Where:

< value > :: time in seconds between lower threshold and upper threshold voltage
=

points (exponential NR3 format)

-

Example: DIM Rl$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":MEASURE:FALLTIME?"
ENTER 707; Rl$
PRINT Fll$

Measure Subsystem HP 54501A

14-24 Programming
 FREQuency

FREQuency command/query

The :MEASURE:FREQUENCY command places the instrument in the

continuous measurement mode and starts a Frequency measurement.

The FREQUENCY query measures and outputs the frequency of the first
complete cycle on screen using the 50% levels when Standard
measurements are selected and the mid threshold value when User
Defined measurements are selected.

The algorithm is:

if first edge on screen is rising

then
frequency = l/(time at second rising edge
•
time at First rising edge)
else
frequency = l/(time at second falling edge
•
time at first falling edge)

Command Syntax: :MEASure:FREQuency

Example: OUTPUT 707;":MEASURE:FREO"

Query Syntax: : MEASURE: FREQuency?

Returned Format: [:MEASure:FREQuency] < value >

<NL>

Where:

< value > :: =

frequency in Hertz (exponential -
NR3 format)

Example: DIM Frq$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":MEASURE:FREQUENCY?"
ENTER 707; Frq$
PRINT Frq$

HP 54501A Measure Subsystem

Programming 14-25
LIMittest

LIMittest command

The :MEASURE:LIMITTEST command allows a limit test to be

performed. If LIMITTEST is sent with the MEASURE parameter, then

the instrument starts the test. If the OFF parameter is sent, the test is
stopped.

The LTF (limit test failure) bit of the status byte will be set when a failure
is found.

Command Syntax: :MEASure:LIMittest {MEASure I OFF}

Example: OUTPUT 707;":MEAS:LIM MEAS"

Measure Subsystem HP 54501A

14-26 Programming
 LOWer

LOWer command/query

The :MEASURE:LOWER command sets the lower measurement

threshold. This command sends the value to the instrument. The value
that is sent will be in the units selected with the UNITS command.

Note

The measure UNITS should be set prior to sending this value.

The LOWER query returns the current setting of the lower measurement
threshold.

Command Syntax: :MEASure:LOWer <lowlimil_value>

Where:

< lowlimit_value > :: =

user defined lower threshold in percent or volts

Example: OUTPUT 707;":MEASURE:LOWER 47"

Query Syntax: :MEASure:LOWer?

Returned Format: [:MEASure:LOWer] <lowlimit_valuexNL>

Where:

< lowlimit_value > :: =

user defined lower threshold in percent or volts

Example: DIM Lwr$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":MEAS:LOW?"
ENTER 707; Lwr$
PRINT Lwr$

HP 54501A Measure Subsystem

Programming 14-27
MODE

MODE command/query

The :MEASURE:MODE command sets the measurement mode

(definitions and thresholds).

The MODE query returns the current mode setting.

Command Syntax: :MEASure:MODE {STANdard I USER}

Example: OUTPUT 707;":MEAS:MODE STAN"

Query Syntax: :MEASure:MODE?

Returned Format: [:MEASure:MODE] {STANdard I USER}<NL>

Example: DIM Md$[so]

OUTPUT 707;":MEASURE:MODE?"
ENTER 707; Md$
PRINT Md$

Measure Subsystem HP 54501A

14-28 Programming
 NWIDth

NWIDth command/query

The :MEASURE:NWIDTH command places the instrument in the

continuous measurement mode and starts a NWIDTH measurement.

The NWIDTH query measures and outputs the width of the first negative
pulse on screen using the 50% levels with Standard measurements
selected.

If User Defined measurements are selected, then the measurement is

made at the mid threshold value.

The algorithm is:

if the first edge on screen is rising

then
width =
(time at second rising edge
•
time at First falling edge)
else
width = (time at First rising edge
-
time at first falling edge)

Command Syntax: :MEASure:NWiDth

Example: OUTPUT 707;":MEAS:NW1DTH"

Query Syntax: :MEASure:NWiDth?

Returned Format: [:MEASure:NWiDth] < value > <NL>

Where:

< value > :: =

negative pulse width in seconds (exponential -
NR3 format)

Example: DIM Nwd$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":MEASURE:NWIDTH?"
ENTER 707;Nwd$
PRINT Nwd$

HP 54501A Measure Subsystem

Programming 14-29
OVERshoot

OVERshoot command/query

The :MEASURE:OVERSHOOT command places the instrument in the

continuous measurement mode and selects the Overshoot measurement.

The OVERSHOOT query measures and outputs the overshoot of a

selected signal. Overshoot measures the first edge on screen with the
following algorithm:

if the first edge on screen is rising

then
overshoot =
(Vmax Vtop)/VampIitude
-

else
overshoot = (Vbase •
Vmin)/Vamplitude

Command Syntax: :MEASure:ovERshoot

Example: OUTPUT 707;";MEAS:OVER"

Query Syntax: :MEASure:ovERshoot?

Returned Format: [:MEASure:ovERshoot] <value> <NL>

Where:

< value > :: = ratio of overshoot to Vamplitude (exponential - NR3 format)

Example: DIM Ow$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":MEASURE:OVERSHOOT?"
ENTER 707;0vr$
PRINT Ovr$

Measure Subsystem HP 54501A

14-30 Programming
 PERiod

PERiod command/query

The :MEASURE:PERIOD command places the instrument in the

continuous measurement mode and selects the Period measurement.

The PERIOD query measures and outputs the period of the first
complete cycle on screen. The period is measured at the 50% point when
Standard measurements are selected and at the mid threshold voltage
level of the waveform when User-Defined measurements are selected.

The algorithm for this measurement is:

if the first edge on screen is rising

then
period = (time at second rising edge
-
time at first rising edge)
else
period = (time at second falling edge
-
time at first falling edge)

Command Syntax: :MEASure:PERiod

Example: OUTPUT 707;°:MEAS:PERIOD"

Query Syntax: :MEASure:PERiod?

Returned Format: [:MEASure:PERiod] <valuexNL>

Where:

< value > :: =

waveform period in seconds (exponential -
NR3 format)

Example: DIM prd$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":MEASURE:PERIOD?"
ENTER 707;Prd$
PRINT Prd$

HP 54501A Measure Subsystem

Programming 14-31
POSTfailure

POSTfailure command/query

The :MEASURE:POSTFAILURE command specifies what will occur

after a violation has been found by the limit test. If CONTINUE is
selected, the instrument will continue to look for another violation. If
STOP is selected the instrument will stop the limit test.

If CONTINUE is selected and a violation is found the violation will be

written to the desired location. If a waveform memory is selected as the
destination then all subsequent violations will overwrite the previous
violation.

The POSTFAILURE query returns the current selection.

Command Syntax: :MEASure:POSTfailure {CONTinue | STOP}

Example: OUTPUT 707;":MEAS: POST"

Query Syntax: :MEASure:POSTfailure?

Returned Format: l:MEASure:POST<ailure] {CONTinue | STOP}<NL>

Example: DIM pf$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":MEASURE: POSTFAILURE?"
ENTER 707; Pf$
PRINT Pf$

Measure Subsystem HP 54501A

14-32 Programming
 PRECision

PRECision command/query

The :MEASURE:PRECISION command is included in the HP 54501A

for compatibility with other HP instruments. It has no effect on the
HP 54501A.

The PRECISION query always returns COARSE in the HP 54501A.

Command Syntax: :MEASure:PRECision COARse

Example: OUTPUT 707;":MEAS:PREC COARSE"

Query Syntax: :MEASure:PRECision?

Returned Format: [:MEASure:PRECision] COARse < NL>

Example: DIM Pc$[50]

OUTPUT 707;": MEAS: PRECISION?"
ENTER 707; Pc$
PRINT Pc$

HP 54501A Measure Subsystem

Programming 14-33
PREShoot

PREShoot command/query

The :MEASURE:PRESHOOT command places the instrument in the

continuous measurement mode and starts the Preshoot measurement.

The PRESHOOT query measures and outputs the preshoot of the

selected signal. Preshoot measures the first edge on screen with the
following algorithm:

if the first edge on screen is rising

then
preshoot =
(Vbase Vmin)/Vamplitude
•

else
preshoot =
(Vmax Vtop)/Vamplitude
•

Command Syntax: :MEASure:pREShoot

Example: OUTPUT 707;":MEASURE:PRES"

Query Syntax: :MEASure:pREShoot?

Returned Format: [:MEASure:pREShoot] < value >

<NL>

Where:

< value > :: =

ratio of preshoot to Vamplitude (exponential • NR3 format)

Example: DIM Prs$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":MEASURE:PRESHOOT?"
ENTER 707;Prs$
PRINT Prs$

Measure Subsystem HP 54501A

14-34 Programming
 PWIDth

PWIDth command/query

The :MEASURE:PWIDTH command places the instrument in the

continuous measurement mode and starts the Pwidth measurement.

The PWIDTH query measures and outputs the width of the first displayed
positive pulse. Pulse width is measured at the 50% voltage level with
Standard measurements selected and at the mid level threshold value with
User-Defined measurements selected. The algorithm for this
measurement is:

if the first edge on screen is falling

then
width =
(time at second falling edge
-
time at first rising edge)
else
width = (time at first falling edge
-
time at First rising edge)

Command Syntax: :MEASure:PWIDth

Example: OUTPUT 707;": MEAS: PWIDTH"

Query Syntax: :MEASure:PWIDth?

Returned Format: [:MEASure:PWIDth] <valuexNL>

Where:

< value > :: = width of positive pulse in seconds (exponential -

NR3 format)

Example: DIM Pwd$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":MEASURE: PWIDTH?"
ENTER 707; Pwd$
PRINT Pwd$

HP 54501A Measure Subsystem

Programming 14-35
RESults

RESults query

The :MEASURE:RESULTS query tells the instrument to return the

currently active measurements. If statistics are on the current, minimum^
maximum, and average will be returned for each measurement. If the
limit test is on and POSTFAILURE is set to CONTINUED then the pass
ratio will be returned instead of the average.

If the number of measurements returned is 0 then no < measurement > s

are returned.

Query Syntax: :MEASure:RESuits?

Returned Format: [:MEASure:RESuits] <No.of Meas>[;< measurement >]...< NL>

Where:

< No. of Meas > ::

=
number of measurements displayed on the CRT, 0 through 8.
(integer NR1 format)
-

< measurement >

::= measurement_name measurement_result.

Example: DIM Mr$[ioo]

OUTPUT 707;":MEASURE:RESULTS?"
ENTER 707; Mr$
PRINT Mr$

Measure Subsystem HP 54501A

14-36 Programming
 RISetime

RISetime command/query

The :MEASURE:RISETIME command places the instrument in the

continuous measurement mode and starts a Risetime measurement.

The RISETIME query measures and outputs the rise time of the first
displayed rising (positive-going) edge. For best measurement accuracy
set the sweep speed as fast as possible while leaving the leading edge of
the waveform on the display. The rise time is determined by measuring
the time at the lower threshold of the rising edge then the time at the
upper threshold of the rising edge and calculating the rise time with the
formula:

rise time =
(time at upper threshold point -
time at lower threshold
point)

If thehorizontal scaling is questionable when this measurement is made

an "error 11" is placed in the error queue.

Command Syntax: :MEASure:RISetime

Example: OUTPUT 707;":MEAS:RIS"

Query Syntax: :MEASure:RISetime?

Returned Format: [:MEASure:RISetime] <valuexNL>

Where:

< value > :: =

rise time in seconds (exponential -
NR3 format)

Example: DIM Rs$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":MEAS:RIS?"
ENTER 707; Rs$
PRINT Rs$

HP 54501A Measure Subsystem

Programming 14-37
SCRatch

SCRatch command

The :MEASURE:SCRATCH command clears the measurement results

from the oscilloscope display.

Command Syntax: :MEASure:scRatch

Example: OUTPUT 707;":MEASURE:SCRATCH"

Measure Subsystem HP 54501A

14-38 Programming
 SOURce

SOURce command/query

The :MEASURE:SOURCE command selects the source(s) for the

measurements. The source specified will become the source for the
Measure subsystem commands.

Two sources can be specified with this command. All measurements

except DELAY are made on the first specified source. The DELAY
measurement will use two sources if two have been specified. If only one
source is specified the DELAY measurement will use that source for both
of its parameters.

The SOURCE query returns the current source selection. If the specified
sources are different both will be returned, otherwise one source will be
returned.

Command Syntax: :MEASure:SOURce <source1 >[,<source2>]

Where:

<source1 > and <source2> ::= {CHANnel{1 [ 2 | 3 | 4} | FUNCtion{1 | 2}

WMEMory{1 | 2 | 3 | 4}}

Example: OUTPUT 707;":MEASURE:SOURCE CHANNEL1, WMEMORY1"

Query Syntax: :MEASure:SOURce?

Returned Format: [:MEASure:SOURce] <source1 >[,<source2>]<NL>

Where:

<souree1 > and <source2> ::= {CHANnel{1 | 2 | 3 | 4} | FUNCtion{1 | 2}

WMEMory{1 | 2 | 3 | 4}}

Example: DIM Src$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":MEAS:SOUR?"
ENTER 707;Src$
PRINT Src$

HP 54501A Measure Subsystem

Programming 14-39
STATistics

STATistics command/query

The :MEASURE:STATISTICS command allows the statistics mode to be

controlled. When this mode is on, and the measurements are in the
continuous mode, the min, max, avg, and current measurement will be
shown as the active measurements. If a RESULTS query is executed, all
of the displayed data will be returned to the controller.

The STATISTICS query returns the current mode.

Note
"Average" will be replaced by "pass ratio" when limit test is
selected and "after failure" is set to continue. Pass ratio lists the
percentage of times a certain test passed.

Command Syntax: :MEASure:STATistics {{ON | 1} |{OFF | 0}}

Example: OUTPUT 707;":MEASURE:STAT ON"

Query Syntax: :MEASure:STATistics?

Returned Format: [:MEASure:STATistics] {1 | 0}<NL>

Example: DIM Stt$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":MEASURE:STAT?"
ENTER 707;Stt$
PRINT Stt$

Measure Subsystem HP 54501A

14-40 Programming
 TDELta

TDELta query

The :MEASURE:TDELTA query returns the time difference between

the start and stop time markers, that is:

Tdelta =
Tstop Tstart
•

where Tstart is the time at the start marker and Tstop is the time at the
stop marker

Query Syntax: :MEASure:TDELta?

Returned Format: [:MEASure:TDELta] < value > <NL>

Where:

< value > :: =

difference between start and stop markers (exponential -
NR3 format)

Example: DIM Tdi$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":MEASURE:TDELTA?"
ENTER 707;Tdl$
PRINT Tdl$

HP 54501A Measure Subsystem

Programming 14-41
TMAX

TMAX query

The :MEASURE:TMAX query returns the time at which the first

maximum voltage occurred.

Query Syntax: :MEASure:TMAX?

Returned Format: [:MEASure:TMAX] <time at max voltage > < NL>

Example: DIM Tmx$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":MEASURE:TMAX?"
ENTER 707;Tmx$
PRINT Tmx$

Measure Subsystem HP 54501A

14-42 Programming
 TMIN

TMIN query

The :MEASURE:TMIN query returns the time at which the first

minimum voltage occurred.

Query Syntax: ;MEASure:TMiN?

Returned Format: [:MEASure:TMIN] <time at min voltage> < NL>

Example: DIM Tmn$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":MEAS:TMIN?"
ENTER 707;Tmn$
PRINT Tmn$

HP 54501A Measure Subsystem

Programming 14-43
TSTArt

TSTArt command/query

The :MEASURE:TSTART command moves the start marker to the

specified time with respect to the trigger time.

The TSTART query returns the time at the start marker.

Note

The short form of this command does not follow the defined
convention. The short form "TST'is the same for TSTART and
TSTOP, so be careful not to send this form for the TSTART
command. Sending "TST' will produce an error.

Command Syntax: :MEASure:TSTArt < start marker time >

Where:

< start marker time > :: =

time at start marker in seconds (exponential - NR3 format)

Example: OUTPUT 707;":MEASURE:TSTART 30 NS"

Query Syntax: :MEASure:TSTArt?

Returned Format: [:MEASure:TSTArt] <valuexNL>

Where:

< value > :: =

time at start marker in second (exponential -
NR3 format)

Example: DIM Tst$

OUTPUT 707;":MEASURE:TSTART?"
ENTER 707;Tst$
PRINT Tst$

Measure Subsystem HP 54501A

14-44 Programming
 TSTOp

TSTOp command/query

The :MEASURE:TSTOP command moves the stop marker to the

specified time with respect to the trigger time.

The TSTOP query returns the time at the stop marker.

Note

The short form of this command does not follow the defined
convention. The short form "TST is the same for TSTART and
TSTOP, so be careful not to send this form for the TSTOP
command. Sending "TST' will produce an error.

Command Syntax: :MEASure:TSTOp < stop marker time >

Where:

< stop marker time > :: =

time at stop marker in seconds

Example: OUTPUT 707;":MEAS:TSTOP 40 NS"

Query Syntax: :MEASure:TSTOp?

Returned Format: [:MEASure:TSTOp] <vaiue> <NL>

Where:

< value > :: =

time at stop marker in seconds (exponential -
NR3 format)

Example: DIM Tst$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":MEASURE:TSTOP?"
ENTER 707;Tst$
PRINT Tst$

HP 54501A Measure Subsystem

Programming 14-45
TVOLt

TVOLt query

When the :MEASURE:TVOLT query is sent, the displayed signal is

searched for the defined voltage level and transition. The time interval
between the trigger event and this defined occurrence is returned as the
response to this query.

The < voltage > can be specified as a negative or positive voltage. To

specify a negative voltage, use a minus (-) sign. The sign of < slope >
selects a rising (+ ) or falling (-) edge.

The magnitude of < occurrence > defines the occurrence to be reported.

For example, + 3 will return the time for the third time the waveform
crosses the specified voltage level in the positive direction. Once this
voltage crossing is found, the oscilloscope will output the time at that
crossing in seconds, with the trigger point (time zero) as the reference.

If the specified crossing cannot be found, the oscilloscope outputs

+ 9.99999E + 37. This will happen if the waveform does not cross the
specified voltage, or if the waveform does not cross the specified voltage
for the specified number of times in the specified direction.

Query Syntax: :MEASure:TvOLr? < voltage >,

< slope
>< occurrence >

Where:

< voltage > :: voltage level the waveform must cross. This can be
= a positive or
negative voltage.

< slope > :: =

direction of waveform when < voltage > is crossed rising (sp or +) or
falling (-)

< occurrence > :: number of crossing to be reported (if one

= -
first crossing reported,
if two second crossing is reported, etc.)
-

Measure Subsystem HP 54501A

14-46 Programming
 TVOLt

Returned Format: [:MEASure:TVOLt] <time> <NL>

Where:

<time > :: =
time in seconds of specified voltage crossing (exponential -
NR3 format)

Example: DIM Tvit$[50]

OUTPUT 707;"MEASURE:TVOLT? -.250,+3"
ENTER 707;Tvlt$
PRINT Tvlt$

HP 54501A Measure Subsystem

Programming 14-47
UNITS

UNITS command/query

The :MEASURE:UNITS command sets the measurement threshold units

when the user defmed measurement mode is selected. The UNITS can be
set to PERCENT or VOLTS.

The UNITS query returns the currently selected units.

Command Syntax: :MEASure: UNITS {pERCent | VOLTS}

Example: OUTPUT 707; ":MEASURE: UNITS PERCENT"

Query Syntax: :MEASure:UNiTs?

Returned Format: [:MEASure:UNiTs] {PERCent I VOLTs} < NL>

Example: DIM um$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":MEASURE: UNITS?"
ENTER 707; Unt$
PRINT Unt$

Measure Subsystem HP 54501A

14-48 Programming
 UPPer

UPPer command/query

The :MEASURE:UPPER command sets the upper measurement

threshold.

Note

Tlie measure UNITS should be set prior to sending this value.

The UPPER query returns the value of the upper measurement threshold.

Command Syntax: :MEASure:UPPer < value >

Where:

< value > :: =

upper threshold value in percent or volts

Example: OUTPUT 707;":MEAS:UPPER 90"

Query Syntax: :MEASure:UPPer?

Returned Format: [:MEASure:UPPer] < upperjhreshold value > < NL>

Where:

< upperjhreshold value > :: =

upper threshold value in percent or volts (exponential -

NR3 format)

Example: DIM upp$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":MEAS:UPP?"
ENTER 707; Upp$
PRINT Upp$

HP 54501A Measure Subsystem

Programming 14-49
VAMPIitude

VAMPIitude command/query

The :MEASURE:VAMPUTUDE command places the instrument in the

continuous measurement mode and starts a Vamplitude measurement.

The VAMPLITUDE query returns the difference between the top and
base voltage of the displayed signal. The VAMPLITUDE value will not
normally be the same as the Vp-p value if the input signal is a pulse.

The Vamplitude value is calculated with the formula:

Vamplitude =
Vtop Vbase
-

Command Syntax: :MEASure:VAMPIitude

Example: OUTPUT 707;°:MEAS:VAMP"

Query Syntax: :MEASure:VAMPIitude?

Returned Format: [:MEASure:VAMPIitude] <value> <NL>

Where:

< value > :: =

difference between top and base voltages (exponential -
NR3 format)

Example: DIM vmp$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":MEASURE:VAMPLITUDE?"
ENTER 707;Vmp$
PRINT Vmp$

Measure Subsystem HP 54501A

14-50 Programming
 VAVerage

VAVerage command/query

The MEASURE: VAVERAGE command places the instrument in the

continuous measurement mode and starts a Vaverage measurement.

The VAVERAGE query calculates the average voltage over the

waveform or the displayed data points.

Command Syntax: :MEASure:VAVerage

Example: OUTPUT 707;": MEAS:VAV

Query Syntax: :MEASure:VAVerage?

Returned Format: [:MEASure:VAVerage] <avg_value> <NL>

Where:

<avg_value > :: =
calculated average voltage (exponential -
NR3 format)

Example: DIM vv$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":MEAS:VAV?"
ENTER 707;W$
PRINT Vv$

HP 54501A Measure Subsystem

Programming 14-51
VBASe

VBASe command/query

The :MEASURE: VBASE command places the instrument in the

continuous measurement mode and starts a Vbase measurement.

The VBASE query measures and outputs the voltage value at the base of
the waveform. The base voltage of a pulse is normally not the same as the
TninimHm value.

Command Syntax: :MEASure:VBASe

Example: OUTPUT 707;":MEAS:VBASE"

Query Syntax: :MEASure:VBASe?

Returned Format: [:MEASure:VBASe] <valuexNL>

Where:

< value > :: = voltage at base of selected waveform (exponential - NR3 format)

Example: DIM vbs$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":MEASURE:VBASE?"
ENTER 707;Vbs$
PRINT Vbs$

Measure Subsystem HP 54501A

14-52 Programming
 VDELta

VDELta query

The :MEASURE: VDELTA query outputs the voltage difference between

VMarker 1 and VMarker 2. No measurement is made when the
VDELTA query is received by the oscilloscope. The delta voltage value
that is output is the current value. This is the same value as the front
panel delta V.

VDELTA =
Voltage at VMarker 2 - Voltage at VMarker 1

Query Syntax: :MEASure:VDELta?

Returned Format: [:MEASure:VDELta] < value > <NL>

Where:

< value > :: =

delta V value in volts (exponential -
NR3 format)

Example: DIM Vdi$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":MEAS:VDELTA?"
ENTER 707;Vdl$
PRINT vdl$

HP 54501A Measure Subsystem

Programming 14-53
VFIFty

VFIFty command

The :MEASURE: VFIFTY command instructs the oscilloscope to find the

top and base values of the specified waveforms, then places the voltage
markers at the 50% voltage point on the specified source(s).

If only one source has been specified with the source command, the
VFIFty command sets both voltage markers (VMarker 1 and VMarker 2)
to the 50% voltage level on that source.

If twosources are specified with the source command, VMarker 1 is set to

the 50% level of the first specified source and VMarker 2 is set to the 50%
level of the second specified source.

There is no query form of this command.

Command Syntax: :MEASure:VRFty

Example: OUTPUT 707;":MEASURE:VFIFTY"

Measure Subsystem HP 54501A

14-54 Programming
 VMAX

VMAX command/query

The :MEASURE:VMAX command places the instrument in the

continuous measurement mode and starts a Vmax measurement.

The VMAX query measures and outputs the absolute maximum voltage
present on the selected waveform.

Command Syntax: :MEASure:VMAX

Example: OUTPUT 707; ":MEAS: VMAX"

Query Syntax: :MEASure:VMAX?

Returned Format: [:MEASure:VMAX] < value > < NL>

Where:

< value > :: =

maximum voltage of selected waveform (exponential - NR3 format)

Example: DIM Vmx$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":MEASURE:VMAX?"
ENTER 707;Vmx$
PRINT Vmx$

HP 54501A Measure Subsystem

Programming 14-55
VMIN

VMIN command/query

The :MEASURE:VMIN command places the instrument in the

continuous measurement mode and starts a VMIN measurement.

The VMIN query measures and outputs the absolute minimym voltage
present on the selected waveform.

Command Syntax: :MEASure:VMlN

Example: OUTPUT 707;":MEAS:VMIN"

Query Syntax: :MEASure:VMlN?

Returned Format: [:MEASure:VMlN] <valuexNL>

Where:

< value > ::

=
minimum voltage value of the selected waveform
(exponential -
NR3 format)

Example: DIM Vmn$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":MEASURE:VMIN?"
ENTER 707;Vmn$
PRINT Vmn$

Measure Subsystem HP 54501A

14-56 Programming
 VPP

VPP command/query

The MEASURE: VPP command places the instrument in the continuous

measurement mode and starts a VPP measurement.

The VPP query measures the maximum and minimum voltages for the
selected source, then calculates the peak-to-peak voltage and outputs that
value. The peak-to-peak voltage (Vpp) is calculated with the formula:

Vpp =
Vmax Vmin -

where Vmax and Vmin are the maximum and minimum voltages present
on the selected source.

Command Syntax: :MEASure:vpp

Example: OUTPUT 707;":MEAS:vpp"

Query Syntax: :MEASure:vpp?

Returned Format: [:MEASure:vpp] <vaiue> <NL>

Where:

< value > :: =

voltage peak to peak (exponential - NR3 format)

Example: DIM Vp$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":MEAS:VPP?"
ENTER 707;Vp$
PRINT Vp$

HP 54501A Measure Subsystem

Programming 14-57
VRELative

VRELative command/query

The :MEASURE: VRELATIVE command moves the voltage markers to

the specified percentage points of their last established position. The last
established position is not necessarily on the currently displayed waveform.

For example, after a :MEAS:VAMPLITUDE? query has been sent

VMarker 1 is located at the base (0%) of the signal and VMarker 2 is at
the top (100%) of the signal. If the VRELATIVE 10 command was
executed, VMarker 1 is moved to the 10% level and VMarker 2 to the
90% level of the signal.

Any value between 0% and 100% can be used. If VRELATIVE 0 is sent

the markers are not moved, because the command indicates 0%
movement from the current position.

As an example, when the following values are sent the markers are moved
to the following percentage values of their current position.

10 moves VMarker 10% and

1 to VMarker 2 to 90%
20 moves VMarker 20% and
1 to VMarker 2 to 80%
50 moves both markers to 50%
80 moves VMarker 1 to 20% and VMarker 2 to 80%
90 moves VMarker 1 to 10% and VMarker 2 to 90%

The starting position of the markers must be known for this command to
be meaningful. The markers can be set to a known position on the
selected waveform using the :MEAS:VAMPLITUDE? query.

The VRELATIVE query returns the current relative position of

VMarker2 which is always in the range50% through 90%.

Note
The VRELATIVE command does not affect the upper and
lower thresholds selected by the UPPER and LOWER
commands.

Measure Subsystem HP 54501A

14-58 Programming
 VRELative

Command Syntax: :MEASure:VRELative < percent >

Where:

< percent > ::= {0 through 100}

Example: OUTPUT 707;":MEASURE:VRELATlVE 20"

Query Syntax: :MEASure:VRELative?

Returned Format: [:MEASure:VRELative] < value > < NL>

Where:

< value > :: =

Vmarker 2 relative position in percent {50 through 100} (integer - NR1
format)

Example: DIM Vri$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":MEAS:VREL?-
ENTER 707;Vrl$
PRINT Vrl$

HP 54501A Measure Subsystem

Programming 14-59
VRMS

VRMS command/query

The :MEASURE:VRMS command places the instrument in the

continuous measurement mode and starts a Vrms measurement.

The VRMS query measures and outputs the RMS voltage of the selected
waveform. The RMS voltage is computed using the data available on the
display.

Note
This RMS measurement is an AC RMS measurement. This
means that the average value of the waveform is subtracted from
each data point before RMS is computed.

Command Syntax: :MEASure:VRMS

Example: OUTPUT 707;":MEAS:VRMS"

Query Syntax: :MEASure:VRMS?

Returned Format: [:MEASure:VRMS] < value >

<NL>

Where:

< value > :: =

rms voltage of displayed points (exponential -
NR3 format)

Example: DIM Vrm$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":MEASURE:VRMS?"
ENTER 707;Vrm$
PRINT Vrm$

Measure Subsystem HP 54501A

14-60 Programming
 VSTArt

VSTArt command/query

The :MEASURE: VSTART command moves VMarker 1 to the specified

voltage. The values are limited to the currently defined channel, function,
or memory range.

The VSTART query returns the current voltage level of VMarker 1.

Note

The short form of this command does not follow the defined
convention. The short form "VST is the same for VSTART and
VSTOP, so be careful not to send this form for the VSTART
command. Sending "VST" will produce an error.

Command Syntax: :MEASure:VSTArt < voltage >

Example: OUTPUT 707;":MEAS:VSTA -10MV"

Where:

< voltage > :: =

voltage value for Vmarker 1

Query Syntax: :MEASure:VSTArt?

Returned Format: [:MEASure:VSTArt] < value >

<NL>

Where:

<value> :: =
voltage at VMarker 1 (exponential -
NR3 format)

Example: DIM vst$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":MEASURE:VSTART?"
ENTER 707; Vst$
PRINT Vst$

HP 54501A Measure Subsystem

Programming 14-61
VSTOp

VSTOp command/query

The MEASURE: VSTOP command moves VMarker 2 to the specified

voltage.

The VSTOP query returns the current voltage level of VMarker 2.

Note
The short form of this command does not follow the defined
convention. The short form "VST" is the same for VSTARTand
VSTOP, so be careful not to send this form for the VSTOP
command. Sending "VST' will produce an error.

Command Syntax: :MEASure:VSTOp < voltage >

Where:

< voltage > :: = voltage value for Vmarker 2

Example: OUTPUT 707;":MEAS:VSTO -IOOMV

Query Syntax: :MEASure:VSTOp?

Returned Format: [:MEASure:VSTOp] < value >

<NL>

Where:

< value > :: =

voltage at VMarker 2 (exponential -
NR3 format)

Example: DIM vst$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":MEASURE:VSTOP?"
ENTER 707;Vst$
PRINT Vst$

Measure Subsystem HP 54501A

14-62 Programming
 VTIMe

VTIMe query

The :MEASURE: VTIME query returns the voltage at a specified time.

The time is referenced to the trigger event and must be on screen.

Query Syntax: :MEASure:vTIMe? <time>

Where:

<tinne > :: = displayed time from trigger in seconds

Returned Format: [:MEASure:vTIMe] < value > <NL>

Where:

< value > :: = voltage at specified time (exponential - NR3 format)

Example: DIM Vtm$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":MEASURE:vTIME? .001"
ENTER 707;vtm$
PRINT Vtm$

HP 54501A Measure Subsystem

Programming 14-63
VTOP

VTOP command/query

The :MEASURE:VTOP command places the instrument in the

continuous measurement mode and starts a Vtop measurement.

The VTOP query returns the voltage at the top of a waveform.

Command Syntax: :MEASure:vrop

Example: OUTPUT 707;":MEASURE:VTOP"

Query Syntax: :MEASure:vrop?

Returned Format: [:MEASure:vTOP] < value >

<NL>

Where:

< value > :: =

voltage at top of waveform (exponential - NR3 format)

Example: DIM Vtp$

OUTPUT 707;":MEASURE:vTOP?"
ENTER 707;Vtp$
PRINT Vtp$

Measure Subsystem HP 54501A

14-64 Programming
Timebase Subsystem 15
Introduction The TIMEBASE subsystem commands control the horizontal axis,
"X axis," oscilloscope functions.

The TIMEBASE subsystem also contains the commands that control the
Timebase Window mode.

The Timebase Window mode allows a second timebase to be used. The

Window settings are WINDOW:DELAY (window position) and
WINDOW:RANGE (window width).

HP 54501A Timebase Subsystem

Programming 15-1
 delay_value = A real number, maximum depends on sweep range.

range_value = A real number, 20 ns through 50 s (in a 1,2,5 sequence).

Figure 15-1. Timebase Subsystem Commands Syntax Diagram

Timebase Subsystem HP 54501A

15-2 Programming
 DELay

DELay command/query

The :TIMEBASE:DELAY command sets the timebase delay. This delay

is the time interval between the trigger event and the on screen delay

reference point. The delay reference point is the left edge of the display,
the right edge of the display, or center of the display, and is set with the
:TIMEBASE:REFERENCE command.

The DELAY query returns the current delay value.

Command Syntax: :TIMebase: DELay <delay>

Where:

< delay >

::= timein seconds from trigger to on screen delay reference point.
Maximum value depends on time/division setting.

Example: OUTPUT 707;":TIM:DEL 2MS"

Query Syntax: :TIMebase:DELay?

Returned Format: [:TIMebase:DELay] <delay> <NL>

Where:

< delay > ::

=
time from trigger to display reference in seconds. Display reference is
left, center, or right (exponential NR3 format)
•

Example: DIM Di$(50]

OUTPUT 707; ":TIMEBASE: DELAY?"
ENTER 707; Dl$
PRINT Dl$

HP 54501A Timebase Subsystem

Programming 15-3
MODE

MODE command/query

The :TIMEBASE:MODE command selects the timebase mode. This

function is the same as the trigger menu Auto/Trig'd key and the SINGLE
key on the front panel.

If the AUTO mode is selected, the unit will provide a baseline on the
display in the absence of a signal. If a signal is present but the oscilloscope
is not triggered, the display will be unsynchronized but will not be a
baseline.

If the TRIGGERED mode is selected and no trigger is present, the unit

will not sweep, and the data acquired on the previous trigger will remain
on screen.

If the SINGLE mode is selected the screen will be cleared and the

instrument will be stopped. The RUN command will arm the trigger, then
data will be acquired when the trigger is found. To make a single
acquisition a RUN command should be sent.

The MODE query returns the current mode.

Command Syntax: :TIMebase:MODE {AUTO | TRIGgered | SINGIe}

Example: OUTPUT 707; ":TIM: MODE TRIGGERED"

Query Syntax: :TIMebase:MODE?

Returned Format: [:TIMbase:MODE] <rnode> <NL>

<mode> ::= {AUTO | TRIGgered | SINGIe}

Example: DIM Mode$[30]

OUTPUT 707;"TIMEBASE:MODE?"
ENTER 707; Mode$
PRINT Mode$

Timebase Subsystem HP 54501A

15-4 Programming
 RANGe

RANGe command/query

The :TIMEBASE:RANGE command sets the full scale horizontal time in

seconds. The RANGE value is ten times the time per division.

The RANGE query returns the current range value.

Command Syntax: :TIMebase:RANGe < range >

<
range > ::= 20ns to 50s in a 1,2,5 sequence"

Example: OUTPUT 707;":TIM:RANG 100 MS"

Query Syntax: :TIMebase:RANGe?

Returned Format: [:TIMebase:RANGe] < range > < NL>

Where:

< range > :: =

20 ns to 50 s (exponential -
NR3 format)

Example: DIM Rng$[50]

OUTPUT 707; ":TIMEBASE:RANGE?"
ENTER 707;Rng$
PRINT Rng$

HP 54501 A Timebase Subsystem

Programming 15-5
REFerence

REFerence command/query

The :TIMEBASE:REFERENCE command sets the display reference to

the left side of the screen, the right side of the screen, or to the center of
the screen.

The REFERENCE query returns the current display reference.

Command Syntax: :TIMebase:REFerence {LEFT | CENTer | RIGHt}

Example: OUTPUT 707; ":TIMEBASE:REFERENCE LEFT"

Query Syntax: :TIMebase:REFerence?

Returned Format: [:TIMebase:REFerence] {LEFT | CENTer | RIGHt} <NL>

Example: DIM Rf$[30]

OUTPUT 707; ":TIMEBASE: REFERENCE?"
ENTER 707; Rf$
PRINT Rf$

Timebase Subsystem HP 54501A

15-6 Programming
 WINDOW

WINDOW command/query

The :TIMEBASE:WINDOW command controls whether or not the

second timebase is in use. If this command is set to ON the second
timebase is displayed on the bottom half of the screen. When the
Timebase Window is on, all measurements are taken on the second
(expanded) timebase.

When the Timebase Window is on the second timebase data can be

acquired over the HP-IB by sending the command
WAVEFORM:DATA?, however care must be taken in order to ensure
valid data is present when the data is requested.

The WINDOW query returns the current state of this command.

Command Syntax: :TlMebase:WINDow {{ON | 1} | {OFF | 0}}

Example: OUTPUT 707;":TIM:WlND 1"

Query Syntax: :TIMbase:WlNDow?

Returned Format: [:TlMebase:WINDow] {1 | 0}<NL>

Example: DIM Tw$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":TIMEBASE:WINDOW?"
ENTER 707;°Tw$
PRINT Tw$

HP 54501A Timebase Subsystem

Programming 15-7
WINDow:DELay

WINDOW: DELay (Position) command/query

The :TIMEBASE:WINDOW:DELAY command sets the timebase

window delay. The window delay actually sets the position of the timebase
window on the main sweep. The range for this command is determined by
the main sweep seconds/division and delay values. The value for this
command must keep the window on the main sweep display.

The WINDOW:DELAY query returns the current value.

Command Syntax: :TIMebase:WINDow:DELay <wid_delay>

Where:

<wid_delay> :: time in seconds from trigger to on screen delay reference point.

=

Maximum value depends on time/division setting.

Example: OUTPUT 707;":TIM:WIND:DEL 20 NS"

Query Syntax: :TIMebase:WINDow:DELay?

Returned Format: (:TIMebase:WINDow:DELay] <wid_delayxNL>

Where:

<wid_delay> :: =
current setting in seconds (exponential - NR3 format)

Example: DIM Diy$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":TIMEBASE:WINDOW:DELAY?"
ENTER 707; Dly$
PRINT Dly$

Timebase Subsystem HP 54501A

15-8 Programming
 WINDow:RANGe

WINDow:RANGe (Timebase) command/query

The :TIMEBASE:WINDOW:RANGE command sets the full scale

horizontal time in seconds for the second (expanded) timebase. The
RANGE value is ten times the time per division of the second timebase.

The WINDOW:RANGE query returns the current range value.

Command Syntax: :TIMebase:WlNDow:RANGe < range >

Where:

< range > :: = 1 ns to 50 s (depends on main sweep setting)

Example: OUTPUT 707;":TIM:W1ND:RANG 100 NS"

Query Syntax: :TIMebase:WINDow:RANQe?

Returned Format: [:TIMebase:WlNDow:RANGe] <range> <NL>

Where:

< range > :: = 1 ns to 50 s (depends on main sweep setting) (exponential - NR3

format)

Example: DIM Wmg$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":TIMEBASE:WINDOW:RANGE?"
ENTER 707;Wrng$
PRINT Wrng$

HP 54501A Timebase Subsystem

Programming 15-9
Trigger Subsystem 16
Introduction The commands in the TRIGGER subsystem are used to define the
conditions for a trigger. Many of the commands in the Trigger subsystem
are used in more than one of the trigger modes. If the command is a valid
command for a trigger mode that setting will be accepted. If the
command is not valid for a trigger mode an error will be generated.

You must be sure that the instrument is in the proper trigger mode for the
command being sent. The instrument can be placed in the trigger mode
from the front panel or over the HP-IB. One method of insuring the
instrument is in the proper trigger mode is to send the
:TRIGGER:MODE command in the same program message as the
parameter to be set. As an example, send:

":TRIGGER:MODE TV; LEVEL 200 MV"

This will place the instrument in the TV Trigger Mode and set the trigger
level to 200 mV. This is necessary because the LEVEL command is also
valid for the other trigger modes.

The Trigger modes are described on the next few pages prior to the
command syntax. Table 16-1 lists the different TRIGGER subsystem
commands that are available for each trigger mode.

Note

Auto or triggered mode is selected with the TIMEBASE.-MODE

command.

HP 54501A Trigger Subsystem

Programming 1&-1
 Table l(hl. Valid Commands for Specific Trigger Modes

EDGE PATTERN STATE DELAY TV

HOLDOFF CONDITION CONDITION CONDITION CONDITION

LEVEL HOLDOFP HOLDOFF DELAY FIELD
SLOPE LEVEL LEVEL DELAY:SLOPE HOLDOFF
SOURCE LOGIC LOGIC DELAY:SOURCE LEVEL
PATH PATH LEVEL LINE
SLOPE LOGIC OCCURRENCE
SOURCE OCCURRENCE OCCURRENCE:SLOPE
OCCURRENCESLOPE POLARITY
OCCURRENCE:SOURCE QUALIFY
PATH SOURCE
QUALIFY STANDARD
SLOPE
SOURCE

Note

Auto or triggered mode is selected with the TIMEBASE.-MODE

command.

Trigger Subsystem HP 54501A

16-2 Programming
The EDGE The Edge Trigger Mode is the easiest trigger mode to understand and use
from the front panel or over the HP-ffi. This is true because the Edge
Trigger Mode Trigger Mode has the least number of parameters to be set. This
explanation of the trigger mode commands follows the front panel keys
very closely. Refer to the Front Panel Operation Reference for further
explanations of the trigger operation.

In this mode you must set the trigger source, using the TRIGGER
SOURCE command. This selects the channel that the oscilloscope will
trigger on. The argument for this command is channell through channel4.

The next thing that must be set in this mode is the trigger level. This value
is set using the LEVEL command and can be set for each trigger source.
The trigger level values that are set in this mode are used for all modes
except TV Trigger Mode, or conversely, the LEVELS set in the
PATTERN, STATE, or DELAY modes will set the EDGE LEVELS as
weU.

The trigger level is used in the PATTERN and STATE mode to define
the voltage that determines if the input voltage is a logic high or a logic
low for the logic triggers.

The next field to be set in the Edge Trigger Mode is the actual edge that
will create the trigger. This command is the SLOPE command and can be
set to POSITIVE or NEGATIVE for each of the sources.

The last setting in this mode is the Trigger Holdoff value. This value is
only used for the EDGE mode.

HP 54501A Trigger Subsystem

Programming 1&.3
The Pattern This description of the Pattern Trigger Mode is also related to the front
panel keys. There are additional parameters in this mode that are not
Trigger Mode
used in the Edge Trigger Mode and one parameter that is carried over
from the edge mode. The one parameter that carriers over is LEVEL. If
the level command is used in this mode it will also change the level value
for that source in the Edge Trigger Mode.

The logic pattern for the Pattern Trigger Mode is set using the PATH and
LOGIC commands. The PATH command specifies which of the four
inputs is selected for the logic pattern. Once the path has been selected,
the pattern can be set using the LOGIC command. The LOGIC
command uses the arguments HIGH, LOW, and DONTCARE to set the
"trigger on" bit pattern.

The next command sets the "when" field on the front panel. This is set
with the CONDITION command. This command is used in several of the
trigger modes, therefore it has parameters that are not valid in this mode.
The valid parameters for the CONDITION command in the Pattern
Trigger Mode are: ENTER, EXIT, GT, LT, and RANGE.

When the command TRIGGER:CONDITION ENTER or

TRIGGER:CONDITION EXIT is sent the Entered or Exited parameter
is set on the front panel. When the GT or LT option is used a time value
must be sent to define the limit. When the RANGE option is used two
time values must be sent to define the lower and upper limit. The correct
syntax for the RANGE option is TRIGGER:CONDITION
RANGE, < range_low >, < range_high >.

Also, in the Pattern Trigger Mode, you can set the holdoff time using the
TRIGGER:HOLDOFF command.

Trigger Subsystem HP 54501A

16-4 Programming
The State When the State Trigger Mode is selected the TRIGGER:SOURCE
command is used to select the clock source. The syntax for selecting the
Trigger Mode
clock source is TRIGGER:SOURCE CHANNEL!

After the clock source is selected, the correct edge for the clock can be
selected using the TRIGGER:SLOPE command which can be set to
NEGATIVE or POSITIVE.

Next the TRIGGER:PATH command can be used with the

TRIGGER:LOGIC command to set the three bit logic pattern to qualify
the clock trigger. These commands could be sent using the following
syntax ":TRIGGER:PATH CHAN2;:TRIGGER:LOGIC LOW, or
":TRIGGER:PATH CHAN2; LOGIC LOW".

The TRIGGER:CONDITION command in the State Trigger Mode will

set the "is/is not present" state using the parameters TRUE for "is present"
and FALSE for "is
not present."

In this mode a holdoff value can be set as in most other modes.

HP 54501A Trigger Subsystem

Programming 16-5
The Delay In the Delay Trigger Mode the TRIGGER:QUALIFY command can be
used to select the EDGE, PATTERN, or STATE mode as a qualifier.
Trigger Mode
When the EDGE qualifier is selected all Edge parameters and commands
can be used to set the Source and Slope. When the PATTERN qualifier
is selected all Pattern commands can be used to set the pattern mode

parameters. When the STATE qualifier is selected all State commands

can be used to set the state mode parameters.

The next settings (in front panel order) are the delay settings. The
DELAY command is used to set the Time or Count parameter and the
amount of delay. To set the delay to time use the command
TRIGGER:DELAY TIME, < time >, and to set the delay to count use
the command TRIGGER:DELAY EVENT < number_events
>.

If the trigger delay is set to Event (count) you can then

set the delay
source and slope. To set the delay source use the command
"TRIGGER:DELAY:SOURCE CHANNEL2" and to set the delay slope
use the command "TRIGGER:DELAY:SLOPE POSITIVE".

Next (on the front panel) is the "trigger on" field. The values within this
field are set with the OCCURRENCE command. To set the number of
occurrences use the command syntax "TRIGGER:OCCURRENCE
3333". To set the source for the number of occurrences use the command
syntax ":TRIGGER:OCCURRENCE:SOURCE CHANNEL2" and to set
the slope of the trigger occurrence use the command syntax
":TRIGGER:OCCURRENCE:SLOPE NEGATIVE".

Trigger Subsystem HP 54501 A

16-6 Programming
The TV Trigger The TV Trigger Mode is used for triggering on clamped television signals.
This mode will allow you to select one of the TV signal frames and one of
Mode
the lines within that frame.

Once the TV Trigger Mode has been selected the Television Signal
Standard can be selected using the TRIGGER:STANDARD command.
The three parameters for this command are 525,625, and USER. Any of
these modes allow you to select the source of the trigger signal and the
trigger level.

The source is set by sending the SOURCE command. The SOURCE

command allows the selection of channel 1 through 4 using the command
":TRIGGER:SOURCE CHANNEL2".

The trigger level is set by sending the command ":TRIGGER:LEVEL

< value >".

With the standard set to 525 or 625 the commands that can be used are
POLARITY, FIELD, and LINE. The POLARITY command can accept
NEGATIVE and POSITIVE as its parameters and sets the edge for the
trigger. The FIELD command uses 1 and 2 for its parameters which
select the first or second field of the television signal. The LINE
command parameters are different for the two standards, refer to the
command to determine the correct values.

The HOLDOFF value can also be set in the TV trigger mode, as in all
modes.

HP 54501A Trigger Subsystem

Programming 16-7
 When the "user defined" standard is selected, the source and level are set
in the same manner as before.

The QUALIFY command is used to set the "qualify on" field. This
command uses the parameters HIGH and LOW.

The edge defined by the QUALIFY command must occur within the
range of time values that are displayed in the next front panel field. The
TRIGGER:CONDITION RANGE command sets the greater than and
less thantime values. In order to actually generate a trigger the qualified
conditions must be met within the specified time. To set the time values
send "TRIGGER:CONDITION RANGE, < gt_value >, < lt_value >".

The next field "trigger on" is set with the OCCURRENCE command and
OCCURRENCE:SLOPE command. To set the number of occurrences
send the command ":TRIGGER:OCCURRENCE < number >" and to
set the slope for the occurrences send the command
":TRIGGER:OCCURRENCE:SLOPE POSITIVE". The slope command
can also use NEGATIVE as a parameter.

The description for each of the commands will tell you in which modes
that command is valid.

See figure 16-1 for Trigger subsystem commands syntax diagram.

Trigger Subsystem HP 54501A

16-8 Programming
 Figure 16-1. Trigger Subsystem Commands Syntax Diagram

HP 54501A Trigger Subsystem

Programming 16-9
 HOLDoffJ—»1 space ho Idof f_t ime

^HOLDoff?_)———————

LEVel )———^ space j———^ level_arg

LINE i
ne—arg

^LINE?

''LOG i c^)
.LOW)

^HIGM'

LOGIC?.

^MODE^ EDGE

, PATTern

STATe^

DELoy^

^(^>

Figuw 76-7. Trigger Subsystem Commands Syntax Diagram (continued)

Trigger Subsystem HP 54501A

16-10 Programming
 Figure 16-1. Trigger Subsystem Commands Syntax Diagram (continued)

HP 54501A Trigger Subsystem

Programming 16-11
 channel_num =
An integer, 1, 2, 3, or 4.

event_arg =
An integer, 1 to 16000000.

gt_arg
= A time value, 20 ns to 160 ms.

lioldo(T_time = A time value, 40 ns to 320 ms.

level_arg = A real number, specifying the trigger level in volts.

line arg = An integer, 1 to 625 (depends on video STANDARD

selected).

lt_arg = A lime value, 20 ns to 160 ms.

range_gt
= A time value, 20 ns to 159.999 ms (value must be less than
range_lt).

rangejt = A time value, 30 ns to 160 ms (value musl be greater than

range_gt).

time_arg
= A time value, 30 ns to 160 ms.

»>ccur_ar(; =
An integer, 1 to 16000000.

Figure 16-1. Trigger Subsystem Command's Syntax Diagram (continued)

Trigger Subsystem HP 54501A

16-12 Programming
 CONDition

CONDition command/query

The :TRIGGER:CONDITION command is valid in the PATTERN,

STATE, DELAY, and TV trigger modes. The function of the
CONDITION command in each of these modes is described below.

Time values entered using this command are rounded to the nearest 10 ns.

In the Pattern Trigger Mode the valid arguments for the CONDITION
command are ENTER, EXIT, GT, LT, RANGE.

In the Pattern Trigger Mode the CONDITION command is used to

specify if the trigger will be generated upon entry to the specified logic
pattern, upon exiting the specified logic pattern, or if the pattern must be
present for a specified amount of time. The time in the pattern trigger
mode can be specified to be greater than a value (GT), less then a value
(LT), or between two values (RANGE).

These are the same settings that are specified using the front panel "when"
key in the Pattern Trigger Mode.

In the State Trigger Mode the valid parameters for the CONDITION
command are TRUE (is present) and FALSE (is not present).

In the Delay Trigger Mode the CONDITION command is valid when

PATTERN or STATE is selected as the qualifier. All arguments for this

command that are valid in the Pattern or State Trigger Modes are valid
here.

In the TV Trigger Mode the CONDITION command is used to set the

range of time values for the trigger to occur. This command is only valid
in the "user defined" mode.

The CONDITION query returns the currently selected condition, for the
currently selected mode.

HP 54501A Trigger Subsystem

Programming 16-13
CONDition

Command Syntax: :TRIGger:CONDition <argument>

Where in PATTERN or DEIAY:PATTERN mode:

<argument> ::= {ENTer | EXIT | GT,<value> | LT,<value> |

FtANGe,
<
range_gt >, < rangejt >}

Where in STATE or DELAY:STATE mode:

<argument> ::= {TRUE | FALSe}

Where in TV mode:

<
argument > ::= RANGe,<range_gt>,< range Jt>

Where:

< value > ::= 20ns to 160 ms

<range_gt> :: 20 ns to 159.999 ms (must be less than rangejt)
=

<
rangejt > :: 30 ns to 160 ms (must be greater than range_gt)
=

Example: OUTPUT 707;":TRIG:COND RANGE,22ms,33ms"

Trigger Subsystem HP 54501A

16-14 Programming
 CONDition

Query Syntax: :TRIGger:CONDition?

Returned Format: [:TRIGger:CONDition] < argument > <NL>

Where in PATTERN or DELAY PATTERN mode:

<argument> ::= {ENTer | EXIT | GT,<value> | LT,<value> |

RANGe,<
range_gt >, < rangejt >}

Where in STATE or DELAY STATE mode:

<argument> ::= {TRUE | FALSe}

Where in TV mode:

<
argument > :;= RANGe, <range_gt>,< rangejt >

Where:

< value >

::= 20ns to 160ms
<range_gt> ::= 20ns to 159.999ms (must be less than rangejt)
<
rangejt> :: 30 ns to 160 ms (must be greater than range_gt)
=

Example: DIM Con$[50]

OUTPUT 707;"CONDITION?"
ENTER 707;Con$
PRINT Con$

HP 54501A Trigger Subsystem

Programming 16-15
DELay

DELay command/query

The :TRIGGER:DELAY command is valid only in the Delay Trigger

Mode. This command allows you to set a delay value in either time or
number of events. In the time delay mode, this command specifies the
delay value in seconds. In the events delay mode, this command specifies
the delay value in number of trigger events.

The Delay query returns the current delay setting.

Command Syntax: :TRIGger:DELay{TIME,<time_value> | EVENt,<event_value>}

Where:

<time_value > :: =
time of delay from 30 ns to 160 ms
1 to 16000000
<
event_value >
::= number of events from

Example: OUTPUT 707;":TRIGGER:DELAYTIME,1.23E-01"

Query Syntax: :TRIGger:DELay?

Returned Format: [:TRIGger: DELay] {TIME, < time_value > | EVENt, <
event_value > } < NL >

Where:

<time_value > :: =
time of delay from 30 ns to 160 ms
1 to 16000000
< event_value >
::= number of events from

Example: DIM vaiue$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":TRIG:DELAY?"
ENTER 707;Value$
PRINT Value$

Trigger Subsystem HP 54501A

1&-16 Programming
 DELay:SLOPe

DELay:SLOPe command/query

The :TRIGGER:DELAY:SLOPE command sets the edge that will be

counted by the delay command. The parameters for this command are
NEGATIVE or POSITIVE. This command is valid in the Delay Trigger
Mode.

The DELAY:SLOPE query returns the current delay slope.

Command Syntax: :TRIGger:DELay:SLOPe {POSitive I NEGative}

Example: OUTPUT 707;":TRIG:DEL:SLOP POS"

Query Syntax: :TRIGger:DELay:SLOPe?

Returned Format: [:TRIGger:DELay:SLOPe] {POSitive I NEGative} < NL>

Example: DIM Tos$[50]

OUTPUT 707;"TRIGGER:DELAY:SLOP?"
ENTER 707;Tos$
PRINT Tos$

HP 54501A Trigger Subsystem

Programming 1&-17
DELay:SOURce

DELay:SOURce command/query

The :TRIGGER:DELAY:SOURCE command sets the edge that will be

counted by the delay command. The parameters for this command are
CHANNELl through CHANNEL4. This command is only valid in the
Delay Trigger Mode.

The DELAY:SOURCE query returns the source of the delay in the Delay
Trigger Mode.

Command Syntax: :TRIGger: DELay:SOURce {CHANnell | CHANnel2 | CHANnel3 | CHANnel4}

Example: OUTPUT 707;":TRIG:DEL:SOURCE CHANNEL2"

Query Syntax: :TRIGger: DELay: SOURce?

Returned Format: [:TRIGger:DELay:SOURce] {CHANnell | CHANnel2 | CHANnel3 | CHANnel4} <NL>

Example: DIM Tos$[50]

OUTPUT 707;"TRIGGER:DELAY:SOUR?"
ENTER 707;Tos$
PRINT Tos$

Trigger Subsystem HP 54501A

16-18 Programming
 FIELd

FIELd command/query

The :TRIGGER:FIELD command is only valid in the TV Trigger Mode.

This command is used to select the field of the TV signal when the
STANDARD is set to 525 or 625. The only valid parameters for this
command are 1 or 2.

The FIELD query returns the current setting of the FIELD command.

Command Syntax: :TRiGger:RELd {1 12}

Example: OUTPUT 707;"TRIGGER:FIEL 2"

Query Syntax: :TRiGger:RELd?

Returned Format: [:TRiGger:RELd] {1 | 2} < NL>

Example: DIM p$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":TRIG:FIELD?"
ENTER 707;°F$
PRINT F$

HP 54501A Trigger Subsystem

Programming 16-19
HOLDoff

HOLDoff command/query

The :TRIGGER:HOLDOFF command is valid in the Edge, Pattern,

State, and TV Trigger Modes. This command will allow a holdoff by time
value to be entered.

The HOLDOFF query returns the value of the holdoff for the current
mode.

Command Syntax: :TRIGger:HOLDof( TIME, < holdoff_value >

Where:

< holdoff_value > :: = 40 ns to 320 ms rounded to nearest 20 ns increment.

Examples: OUTPUT 707;":TRIGGER:HOLDOFF TIME.216 US"

OUTPUT 707;":TRIGGER:HOLDOFF TIME.2.16E-4"

Query Syntax: :TRIGger: HOLDoff?

Returned Format: [:TRIGger:HOLDoff] <holdoff_value> <NL>

Where:

< holdoff_value > :: = 40 ns to 320 ms (exponential - NR3 format)

Example: DIM Ho$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":TRIGGER:HOLD?"
ENTER 707; Ho$
PRINT Ho$

Trigger Subsystem HP 54501A

16-20 Programming
 LEVel

LEVel command/query

The :TRIGGER:LEVEL command sets the trigger level voltage of the

active trigger. This command can be sent in any mode, however only two
separate levels are stored. One value is kept for the TV Trigger Mode
and another value is kept for all other modes. If you are in the Pattern
Trigger Mode and set a trigger level value, that level will also be used for
the Edge, State, and Delay Trigger Modes.

The LEVEL query returns the trigger level of the current trigger mode.

Command Syntax: :TRIGger:LEVel < level >

Where:

< level >

::= -140.0 volts to +140.0 volts (maximum value depends on volts/division
and offset settings).

Examples: OUTPUT 707;":TRIGGER:LEVEL .30"

OUTPUT 707;":TRIGGER:LEV 300MV
OUTPUT 707;":TRIG:LEV 3E-1"

Refer to chapter 3 for the syntax of using values with multipliers.

Query Syntax: :TRIGger:LEVel?

Returned Format: [:TRIGger:LEVel] < level > < NL>

Where:

< level > :: = trigger level in volts (exponential •

NR3 format)

Example: DIM Tlevel$[30]

OUTPUT 707;":TRIGGER: LEVEL?"
ENTER 707;Tlevel$
PRINT Tlevel$

HP 54501A Trigger Subsystem

Programming 16-21
LINE

LINE command/query

The :TRIGGER:LINE command is valid in the TV Trigger Mode when

the STANDARD selected is 525 or 625. If one of the these standards is
selected when the TV Trigger Mode is entered the line value will be set in
that standard and selected field.

The LINE query returns the current line of the selected standard.

Command Syntax: :TRIGger:LINE <line_number>

Where:

<line_number> :: = 1 to 625 (depends on STANDARD and FIELD selection).

Example: OUTPUT 707;":TRlG:LlNE 22"

Query Syntax: :TRIGger:LINE?

Returned Format: [:TRIGger:LINE] <line_numberxNL>

Where:

< linejiumber > :: = 1 to 625 (depends on STANDARD and FIELD selection).

(integer - NR1 format)

Example: DIM Ln$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":TRIGGER:LINE?"
ENTER 707; Ln$
PRINT Ln$

Trigger Subsystem HP 54501A

16-22 Programming
 LOGic

LOGic command/query

The :TRIGGER:LOGIC command is valid in the Pattern and State

Trigger Modes, as well as the DELAY Trigger Mode when qualifmg by
PATTERN or STATE. The LOGIC command is used to specify the
relation between the signal and the defined voltage level that must exist
before that part of the pattern is considered valid. If the signal on a
selected path is greater than the trigger level, that signal is considered
HIGH. If it is less than the trigger level, it is considered LOW.

The LOGIC query returns the last specified logic level of the currently
enabled path.

Command Syntax: :TRIGger: LOGic {HIGH | LOW | DONTcare}

Example: OUTPUT 707;":TRIG:LOGIC DONT"

Query Syntax: :TRIGger:LOGic?

Returned Format: [:TRIGger: LOGic] {HIGH | LOW | DONTcare} <NL>

Example: DIM L$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":TRIGGER: LOGIC?"
ENTER 707; L$
PRINT L$

HP 54501A Trigger Subsystem

Programming 16-23
MODE

MODE command/query

The :TRIGGER:MODE command selects the trigger mode. The mode

command can be sent from any trigger mode.

The MODE query returns the currently selected trigger mode.

Command Syntax: :TRIGger:MODE {EDGE | PATTern I STATe | DELay | TV}

Example: OUTPUT 707;°:TRIGGER:MODE PATT"

Query Syntax: :TRIGger:MODE?

Returned Format: [:TRIGger:MODE] {EDGE | PATTern I STATe | DELay | TV}<NL>

Example: DIM Mode$[50]

OUTPUT 707;°:TRIGGER:MODE?"
ENTER 707; Mode$
PRINT Mode$

Trigger Subsystem HP 54501A

16-24 Programming
 Occurrence

Occurrence command/query

The :TRIGGER:OCCURRENCE command sets the number of trigger

events that must occur before the oscilloscope sweep is actually triggered.
This command is valid in the Delay Trigger Mode and in the TV Trigger
Mode.

The OCCURRENCE query returns the current value of occurrence if the

oscilloscope is in the Delay Trigger Mode, or in the TV Trigger Mode
with USER DEFINED selected.

Command Syntax: :TFUGger:OCCurrence <occ_number>

Where:

<occ_number> ::= 1 to 16000000

Example: OUTPUT 707;":TRiGGER:occ 14"

Query Syntax: :TRIGger:OCCurrence?

Returned Format: [:TRIGger:OCCurrence] <occ_number> <NL>

Where:

<occ_number> :: = 1 to 16000000 (integer - NR1 format)

Example: DIM Oc$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":TRIGGER:OCCURRENCE?"
ENTER 707; Oc$
PRINT Oc$

HP 54501A Trigger Subsystem

Programming 16-25
OCCurrence:SLOPe

OCCurrence:SLOPe command/query

The :TRIGGER:OCCURRENCE:SLOPE command sets the edge that

will be counted by the occurrence command. The parameters for this
command are NEGATIVE or POSITIVE. This command is valid in the
Delay Trigger Mode and the TV Trigger Mode.

The OCCURRENCE:SLOPE query returns the slope of the current

mode.

Command Syntax: :TRIGger:OCCurrence:SLOPe {POSitive | NEGative}

Example: OUTPUT 707;":TRiG:occ:SLOP POS"

Query Syntax: :TRIGger:OCCurrence:SLOPe?

Returned Format: [:TRIGger:OCCurrence:SLOPe] {POSitive | NEGative} <NL>

Example: DIM Tos$[so]

OUTPUT 707;"TRIGGER:OCCURRENCE:SLOP?"
ENTER 707;Tos$
PRINT Tos$

Trigger Subsystem HP 54501A

16-26 Programming
 OCCurrence:SOURce

OCCurrence:SOURce command/query

The :TRIGGER:OCCURRENCE:SOURCE command sets the edge that

will be counted by the occurrence command. The parameters for this
command are CHANNELl through CHANNEIA This command is valid
in the Delay Trigger Mode.

The OCCURRENCE:SOURCE query returns the source of the

occurrence in the Delay Trigger Mode.

Command Syntax: :TRIGger:OCCurrence:SOURce {CHANneh | CHANnel2 | CHANnel3 | CHANnel4}

Example: OUTPUT 707;":TRIG:OCC:SOURCE CHANNEL2"

Query Syntax: :TRIGger:OCCurrence:SOURce?

Returned Format: [:TRIGger:OCCurrence:SOURce] {CHANnell | CHANnel2 | CHANnel3 |

CHANnel4} <NL>

Example: DIM Tos$[50]

OUTPUT 707;"TRIGGER:OCCURRENCE: SOUR?"
ENTER 707;Tos$
PRINT Tos$

HP 54501A Trigger Subsystem

Programming 16-27
PATH

PATH command/query

The :TRIGGER:PATH command is valid in the Pattern Trigger Mode,

State Trigger Mode, and Delay Trigger Mode when "qualify on" pattern or
state is selected. This command selects a pattern bit as the source for
future logic commands.

The PATH query returns the current trigger source of the present mode.

Command Syntax: :TRIGger:PATH <path_name>

Where:

<path_name> ::= {CHANnell | CHANne!2 | CHANnel3 | CHANnel4}

Example: OUTPUT 707;":TRIGGER;PATH CHANNELS"

Query Syntax: :TRIGger:PATH?

Returned Format: [:TRIGger:PATH] CHANnel{1 I 2 I 3 I 4}<NL>

Example: DIM Tp$[so]

OUTPUT 707;":TRIG:PATH?"
ENTER 707;Tp$
PRINT Tp$

Trigger Subsystem HP 54501A

16-28 Programming
 POLarity

POLarity command/query

The :TRIGGER:POLARITY command is valid in the TV Trigger Mode.

It sets the polarity for the trigger when the STANDARD is set to 525 or
625. The valid parameters for this command are POSITIVE and
NEGATIVE.

The POLARITY query will return the current polarity setting.

Command Syntax: :TRlGger:POLarity {POSitive | NEGative}

Example: OUTPUT 707;":TR1GGER:POL NEGATIVE"

Query Syntax: :TRlGger:POLarity?

Returned Format: [:TRlGger:POLarity] {POSitive | NEGative} <NL>

Example: DIM Tp$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":TR1G:POL?"
ENTER 707;Tp$
PRINT Tp$

HP 54501A Trigger Subsystem

Programming 1&-29
QUALify

QUALify command/query

The :TRIGGER:QUALIFY command is valid in the Delay and TV

Trigger Mode. The parameters for this command when in the Delay
Trigger Mode are:

• EDGE
• PATTERN
• STATE

The parameters for this command when in the TV Trigger Mode are:

• LOW
• HIGH

The QUALIFY query returns the current setting of the QUALIFY

command in the currently selected mode.

Command Syntax: :TRIGger:QUAUfy <qualify_parameter>

Where in Delay Trigger Mode:

<qualify_parameter> ::= {EDGE | PATTern | STATe}

Where in TV Trigger Mode:

<qualify_parametec> ::= {LOW | HIGH}

Example: OUTPUT 707;":TRIGGER:QUALIFY PATT"

Trigger Subsystem HP 54501A

16-30 Programming
 QUALIfy

Query Syntax: :TRIGger:QUAUfy?

Returned Format: [:TRIGger:OUAUfy] {EDGE | PATTern I STATe | LOW | HIGH}<NL>

Example: DIM Tq$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":TRIG:OUAL1FY?"
ENTER 707;Tq$
PRINT Tq$

HP 54501A Trigger Subsystem

Programming 16-31
SLOPe

SLOPe command/query

The :TRIGGER:SLOPE command specifies the slope of the edge for the
trigger. The SLOPE command is valid in the Edge Trigger Mode, State
Trigger Mode, and Delay Trigger Mode when EDGE or STATE is
selected as the qualifier.

The SLOPE query returns the current slope for the currently selected
trigger mode.

Command Syntax: :TRlGger:SLOPe {NEGative I POSitive}

Example: OUTPUT 707;":TRIGGER:SLOPE POSITIVE"

Query Syntax: :TRlGger:SLOPe?

Returned Format: [:TRlGger:SLOPe] {POSitive I NEGative} <NL>

Example: DIM Ts$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":TR1G:SLOP?"
ENTER 707;Ts$
PRINT Ts$

Trigger Subsystem HP 54501A

16-32 Programming
 SOURce

SOURce command/query

The :TRIGGER:SOURCE command selects the channel that actually

produces the trigger. The SOURCE command is valid in the Edge
Trigger Mode/State Trigger Mode, Delay Trigger Mode, and TV Trigger
Mode. In the Delay Trigger Mode this command is valid when EDGE or
STATE is selected as the qualifier.

The SOURCE query returns current source for the selected trigger mode.

Command Syntax: :TRIGger:SOURce {CHANnell I CHANnel2 | CHANnelS | CHANnel4}

Example: OUTPUT 707;":TRIGGER:SOURCE CHAN2"

Query Syntax: :TRIGger:SOURce?

Returned Format: [:TRIGger:SOURce] {CHANnell I CHANnel2 | CHANnel3 | CHANnel4} <NL>

Example: DIM Src$[30]

OUTPUT 707;":TRIGGER: SOURCE?"
ENTER 707; Src$
PRINT Sre$

HP 54501A Trigger Subsystem

Programming 16-33
STANdard

STANdard command/query

The :TRIGGER:STANDARD command selects the television signal

standard to be used in the TV Trigger Mode. The valid parameters for
this command 525,625, and USER (defined).

The STANDARD query returns the currently selected standard.

Command Syntax: :TRIGger: STANdard {525 I 625 | USER}

Example: OUTPUT 707;";TRIGQER:STAN USER"

Query Syntax: :TRIGger: STANdard?

Returned Format: [:TRIGger:STANdard] {525 I 625 I USER} < NL>

Example: DIM Ts$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":TRIG:STANDARD?"
ENTER 707; Ts$
PRINT Ts$

Trigger Subsystem HP 54501A

16-34 Programming
Waveform Subsystem 17
Introduction The WAVEFORM subsystem is used to transfer waveform data between
a controller and the HP 54501A's waveform memories. The waveform

record is actually contained in two portions, the waveform data and the
preamble. The waveform data is the actual data acquired for each point
in the specified source. The preamble contains the information for
interpreting the waveform data. This includes the number of points
acquired, format of acquired data, and type of acquired data. The
preamble also contains the X and Y increments, origins, and references
for the acquired data, so that the raw data can be translated to time and
voltage values.

The values set in the preamble are determined when the :DIGITIZE
command is executed or the front panel store key is pressed. The
Preamble values are based on the settings of variables in the ACQUIRE
subsystem or the front panel setup if the store key is pressed. Although the
preamble values can be changed with a controller, the way the data was
acquired cannot be changed. Changing the preamble values cannot
change the type of data that was actually acquired, the number of points
actually acquired, etc. Therefore, extreme caution must be used when
changing any waveform preamble values to ensure the data will still be
useful. For example, setting POINTS in the preamble to a value different
from the actual number of points in the waveform will result in inaccurate
data.

The waveform data and preamble must be read (by the controller) or sent
(to the HP 54501A) with two separate commands, DATA and
PREAMBLE.

Sending consecutive :DIGITIZE commands may improve the data

throughput. Refer to the Root Level Command :DIGITIZE for more
information.

HP 54501A Waveform Subsystem

Programming 17-1
Data There are three types of waveform acquisition that can be selected with
the :ACQUIRE:TYPE command. The three types are NORMAL,
Acquisition
AVERAGE, and ENVELOPE. When the data is acquired using the
Types DIGITIZE command the data is placed in the channel buffer of the
specified source.

After a DIGITIZE command the instrument is stopped. If the instrument

is restarted, over the HP-IB or the Front Panel, the data acquired with the
DIGITIZE command will be overwritten.

Note
The on-screen time is divided into a specific number of
horizontal time points as defined by the ^4CQUIRE:POINTS
command. Each of these increments in time is referred to as a
time bucket with each time bucket having a fixed time associated
with it.

Normal Normal data consists of the last data point (hit) in each time bucket. This
data is transmitted over HP-IB in a linear fashion starting with time
bucket 0 and going through time bucket n-1, where n is the number
returned by the WAVEFORM:POINTS query. Time buckets that don't
have data in them return -1. Only the magnitude values of each data point
are transmitted, the time values correspond to the position in the data
array. The first voltage value corresponds to the first time bucket on the
left of the CRT and the last value corresponds to the next to last time
bucket on the right side of the CRT.

Waveform Subsystem HP 54501A

17-2 Programming
 AveraQC Average data consists of the average of the first n hits in a time bucket,
where n is the value returned by the ACQUIRE:COUNT query. Time
buckets that have fewer than n hits return the average of what data they do
have. If the :ACQUIRE:COMPLETE parameter is set to 100% then each
time bucket must contain the number of data hits specified with the
:ACQUIRE:COUNT command. Again, if a time bucket doesn't have any
data in it, it will return -1. This data is transmitted over the HP-IB in a
linear fashion starting with time bucket 0 and proceeding through time
bucket n-1, where n is the number returned by the
WAVEFORM:POINTS query. The first value corresponds to a point at
the left side of the screen and the last value is one point away from the
right side of the screen.

Envelope Envelope data consists of two arrays of data, one containing the minimum
of the first n hits in each time bucket and the other containing the
maximum of the first n hits in each time bucket, where n is the value
returned by the ACQUIRE:COUNT query. If a time bucket does not
have any hits in it, then -1 is returned for both the minimum and maximum
values. The two arrays are transmitted one at a time over the HP-IB
linearly, starting with time bucket 0 (on the left side of the CRT) and
proceeding through time bucket m-1, where m is the value returned by the
WAVEFORM:POINTS query. The array with the minimum values is
sent first. The first value of each array corresponds to the data point on
the left of the CRT. The last value is one data point away from the right
side of the CRT.

The data is transferred from the channel buffer to a controller using the
WAVEFORM:DATA query.

Data is transferred into the instrument from a controller using the

WAVEFORM:DATA command. Envelope data can be transferred into
Waveform Memories 1 and 3, ifWMEMORY 1 is specified as the source,
or Waveform Memories 2 and 4 if WMEMORY 2 is specified as the
source. The data is then transferred as two arrays. If Waveform Memory
1 is specified as the source, the first array is transferred into Waveform

Memory 1 and the second array is transferred into Waveform Memory 3.

If waveform Memory 2 is specified as the source, the first array is

transferred in Waveform Memory 2 and the second array is transferred

into Waveform Memory 4. The data type is then changed to normal for
each of the waveform memories.

HP 54501A Waveform Subsystem

Programming 17-3
Data Data sent from the HP 54501A is raw data and must be scaled for useful
interpretation. The values used to interpret the data are the X and Y
Conversion
references, X and Y origins, and X and Y increments. These values are
read from the waveform preamble.

Conversion from The formula to convert a data value from waveform memories 1-4 to a

Data Value tO voltage value is:

Voltage
voltage =
[(data value yreference)*yincrement]
- + yorigin

Conversion from The time value of a data point can be determined by the position of the
Data Value to Time data point. As an example, the third data point sent with XORIGIN 16 =

ns, XREFERENCE 0, and XINCREMENT

=
2ns. Using
=
the
formula:

time =
[(data point number xreference)*xincrement]
• + xorigin

would result in the following calculation:

time = ((3 0)
-
*
2 ns] + 16 ns = 22 ns.

Waveform Subsystem HP 54501A

17-4 Programming
D3ta Format for There are four formats for transferring waveform data over the HP-IB.
H P-l B These formats are WORD, BYTE, COMPRESSED, and ASCII.
Transfer

WORD, BYTE, and COMPRESSED formatted waveform records are

transmitted using the arbitrary block program data format specified in
IEEE 488.2. ASCII format block data does not use a block header.

When you use this format, the ASCII character string "#S < DD...D >" is
sent before the actual data. The 8 indicates how many < D > 's will follow.
The < D > 's are ASCII numbers, which indicate how many data bytes will
follow.

For example, if 512 points were acquired the Block Header "#800000512"
would be sent. The 8 indicates that eight length bytes follow, 512 indicates
that 512 data bytes (binary) follow.

WORD Format In the WORD format the number of data bytes is twice the number of
words (data points). The number of data points is the value returned by
the :WAVEFORM:POINTS? query. The number of data bytes is followed
by a sequence of bytes representing the data points, with the most
significant byte of each word transmitted first. In this format the data is
shifted so that the most significant bit after the sign bit contains the most
significant bit of the data. If there is a hole in the data, it will be
represented by the 16-bit value of -1. The range of data in the WORD
format is from 0 to 32640.

WORD format is useful in applications where the information is read

directly into an integer array in a controller.

Word and ASCII formatted data returns the most accurate data values.

HP 54501A Waveform Subsystem

Programming 17-5
 BYTE Format BYTE format allows only seven bits to be used to represent the voltage
values, with the first bit being the sign bit. If there is a hole in the data, it
is represented by a value of -1.

BYTE formatted data will transfer over the HP-ffi faster than WORD
formatted data, since one byte per point is transferred in BYTE format
and two bytes per point are transferred in WORD format. BYTE
formatted data has less resolution than WORD formatted data.

COMPRESSED The number of bytes transmitted when the format is COMPRESSED is

Format the same as the value returned by the WAVEFORM:POINTS? query.

Eight bits of resolution are retained in the COMPRESSED format. So

that a hole in the data may be represented, a data value of 255 is mapped
to 254, and 255 is used to represent a hole. This mode will give greater
vertical precision than BYTE formatted data, with faster transfer times
than WORD formatted data, but will probably require more time once
transferred to be unpacked.

ASCII Format ASCII formatted waveform records are transmitted one value at a time,
separated by a comma. The data values transmitted are the same as the
values sent in the WORD FORMAT except that they are converted to an
integer ASCII format (six or less characters) before being sent over the
HP-IB.

Waveform Subsystem HP54501A

17-6 Programming
 Figure 17-1. Waveform Subsystem Commands Syntax Diagram

HP 54501 A Waveform Subsystem

Programming 17-7
 —^-CxiNCremenI?')-

—»/XOR i g i n
?)———

XREFerence7)-

YINCrement?

——^YORigin?^)

^-^YREFerencepV

channel_number =
1,2,3, or 4.

block_data_spec = A block of data in # format.

preamble_data =
Refer to PREAMBLE command.

wmemory_number =
An integer 1 through 4.

Figure 17-1. Waveform Subsystem Commands Syntax Diagram (continued)

Waveform Subsystem HP 54501A

17-8 Programming
 COUNt

COUNt query

The :WAVEFORM:COUNT query will always return a 1 in this

instrument. This query is only included, in this instrument, for
compatibility with other Hewlett-Packard instruments.

The value returned for this query has no meaning for the HP 54501A.

Query Syntax: :WAVeform:couNt?

Returned Format: [:WAVeform:couNt] 1 < NL>

Example: DIM Cnt$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":WAVEFORM:COUNT?"
ENTER 707;Cnt$
PRINT Cnt$

HP 54501A Waveform Subsystem

Programming 17-9
DATA

DATA command/query

The :WAVEFORM:DATA command causes the instrument to accept a

waveform data record over the HP-IB and store it in the previously
specified waveform memory. The waveform memory is specified with a
WAVEFORM:SOURCE command. Only waveform memories may have
waveform data sent to them.

Note

The format of the data being sent must match the format
previously specified by the waveforms preamble for the
destination memory.

The DATA query tells the instrument to output the waveform record
stored in the waveform memory or channel buffer, previously specified
with a :WAVEFORM:SOURCE command, over the HP-IB.

Command Syntax: :WAVe(orm:DATA < binary block data in # format >

Example: OUTPUT 707;°:WAV:DATA'-

Query Syntax: :WAVeform:DATA?

Waveform Subsystem HP 54501A

17-10 Programming
 DATA

Returned Format: [:WAVeform:DATA] <binary block length bytes> < binary block > <NL>

The following program moves data from the HP 54501A to the controller
and then back to the HP 54501A with the :WAVEFORM:DATA query
and command.

Example:

10 CLEAR 707
20 ! SET UP ACQUIRE SUBSYSTEM
30 OUTPUT 707;":ACQUIRE:TYPE NORMAL;COUNT 1; POINTS 512"
40 OUTPUT 707;": DIGITIZE CHANNEL!" ! STORE CHAN 1 DISPLAY TO WMEM1
50 OUTPUT 707;":SYSTEM:HEADER OFF;:EOI ON"
60 OUTPUT 707;":WAVEFORM:SOURCE CHANNELI ;FORMAT WORD" 'SELECT WAVEFORM DATA
70 I SOURCE AND OUTPUT FORMAT
80 OUTPUT 707;":WAVEPORM:DATA?"
90 ENTER 707 USING "#,2A,8D";Headers$, Bytes ! READ LENGTH BYTE
100Lengths Bytes
110Length =Length/2
120ALLOCATE INTEGER Waveform (1: Length)
130ENTER 707 USING "#,W';Waveform (*) ! ENTER WAVEFORM DATA TO INTEGER ARRAY
140ENTER 707 USING °-K,B";End$ ! ENTER TERMINATOR
150DIMPreamble$[200]
160 OUTPUT 707;":WAV:PREAMBLE?" ! OUTPUT WAVE SOURCE PREAMBLE TO CONTROLLER
170 ENTER 707 USING "-K";Preamble$ ! ENTER PREAMBLE INTO CONTROLLER
180 OUTPUT 707;":WAV:SOURCE WMEMORY4" 'CHANGE SOURCE TO WMEMORY 4
190 OUTPUT 707 USING "ilt,K";":WAVEFORM:PREAMBLE ";Preamble$! SEND PREAMBLE FROM
200 ! CONTROLLER TO WMEMORY 4
210 OUTPUT 707 USING "#,k";":WAVEFORM:DATA #800001024" ISEND HEADER
220 OUTPUT 707 USING "W";WAVEFORM(*) ! SEND WAVEFORM DATA TO WMEMORY 4
220 OUTPUT 707;": BLANK CHANNEL1 ;VIEW WMEMORY4"! TURN CHAN 1 OFF-WMEM40N
230 END

Note

In program line 190, the space after

:WAVEFORM:PREAMBLE and before the quote mark is
necessary.

HP 54501A Waveform Subsystem

Programming 17-11
FORMat

FORMat command/query

The :WAVEFORM:FORMAT command sets the data transmission

mode for waveform data output. This command controk how the data is
formatted on the HP-IB when sent from the HP 54501A.

When the ASCII mode is selected, the data is ASCII digits with each data
value separated by a comma.

WORD formatted data transfers as 16-bit binary integers in two bytes,

with the most significant byte of each word sent first.

BYTE and COMPRESSED formatted data is transfered as 8-bit bytes.

The FORMAT query returns the current output format for transfer of
waveform data.

Command Syntax: :WAVeform:FORMat {ASCii | WORD | BYTE | COMPressed}

Example: OUTPUT 707;":WAV: FORMAT WORD"

Query Syntax: :WAVeform: FORMat?

Returned Format: [:WAVeform:PORMat] <modexNL>

Where:

<mode>::= {ASCii | WORD | BYTE | COMPressed}

Example: DIM Frmt$[30]

OUTPUT 707; ":WAV: FORMAT?"
ENTER 707; Frmt$
PRINT Frmt$

Waveform Subsystem HP 54501A

17-12 Programming
 POINts

POINts query

The :WAVEFORM:POINTS query returns the points value in the

currently selected waveform preamble. The points value is the number of
time buckets contained in the waveform selected with the
WAVEFORM:SOURCE command.

In most cases the number of time buckets actually acquired will be the
number of points set in the ACQUIRE subsystem. There are some sweep
speeds where the actual number of points will be less than requested.
These are shown below.

With the sweep speed set to 2 ns per division the number of points
actually acquired will be 32,64,128, or 200.

With the sweep speed set to 5 ns per division the number of points
actually acquired will be 32,64,128,256, or 500.

With the sweep speed set to 10 ns per division the number of points
actually acquired will be 32,64,128,256,500,512, or 1000.

Query Syntax: :WAVetorm:POINts?

Returned Format: [:WAveform: POINts] < value ><NL>

Where:

< value > :: =

number of acquired data points (integer • NR1 format)

Example: Dim Pts$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":WAV:POINTS?"
ENTER 707; Pts$
PRINT Pts$

HP 54501A Waveform Subsystem

Programming 17-13
PREamble

PREamble command/query

The :WAVEFORM:PREAMBLE command sends a waveform preamble

to the previously selected waveform memory in the instrument.

The PREAMBLE query sends a waveform preamble to the controller

from the waveform source.

Command Syntax: :WAVeform;PREamble < preamble block >

Where:

<preamble block > ::= <format NR1 >,<type NR1 >,<points NR1 >,<count
NR3 < xorigin NR3
NR1
>, xincrement >, xreference NR3 >, yincrement
< < <
>,
NR3>,<yorigin NR3>,<yreference NR3>

Query Syntax: :WAVeform;PREamble?

Returned Format: [:WAVeform: PREamble] < preamble block > < ML >

Where:

<preamble block > ::= <format NR1 >,<type NR1 >, < points NR1 >,< count
>,< xincrement NR3 >,< xorigin NR3 >,< xreference
NR1 NR1
>,< yincrement
NR3>,<yorigin NR3>,<yreference NR1 >

Where:

< format > ::= 0 for ASCII format

1 for BYTE format
2 for WORD format
4 for COMPRESSED format

<type> ::= 1 for NORMAL type

2 for AVERAGE type
3 for ENVELOPE type

Waveform Subsystem HP 54501A

17-14 Programming
 PREamble

Example: This example program uses both the command and query form of the
PREAMBLE command. First the preamble is queried (output to the
controller). Then the preamble is returned to the previously selected
waveform memory.

10 DIMPre$[120]
20 OUTPUT 707;"SYSTEM:HEADER OFF"
30 OUTPUT 707;"WAVEFORM: PREAMBLE?"
40 ENTER 707 USING "-K";Pre$
50 OUTPUT 707 USING "#,K";"WAV:PREAMBLE ";Pre$
60 END

Note

In line 50 of the program example, a space is inserted between

the word "PREAMBLE" and the closed quotation mark. This
space must be inside the quotation mark because in this format
(#,K) the data is packed together. Failure to add the space will
produce a word that is not a proper command word.

Example: The following program example brings the preamble in a numeric array.

10 DIMPreamble[1:10]
20 OUTPUT 707;"SYSTEM:HEADER OFF'
30 OUTPUT 707;°WAVEFORM:PREAMBLE?"
40 ENTER 707; Preamble)*)
50 OUTPUT 707;"WAV: PREAMBLE ";Preamble(*)
60 END

HP 54501A Waveform Subsystem

Programming 17-15
SOURce

SOURce command/query

The :WAVEFORM:SOURCE command selects the channel or waveform

memory to be used as the source for the waveform commands.

The SOURCE query returns the currently selected source for the
waveform commands.

Command Syntax: :WAVeform;SOURce {CHANnel{1 I 2 [ 3 I 4} I WMEMory{1 | 2 | 3 | 4}}

Example: OUTPUT 707;":WAV:SOURCE WMEMORY3"

Query Syntax: ;WAVeform:SOURce?

Returned Format: [:WAVeform:SOURce] <souree> <NL>

Where:

<source> ::= {CHANnel{1 | 2 | 3 | 4} | WMEMory{1 | 2 | 3 | 4}}

Example: DIM Src$[30]

OUTPUT 707;":WAVEFORM:SOURCE?"
ENTER 707; Src$
PRINT Sre$

Waveform Subsystem HP 54501A

17-16 Programming
 TYPE

TYPE query

The :WAVEFORM:TYPE query returns the data type for the previously
specified waveform source.

Query Syntax: :wAVeform:TYPE?

Returned Format: [:WAVeform:TYPE] <mode> <NL>

Where:

<mode> ;:= {AVERage [ ENVelope | NORMal}

Example: DIM Typ$[30]

OUTPUT 707;":WAVEFORM:TYPE?"
ENTER 707;Typ$
PRINT Typ$

HP 54501A Waveform Subsystem

Programming 17-17
XINCrement

XINCrement query

The :WAVEFORM:XINCREMENT query returns the x-increment value

currently in the preamble for the current specified source. This value is
the time difference between consecutive data points for NORMAL,
AVERAGE, or ENVELOPE data.

Query Syntax: :WAVeform:XINCrement?

Returned Format: [:WAVeform:XINCrement] < value > < NL>

Where:

< value > :: =

x-increment in the current preamble (exponential -
NR3 format)

Example: DIM xin$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":WAV:XINCREMENT?"
ENTER 707;Xin$
PRINT Xin$

Waveform Subsystem HP 54501A

17-18 Programming
 XORigin

XORigin query

The :WAVEFORM:XORIGIN query returns the x-origin value currently

in the preamble for the current specified source. This value is the time of
the first data point in the memory with respect to the trigger point.

Query Syntax: :WAVeform:XORigin?

Returned Format: [:WAVeform:XORigin] < value >

<NL>

Where:

< value > :: = x-origin value currently in preamble (exponential - NR3 format)

Example: DIM xr$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":WAV:XORIGIN?"
ENTER 707;Xr$
PRINT Xr$

HP 54501A Waveform Subsystem

Programming 17-19
XREFerence

XREFerence query

The :WAVEFORM:XREFERENCE query returns the current

x-reference value in the preamble for the current specified source. This
value specifies the data point associated with the x-origin data value. For
the HP 54501A this value is always zero.

Query Syntax: :WAVeform:XREFerence?

Returned Format: [:WAVe(orm:XREFerence] < value > < ML >

Where:

< value > ::=

x-reference value in the current preamble, always 0
(integer NR1 format)
-

Example: DIM Xrf$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":WAV:XREFERENCE?"
ENTER 707;Xrf$
PRINT Xrf$

Waveform Subsystem HP 54501A

17-20 Programming
 YINCrement

YINCrement query

The :WAVEFORM:YINCREMENT query returns the y-increment value

currently in the preamble for the current specified source. This value is
the voltage difference between consecutive data points.

Query Syntax: :WAVeform:YINCrement?

Returned Format: [:WAVeform:YINCremBnt] < value > <NL>

Where:

< value > :: =

y-increment value in the current preamble (exponential -
NR3 format)

Example: DIM Yin$(50]

OUTPUT 707;":WAV:YINCREMENT7"
ENTER 707;Yin$
PRINT Yin$

HP 54501A Waveform Subsystem

Programming 17-21
YORigin

YORigin query

The :WAVEFORM:YORIGIN query returns the y-origin currently in the

preamble for the current specified source. This value is the voltage at
center screen.

Query Syntax: :WAVeform:YORigin?

Returned Format: [:WAVeform:YORigin] < value > <NL>

Where:

<value> :: = y-origin in the current preamble (exponential -NR3 format)

Example: Dim Yr$[50]

OUTPUT 707;":WAV: YORIGIN?"
ENTER 707;Yr$
PRINT Yr$

Waveform Subsystem HP 54501A

17-22 Programming
 YREFerence

YREFerence query

The :WAVEFORM:YREFERENCE query returns the current

y-reference value in the preamble for the current specified source. This
value specifies the data point where the y-origin occurs.

Query Syntax: :WAVeform:YREFerence?

Returned Format: [:WAVeform:YREFerence] < value > < NL >

Where:

< value > :; =

y-reference value in the current preamble (integer • NR1 format)

Example: DIM Yrf$[50]

OUTPUT 707;"WAV:YREFERENCE?"
ENTER 707;Yrf$
PRINT Yrf$

HP 54501A Waveform Subsystem

Programming 17-23
Algorithms A

Introduction One of the HP 54501A's primary features is its ability to make automatic
measurements on displayed waveforms. This appendix provides details on
how automatic measurements are calculated and offers some tips on how
to improve results.

Measurement Measurements typically should be made at the fastest possible sweep

speed for the most accurate measurement results. The entire portion of
Setup
the waveform that is to be measured must be displayed on the
oscilloscope. That is:

• at least one complete cycle must be displayed for period or frequency

measurements

• the entire pulse must be displayed for width measurements

• the leading edge of the waveform must be displayed for risetime

measurements and all other edge measurements

• the trailing edge of the waveform must be displayed for falltime

measurements and all other edge measurements

Making If more than one waveform, edge, or pulse is displayed, the measurements
are made on the first (leftmost) portion of the displayed waveform that
Measurements
can be used. If there are not enough data points the oscilloscope will
display s with the measurement results. This is to remind you that the
results may not be as accurate as possible. It is recommended that you
re-scale the displayed waveform and make your measurement again.

HP 54501A Algorithms
Programming A-1
 When any of the standard measurements are requested, the HP 54501A
first determines the top-base voltage levels at 100%-0%. From this
information, it can determine the other important voltage values (10%,
90%, and 50%) needed to make the measurements. The 10% and 90%
voltage values are used in the risetime and falltime measurements as well
as in all other edge measurements. The 10% and 90% values are also
used to determine the 50% value. The 50% voltage value is used for
measuring frequency, period, pulse width, and duty cycle.

Automatic Top-Base is the heart of most automatic measurements. It is used to

determine Vtop and Vbase, the 0% and 100% voltage levels at the top and
Top-Base the bottom of the waveform. From this information the oscilloscope can
determine the 10%, 50%, and 90% points, which are also used in most
measurements. The top or base of the waveform is not necessarily the
maximum or minimum voltage present on the waveform. Consider a pulse
that has slight overshoot. It would be wrong to select the highest point of
the waveform as the top since the waveform normally rests below the
perturbation.

Top-Base performs a histogram on the waveform and finds the most

prevalent point above and below the waveform midpoint. The most
prevalent point is one that represents greater than approximately 5% of
the total display points (501) and is considered to be either the top or
base. If no point accounts for more than 5% of the total, then the top is
chosen as the absolute maximum and the base is chosen as the absolute
minimum.

EdQG Definition Both rising and falling edges are defined as transitional edges that must
cross three thresholds.

A rising edge must cross the lower threshold in a positive direction

(defining it as a rising edge), cross the mid threshold (any number of

crossings, both positive and negative are permissible) and then cross the
upper threshold without any crossing of the lower threshold.

Algorithms HP 54501A
A-2 Programming
 A falling edge must cross the upper threshold in a negative direction,
cross the mid threshold (any number of times), and then cross the lower
threshold without crossing the upper threshold.

Note

Most time measurements are made based on the position of the

first crossing of the middle threshold.

AlQOrithrn Following are the definitions that all measurements are based on:

Definitions

delay There are three types of delay measurement:

• jitter
• standard
• user-defined

Jitter occurs only under the following circumstances:

• standard/user-defined key is set to standard

• two delay parameters are the same
• display mode is envelope

if
first edge on minimum waveform is rising

then
delay = mid-threshold of first rising edge of max waveform minus
mid-threshold of first rising edge on min waveform

else
delay=
mid-threshold of first falling edge on min waveform
minus mid-threshold of first falling edge on max waveform

HP 54501A Algorithms
Programming A-3
 The standard delay measurement occurs when in the standard mode (not
user-defined) and is not a jitter measurement.

standard delay = mid-threshold of the first edge of second

parameter minus mid-threshold of the first edge of the first
parameter

Note

Negative delay is possible

User defined delay =

second channel edge minus first channel
edge

+ width The + width algorithm has standard and user-defined considerations.

if
first edge is rising

then
+ width mid-threshold crossing of first falling edge
= •

mid-threshold crossing of first rising edge

else
+ width = mid-threshold crossing of second falling edge-

mid-threshold crossing of first rising edge

User-defined is the same as Standard definition except user-defined

threshold.

HP 54501A
Programming
 •
width The width algorithm has standard and user-defined considerations:
-

if
first edge is rising

then
width
-
=
second rising edge •
first falling edge

else
•
width =
first rising edge first falling edge
•

Period if
first edge is rising

then
period =
second rising edge -
first rising edge

else
period =
second falling edge •
first falling edge

Frequency frequency =
I/period

Duty Cycle duty cycle =

(+ width/period) * 100

Note

+ width is always calculated using mid-threshold.

Risetime risetime =
time at upper threshold -
time at lower threshold

Falttime falltime =
time at lower threshold -
time at upper threshold

Vmax Vmax =
voltage of the maximum point on screen

Vmin Vmin = voltage of the minimum point on screen

Vp-p Vp-p =: Vmax Vmin

•

Vtop Vtop =
most prevalent point above waveform midpoint

HP 54501A
Programming
 Vbase Vbase =
most prevalent point below waveform midpoint

Vamp Vamp =
Vtop Vbase-

Vavg Average voltage of the first cycle of the displayed signal is measured. If a
complete cycle is not present the oscilloscope will average all data points.

Vrms The nns voltage of the first cycle of the displayed signal is measured. If a
complete cycle is not present, the measurement will compute rms on all
data points.

Vj}172
Vrms (ac) = { 1/n £°j.i Vj2 -
1/n S-j^i

Algorithms HP 54501A
A-6 Programming
Example Programs B
Introduction This appendix contains example programs using the command set for the
HP 54501A. In general, they use the long form of the command with
alpha (as opposed to numeric) arguments with each command having a
separate output statement for clarity. To optimize speed, switch to the
concatenated short form numerics.

Throughout these examples, the HP 54501A is assumed to be at address 7,

the hardcopy devices at address 1, and the system bus at 700. The input
signal used is the AC CAL signal from the rear panel of the instrument.
This signal is connected to channel 1 with a 10:1 probe.

All programs were developed on an HP Series 200/300 controller using

HP BASIC 4.0. Several examples use the BASIC command "ENTER 2."
This pauses program execution until the "ENTER" key is depressed on the
controller. This is used to separate different blocks in the example to
dramatize the features, allow for user interaction, or to wait for the
HP 54501A to finish an operation such as a hardcopy output or an
acquisition.

HP 54501A Example Programs

Programming B-1
Vertical This sample program demonstrates some of the commands used to set a
vertical channel, in this case channel 1. The program assumes that the AC
Channel Setup
CAL signal from the rear panel of the instrument is connected to channel
Program 1 through a 10:1 probe. The program sets the probe attenuation factor for

channel 1 to 10:1.

10 CLEAR 707 'Device

!Dev clear cornnand.
20 !ini
!initializes HP-IB registers.
30 !
40 OUTPUT 707 "
EOI ON" !Tur
50 OUTPUT 707 "*"RST" !Res
60 !kno
70 OUTPUT 707 "
AUTOSCALE" 'Aut
80 WAIT 3
90 OUTPUT 707 "
BNC PROBE" 'BNC output to probe mode
100 OUTPUT 707 ACOUIRE:TYPE NORMAL"
"
'Real
'Rea time acquisition
110 OUTPUT 707 "
CHANNELl:PROBE 10" 'Set probe attenuation to 10:1
120 OUTPUT 707 "
CHANNEL 1:RANGE .5" 'Set vertical range to 500 mV •

OUTPUT 707 !Set offset to 0.6 V

"
130 CHANNELl:OFFSET .6"
140 OUTPUT 707 "
CHANNELl COUPLING OC" 'Set coupling to DC
150 REAL Offset,Range 'Set up Offset and Range
160 !as variables
170 INTEGER J 'Set up J as variable
V
180 Offsets 6 'Set Offset variable to 0.6
190 OUTPUT 707;":BEEPER"
200 OUTPUT 707;":SYSTEM:OSP 'PRESS ENTER - OFFSET POSITIONS WAVEFORM ON S

210 ENTER 2
220 OUTPUT 707;":SYSTEM:DSP ""
230 !
240 'The following Unes vary the channel 1 offset
250 !
260 FOR J=l TO 18
270 OUTPUT 707;":CHANNEL1:OFFSET ".Offset" 'Set next offset
!Sets
280 Offset=0ffset-.l
290 WAIT .5
300 NEXT J
310 !

320 OUTPUT 707;":BEEPER"

330 OUTPUT 707;":SYSTEM:OSP 'PRESS ENTER -

VERTICAL RANGE SCALES SIGNAL'"
340 ENTER 2
350 OUTPUT 707;":SYSTEM:OSP ""
Example Programs HP 54501A
B-2 Programming
360 !
370 OUTPUT 707;":CHANNEL1:OFFSET 'Center screen at -400 mV
-.4"
380 OUTPUT 707;":CHANNEL 1:RANGE .88" 'Set vertical range to 880 mV
390 Range=.88 'Sets Range variable to 880 mV
400 !
410 !The following lines vary the vertical range
420 !
430 FOR J=l TO 35
440 OUTPUT 707;":CHANNEL1:RANGE ";Range 'Sets new range
450 Range=Range+.05
460 WAIT
.3
470 NEXT J
480 !
490 !
500 OUTPUT 707;":SYSTEM:DSP 'ENO OF PROGRAM'"

510 WAIT 15
520 OUTPUT 707;":SYSTEM:OSP ""
530 LOCAL 707 [Returns instrument to local
540 END

HP 54501A Example Programs

Programming B-3
Timebase This sample program demonstrates some of the commands in the
TIMEBASE subsystem. The program assumes that the AC CAL signal
Program
from the rear panel of the instrument is connected to channel 1 through a

10:1 probe.

10 CLEAR 707 'Device clear command.

20 •initializes HP-IB registers.
30
40 OUTPUT 707;":EOI ON" 'Turn on EOI
50 OUTPUT 707;"*RST" •Reset instrument to
60 •known state
70 OUTPUT 707;":AUTOSCALE" 'Autoscales the unit
80 WAIT 3
90 REAL Sens,Tdelay •Set up Sens and Tdelay
100 !as variables
110 INTEGER J 'Set up J as variable
120 OUTPUT 707;":BNC PROBE" !BNC output to probe mode
130 OUTPUT 707;":ACQUIRE:TYPE NORMAL" 'Real time acquisition
140 OUTPUT 707;":TIMEBASE:RANGE 5E-4" 'Set timebase to 50 us/div
150 OUTPUT 707;":TIMEBASE:DELAY 0 'Set delay to zero
160 OUTPUT 707;":TIMEBASE:REFERENCE CENTER" 'Delay reference at
170 •center of graticule
180
190 OUTPUT 707;":BEEPER"
200 OUTPUT 707;":SYSTEM:OSP •PRESS ENTER - DELAY FROM TRIGGER EVENT WILL CHANGE'"

210 ENTER 2
220 OUTPUT 707;":SYSTEM:DSP
230 Tde1ay=0 'Set Tdelay to zero
240
250 'The following lines vary the timebase delay
260 i

270 FOR J=l TO 18

280 OUTPUT 707;":TIMEBASE:DELAY ";Tde1ay
290 Tde1ay=Tde1ay+4E-5
300 WAIT
.3
310 NEXT J
320 i

330
340 OUTPUT 707;":BEEPER"
350 OUTPUT 707;":SYSTEM:DSP "PRESS ENTER HORIZONTAL TIME WILL CHANGE'"
360 ENTER 2

Example Programs HP 54501A

B-4 Programming
370 OUTPUT 707;":SYSTEM:DSP ""
380 !
390 Sens=2E-2 'Set Sens variable to 20 ms
400 OUTPUT 707;"TIMEBASE:DELAY 0" 'Set delay to zero
410 !
420 'The following lines vary the horizontal timebase range
430 !
440 FOR J=l TO 15
450 OUTPUT 707;":TIMEBASE:RANGE ";Sens
460 Sens=Sens/1.7
470 WAIT
.3
480 NEXT J
490 !
500 !
510 OUTPUT 707;":SYSTEM:DSP ''END OF PROGRAM'"
520 WAIT 15
530 OUTPUT 707;":SYSTEM:DSP ""
540 LOCAL 707 'Returns instrument to local
550 END

HP 54501A Example Programs

Programming B-5
Measurement This sample program demonstrates some of the commands in the
MEASURE subsystem. The program assumes that the AC CAL signal
Setup Program
from the rear panel of the instrument is connected to channel 1 through a

10:1 probe.

10 CLEAR 707 •Device clear command.

20 'Initializes HP-IB registers.
30 !
40 OUTPUT 707;":EOI ON" 'Turn on EOI
50 OUTPUT 707;"*RST" 'Reset instrument to
60 !known state
70 DIM Measure$[400]
80 OUTPUT 707 "
SYSTEM:HEADER ON" 'Turn headers on for queries
90 OUTPUT 707 "
AUTOSCALE" !Autosca1es the unit
100 WAIT 3
110 OUTPUT 707 "
BNC PROBE" !BNC output to probe mode
120 OUTPUT 707 "
ACQUIRE:TYPE NORMAL" 'Set display mode to normal
130 OUTPUT 707 "
TIMEBASE:RANGE 2E-3" !200 uS per division
140 !
150 OUTPUT 707 "
CHANNELl:PROBE 10" !Attenuation to 10:1
160 OUTPUT 707 CHANNEL1:RAN6E (Channel 1 to 1.2 V full scale
"

1.2"
170 OUTPUT 707 "
CHANNELl:OFFSET -.4" !Channel centered at -.4 V
180 !

190 OUTPUT 707 "

TRIGGER:MODE EDGE" !Edge triggering
OUTPUT 707 TRIGGER:SLOPE POSITIVE" 'Trigger on positive edge
"
200
210 !
220 OUTPUT 707 "
DISPLAY:FORMAT 1" !Fu11 screen display
230 OUTPUT 707 "
VIEW CHANNELl"
240 OUTPUT 707 "
BLANK CHANNEL2"

250 OUTPUT 707 "

01 SPLAY:VMARKER ON" !Turn on Vmarkers
260 OUTPUT 707 "
DOSPLAY:TMARKER ON" 'Turn on Tmarkers
270 !

280 OUTPUT 707 "

MEASURE:SOURCE CHANNEL!' 'Channel 1 is the
290 'measurement source
300 OUTPUT 707 "
MEASURE:VSTART 'Sets voltage markers to
-.4"
310 OUTPUT 707
"
MEASURE:VSTOP
-.4" !-0.4 V. This will be used as
320 !a reference for the edge
330 •find function.
340 OUTPUT 707;":BEEPER"
350 OUTPUT 707;":SYSTEM:OSP 'PRESS ENTER TIME MARKERS MOVE TO SIGNAL EDGES'"
360 ENTER 2 'This causes a pause in

Example Programs HP 54501A

B-6 Programming
370 'the program. Press ENTER on
380 'the controller to continue.
390 OUTPUT 707;":SYSTEM:DSP ""
400 !
410 INTEGER J !Set up J as variable
420 !
430 'The following lines move the time markers between
440 'signal edges
450 !
460 FOR J=l TO 3
470 OUTPUT 707;": MEASURE.-ESTART ";J 'Find Jth positive edge
480 WAIT .75
490 OUTPUT 707;":MEASURE:ESTOP ";-J !Find Jth negative edge
500 WAIT .75
510 NEXT J
520 !
530 OUTPUT 707;":BEEPER"
540 OUTPUT 707;":SYSTEM:OSP 'PRESS ENTER -
INCREMENT VOLTAGE AND TIME MARKERS'"
550 ENTER 2
560 OUTPUT 707;":SYSTEM:DSP ""
570 !
580 !
590 REAL Tdelay.Voffset 'Set up Tdelay and Voffset
600 !as variables
610 Tde1ay=0 Unitialize Tdelay variable
620 Voffset=0 "Initialize Toffset variable
630 !
640 'The following lines move the time and voltage start and
650 'stop markers
660 !
670 FOR J=l TO 21
680 OUTPUT 707;":MEASURE:TSTART
";-l.E-3-Tde1ay 'Move time start marker
690 OUTPUT 707;":MEASURE:TSTOP ";l.E-3+Tde1ay 'Move time stop marker
700 OUTPUT 707;":MEASURE:VSTART 'Move voltage start marker
";-.4-Voffset
710 OUTPUT 707;":MEASURE:VSTOP ";-.4+Voffset "Move voltage stop marker
720 Tde1ay=Tde1ay-l.E-4
730 Voffset»Voffset-4E-2
740 NEXT J
750 !
760 OUTPUT 707; ".-BEEPER"
770 OUTPUT 707;":SYSTEM:DSP 'PRESS ENTER TO MAKE AUTOMATIC MEASUREMENTS'"
780 ENTER 2
790 OUTPUT 707;":SYSTEM:DSP ""
800 !

HP 54501A Example Programs

Programming B-7
810 OUTPUT 707;":MEASURE:ALL?" !Measure all parameters
820 !
830 'The results of the MEASURE ALL query will be displayed on the scope,
840 'and are available over HP-IB
850 !
860 ENTER 707 USING "-K";Measure$
870 PRINT USING "K";Measure$
880 !
890 OUTPUT 707;":BEEPER"
900 OUTPUT 707;":SYSTEM"OSP 'PRESS ENTER TO ACCURATELY MEASURE RISE TIME'"
910 ENTER 2
920 OUTPUT 707;":SYSTEM:OSP ""
930 !

940 OUTPUT 707;":TIMEBASE:RANGE 5E-4 'Expand the display

950 WAIT 2 'Must wait to acquire new data
960 'after changing the timebase
970 'range
980 OUTPUT 707;":MEASURE:RISETIME?" 'Measure the rise time
990 !

1000 ENTER 707;Measure$

1010 PRINT Measure$
1020 !
1030 OUTPUT 707;":SYSTEM:DSP 'ENO OF PROGRAM'"
1040 WAIT 15
1050 OUTPUT 707;":SYSTEM:OSP ""
1060 LOCAL 707 'Returns instrument to local
1070 ENO

Example Programs HP 54501A

B-8 Programming
Digitize This sample program demonstrates some of the commands used to
digitize a waveform. The program assumes that the AC CAL signal from
Program the rear panel of the instrument is connected to channel 1 through a 10:1
probe.

10 CLEAR 707 !Device clear command.

20 !initia1izes HP-IB registers.
30 i

40 OUTPUT 707;":EOI ON" !Turn on EOI

50 OUTPUT 707;"*RST" !Reset instrument to
60 'known state
70 OUTPUT 707;":AUTOSCALE" 'Autoscales the unit
80 WAIT 3
90 OUTPUT 707;":BNC PROBE" !BNC output to probe mode
100
110
120 OUTPUT 707 ACQUIRE:TYPE NORMAL" !Set display mode to normal
130 OUTPUT 707 CHANNELl:PROBE 10" !Set probe attenuation to 10:1
140 OUTPUT 707 CHANNEL1:RANGE 1.6" Set vertical range to 1.6 V
150 OUTPUT 707 CHANNELl:OFFSET 'Set offset to -0.4 V
-.4"
160 OUTPUT 707 CHANNELl COUPLING DC" !Set coupling to DC
170 OUTPUT 707 TIMEBASE:RANGE 1E-7" '10 ns per division
180 !
190 i

200 OUTPUT 707;":WAVEFORM:SOURCE CHANNELl" 'Selects channel 1 as the source

210 OUTPUT 707;":ACQUIRE:COMPLETE 30" !30X completion criteria for
220 'each acquisition
230 OUTPUT 707;":ACQUIRE:POINTS 32" !32 points for
240 'each acquisition record
250 OUTPUT 707;":DI6ITIZE CHANNELl"
260 REAL Pts.Cmp 'Set up Pts and Cmp
270 !as variables
280 INTEGER J 'Set up J as a variable
290 OUTPUT 707;":BEEPER"
300 OUTPUT 707;":SYSTEM:DSP 'PRESS ENTER -
CHANGES NUMBER OF POINTS DISPLAYED'"
310 ENTER 2
320 OUTPUT 707;":SYSTEM:DSP ""
330 Pts=32 •Set Pts variable to 32
340 i

350 'The following lines increase the number of points for

360 "each acquisition record
HP 54501A Example Programs
Programming B-9
 !
FOR J=l TO 5
OUTPUT 707;":ACQUIRE:POINTS ";Pts !Sets new points
OUTPUT 707;":OI6ITIZE CHANNELl"

Pts=Pts*2
WAIT 2
NEXT J
i

OUTPUT 707;":BEEPER"
OUTPUT 707;":SYSTEM:DSP 'PRESS ENTER - CHANGE COMPLETION CRITERIA'"
ENTER 2
OUTPUT 707;":SYSTEM:DSP ""
OUTPUT 707;":ACQUIRE:POINTS 128" !128 points for
!each acquisition record
Cmp=100 !Sets Cnip variable to 100

'The following lines reduce the completion criteria for

!each acquisition
!
FOR J=l TO 7
OUTPUT 707;":ACQUIRE:COMPLETE ";Cmp !Sets new completion criteria
OUTPUT 707;":DIGITIZE CHANNELl"
Cmp=CMP-15
WAIT 2
NEXT J

OUTPUT 707;":SYSTEM:OSP 'END OF PROGRAM'"

WAIT 15
OUTPUT 707;":SYSTEM:DSP ""
LOCAL 707 'Returns instrument to local
END

Example Programs HP 54501A

B-10 Programming
Hardcopy This sample program demonstrates some of the commands in the
HARDCOPY subsystem. The service request is used to detect when the
Program printing is complete. The program assumes that a graphics printer is used
(Service and its address is set to 1.
Request
using OPC)

10 CLEAR 707 'Device clear command.

20 !initializes HP-IB registers.
OUTPUT ON"
30 707;":EOI 'Turn on EOI
40 ON INTR 7.5 GOTO 220 !Exit printing routine
50 'after SRO
60 ENABLE INTR 7;2 •Enables SRQ on bus #7
70 OUTPUT 707 "*CLS" !C1ear status data structures
80 OUTPUT 707 "*ESE 1" !Enab1e OPC
90 OUTPUT 707 "*SRE 32" 'Enable Event Status Register
100 •Interrupt
110 OUTPUT 707 ":HARDCOPY:PAGE AUTOMATIC"
120 OUTPUT 707 ":HARDCOPY:LENGTH 12"
130 OUTPUT 707 ":PRINT?;*OPC" !Set OPC when the
140 •print is complete
150 SEND 7.UNT UNL !C1ears bus
160 SEND 7;TALK 7 •Puts the scope in talk mode
170 SEND 7;LISTEN 1 !Te11s printer to listen
180 SEND 7;DATA •Lowers ATN line @ controller
190 GOTO 190 •Loops until printing is
200 •complete and interrupt
210 !is generated
220 A=SPOLL(707) •dear service request
230 OUTPUT 707;":SYSTEM:DSP 'PRINT IS COMPLETE"'
240 WAIT 15
250 OUTPUT 707;":SYSTEM:DSP ""
260 END

HP 54501A Example Programs

Programming B-11
Waveform This sample program
pro demonstrates how to use some of the commands in
HP 54501A to make a waveform template for comparing waveforms.
theHP54501At
the
Template This program assumes
as that the AC CAL signal from the rear panel of the
Program is
instrument connected
cor to channel 1 through a 10:1 probe.

10 CLEAR 707 (Device clear command.

20 'initializes HP-IB registers.
30 OUTPUT 707; ":EOI ON" 'Turn on EOI
40 OPTION BASE 0 !Se1ect default option base
50 OUTPUT 707, "*RST" 'Reset instrument to
60 'known state
70 OUTPUT 707 "•.AUTOSCALE" !Autosca1es the unit
80 WAIT 3
90 DIM Preainb1e$ [200]
100 DIM Preambfl 10)
110 !
120 OUTPUT 707; "
BNC PROBE" !BNC output to probe mode
130 OUTPUT 707 "
CHANNELl:PROBE 10" 'Set probe attenuation to 10:1
140 OUTPUT 707 "
CHANNELl:RANGE 1.6" !Set vertical range to 1.6 V
150 OUTPUT 707 "
CHANNELl:OFFSET 'Set offset to -0.4 V
-.4"
160 OUTPUT 707 "
CHANNELl:COUPLING DC" 'Set coupling to DC
170 !
180 !
190 !
200 OUTPUT 707;":TIMEBASE :DELAY 0" !Set delay to zero
210 OUTPUT 707 ":TIMEBASE:MODE TRIGGERED" (Triggered timebase mode
220 OUTPUT 707 ":TIMEBASE:RANGE 5E-4" '50 uS per division

230 OUTPUT 707;":TIMEBASE:REFERENCE CENTER' 'Display reference

240 !to center screen
250 !
260 OUTPUT 707 "
TRIGGER LEVEL 'Set trigger level to -.4
-.4"
270 OUTPUT 707 "
TRIGGER MODE EDGE" 'Edge triggering
280 !
290 OUTPUT 707 "
ACQUIRE COMPLETE 100 !100X completion criteria
300 OUTPUT 707 "
ACQUIRE TYPE AVERAGE !Set display mode to average
310 OUTPUT 707 "
ACQUIRE COUNT 4" !4 values averaged
320 OUTPUT 707 "
ACQUIRE POINTS 512" '512 points per
330 'acquisition record
340 !
350 OUTPUT 707;":DISPLAY:CONNECT ON" !Turn on connect-the-dots
360 'function

Example Programs HP 54501A

B-12 Programming
370 OUTPUT 707 ":OISPLAY:6RATICULE FRAME"
380 !
390 OUTPUT 707 ":SYSTEM:HEADER OFF" •Turn headers off
400 OUTPUT 707 ":WAVEFORM:SOURCE CHANNELl" !Se1ects channel 1 as
410 •the waveform source
420 OUTPUT 707 ":WAVE FORM:FORMAT WORD" 'WORD format for data
430 'transfers
440 OUTPUT 707 ":OIGITIZE CHANNELl"
450 OUTPUT 707 ":WAVEFORM:PREAMBLE?" !0utput waveform preamble
460 'to controller
470 ENTER 707;Preamb(*)
480 OUTPUT 707;":WAVEFORM:PREAMBLE?" 'Output waveform preamble
490 'to controller
500 ENTER 707 USING "-K";Preamb1e$
510 OUTPUT 707;":WAVEFORM:OATA?" 'Output waveform record
520 'to controller
530 ENTER 707 USING "))i,2A,8D";Header$, Bytes
540 Length=Bytes/2
550 i

560 ALLOCATE INTEGER Waveform; 1: Length) ,Wavemax(l:Length) ,Waveniin(l Length)

570 ENTER 707 USING "ii',W";Waveform(*)
580 ENTER 707 USING "-K,B";End$
590 i

600 •The following lines set the voltage and time tolerance limits
610 !a percent of fu11 scale
620 !
630 Vo1tto1=5 !5% of full scale voltage
640 Timeto1=5 !5% of full screen width
650 !
660 Timetics=INT(512-l•Timeto^/100)
670 Vo1ttics=INT(2*Preamb(lO)*Vo1ttoVlOO)
680 MAT Wavemin=Waveform !Copy the waveform into the
690 !min template memory
700 MAT Wavemax=Waveform 'Copy the waveform into the
710 !max template memory
720 FOR Timecntr=l TO Length !This is the time bucket where
730 'the center of the ellipse
740 !is located
750 PRINT Timecntr !This counter te11s you which
760 (time bucket the program is
770 'currently calculating
780 FOR Time pt=(Tiine cntr-Time tics) TO (Time cntr+Time tics) !This loop increments along the
790 'time axis of the ellipse
800 IF Timept>0 AND Timept<=Length THEN

HP 54501A Example Programs

Programming B-13
810 Vo1t_pt=Vo1t_tics*SQR(l-((Time_pt-Time_cntr)/Time_tics)"
820 Vo 1t_niax=Wavefonn (T i me_cnt r) +Vo 1t_pt
830 Vo1t_min=Wavefonn(Time_cnti-)-Vo1t_pt
840 IF Waveniax(Time_pt)<VoTt_max THEN
850 Wavemax(T ime_pt)=Vo1tjnax
860 END IF
870 IF Waveinin(Time_pt)>Vo1t_min THEN
880 WavemintTiii^ptl^Vo'ltjnin
890 END IF
900 END IF
910 NEXT Time_pt
920 NEXT T1me_cntr
930 OUTPUT 707;":WAVEFORM:SOURCE WMEMORY2" !Selects Wmemory 2
940 !as source
950 OUTPUT 707 USING "(t,K";": WAVEFORM: PREAMBLE ";Preamb1e$ 'Send waveform
960 'preamble to Wmeinory 2
970 OUTPUT 707 USING ")?,K";":WAVEFORM:DATA if'800001024" •Send waveform
980 !record to Wmemory 2
990 OUTPUT 707 USING "W";Wavemin(*)
1000 OUTPUT 707;":VIEW WMEMORY2"
1010 OUTPUT 707;":WAVEFORM:SOURCE WMEMORY1" 'Selects Winemory 1
1020 !as source
1030 OUTPUT 707 USING ")»,K";":WAVEFORM:PREAMBLE ";Preamb1e$ 'Send waveform
1040 'preamble to Wmemory 1
1050 OUTPUT 707 USING "it. K";": WAVEFORM: DATA C800001024" 'Send waveform
1060 'record to Wmemory 1
1070 OUTPUT 707 USING "W";Wavemax(*)
1080 OUTPUT 707;":VIEW WMEMORY1"
1090 Funct_range=Range_va1ue*2
1100 Range$=Va1$(Funct_range)
1110 OUTPUT 707 FUNCTION!:SUBSTRACT WMEMORY1,CHANNELl" !Set up function 1
1120 OUTPUT 707 FUNCTION1:RANGE ";Range$
1130 OUTPUT 707 FUNCTION2:SUBTRACT CHANNELl,WMEMORY2" 'Set up function 2
1140 OUTPUT 707 FUNCTION2:RANGE ";Range$
1150 OUTPUT 707 VIEW FUNCTIONI"
1160 OUTPUT 707 VIEW FUNCTION2"
1170 OUTPUT 707 RUN"
1180 OUTPUT 707 MEASURE:STATISTICS ON" !Turn statistics on
1190 OUTPUT 707 MEASURE:DESTINATION OFF"
1200 OUTPUT 707 MEASURE:SOURCE FUNCTION!"
1210 WAIT 1
1220 OUTPUT 707 MEASURE:VMIN"
1230 OUTPUT 707 MEASURE:SOURCE FUNCTION2"
1240 WAIT 1

Example Programs HP 54501A

B-14 Programming
1250 OUTPUT 707;":MEASURE:VMIN"
1260 OUTPUT 707;":MEASURE:COMPARE VMIN,200,0"
1270 OUTPUT 707;":MEASURE:LIMITTEST MEASURE-
1280 OUTPUT 707;":MEASURE:POSTFAILURE STOP"
1290 END

HP 54501A Example Programs

Programming B-15
Quick Reference Guide

The following section lists the commands and queries with their
corresponding arguments and returned formats. The arguments for each
command list the minimum argument required. The returned format
listed assumes that HEADERS are off. The part of the command or
query listed in uppercase letters refers to the short form of that command
or query. The long form is the combination of uppercase and lowercase
letters.

The following definitions are used:

< block data > ::= definite length block data

< integer > :: integer NR1 format
= -

< real number > :: exponential NR3 format

= -

< string > ::= string of alphanumeric characters

< measurement > ::= name of measurement
<
upper > :: high limit value
=

< lower >

::= low limit value

The suffix multipliers available for arguments are:

EX::=1E18 M::=1E-3
PE::=1E15 U::=1E-6
T:: = 1E12 N:: =
1E-9
G::=1E9 P::=1E-12
MA:: = 1E6 F:: =
1E-15
K::=1E3 A::=1E-18

For more information on specific commands or queries, refer to the

specific command or query in the programming reference manual.

HP 54501A
Programming Quick Reference Guide-1
 Command Argument Returned Format

Common Commands

*CLS
*ESE {0 -
255}
*ESE? {0 -
255}
*ESR? {0 -
255}
*IDN? <string>

*IST? {1 or 0}
*LRN? —
<b1ock data>
*OPC
*OPC? {1}
*OPT? {0}

*PRE {0 -
255}
*PRE? {0 -
255}
*RCL {0 -
4}
*RST
*SAV {1 -
4}

*SRE {0 -
255}
*SRE? {0 -
255}
*STB? {0 - 255}
*TRG
*TST? <integer>

*WAI

HP 54501A
Quick Reference Guide-2 Programming
 Command Argument Returned Format

Root Level Commands

:AUTosca1e
..
:BEEPer
-- --
{ON or 1} —

{OFF or 0} —

:BEEPer? —
{1 or 0}
:BLANk {CHANnel 1 -
4} —

{FUNCtion 1 or 2} —

{WMEMory 1 4}
- —

{PMEMory 1 or 2} —

DIGitize {CHANnel 1 4}
- —

EOI {ON or 1}
--
{OFF or 0} —

EOI? —
{1 or 0}
ERASe {PMEMory
0-2} —

LER? —
{1 or 0}
LTER? {1 or 0}
--
MENU {TIMebase}
{CHANnel} —

{TRIGger} —

{DISPlay} —

{DELTa} —

{MATH} —

{SAVE} —

{MEASure} —

{UTILity} —

{SHOW}

HP 54501A
Programming Quick Reference Guide-3
 Command Argument Returned Format

:MENU? {CHANnel}
{TRIGger}
{DISPlay}
{DELTa}
{MATH}
{SAVE}
{MEASure}
{UTILity}
1{SHOW}
MERGe {PMEMoryl or 2}
PRINt?
RUN

SERial <string>
STOP

STORe {CHANnel 1 -
4},{WMEMory 1 -
4}
{FUNCtion 1 or 2},{WMEMory 1 4} -

{WMEMory 1 4},{WMEMory 1
-
4} -

:TER? {1 or 0}
:VIEW {CHANnel 1 -
4}
{FUNCtion I or 2}
{WMEMory I 4}
-

{PMEMory I or 2}

HP 54501A
Quick Reference Guide-4 Programming
 Command Argument Returned Format

System Subsystem Commands

:SYSTem:DSP <string>
:SYSTeni:DSP? <string>
:SYSTem:ERRor? <integer>
{NUMBer} <integer>
{STRing} <integer>,<string>
SYSTeni:HEADer {ON or 1}
{OFF or 0}
SYSTem:HEADer? {1 or 0}

SYSTem:KEY {1 -
44}
SYSTem:KEY? {0 -
44}
SYSTem:LON6fon7i {ON or 1}
{OFF or 0}
SYSTeni:LON6forni? {1 or 0}
SYSTem:SETup <b1ock data>

SYSTem:SETup? <b1ock data>

HP 54501A
Programming Quick Reference Guide-5
 Command Argument Returned Format

Acquire Subsystem Commands

:ACOuire:COMP1ete {0 -
100}
:ACQuire:COMP1ete? {0 -
100}
:ACQuire:COUNt {1 -
2048}
:ACOuire:COUNt? {1 -
2048}
:ACQuire:POINts {32 -
1024}

:ACQuire:POINts? {32 -
1024}
:ACQuire:TYPE {NORMal}
{AVERage}
{ENVelope}
ACQuire:TYPE? {NORMal}
{AVERage}
{ENVelope}

Calibrate Subsystem Commands

:CALibrate:TNUL1 <rea1 number:-,<rea1 nuinber>,

<rea1 nuniber>
:CALibrate:TNUL1? <rea1 nuniber>,<rea1 number>,
<rea1 number>

HP 54501A
Quick Reference Guide-6 Programming
 Command Argument Returned Format

Channel Subsystem Commands

CHANne1{l -
4}:COUP11ng {AC}
{DC}
{DCFifty}
;CHANne1{l -
4}:COUP1ing? {AC}
{DC}
{DCFifty}
:CHANne1{l -
4}:ECL
;CHANne1{l -
4}:HFReject {ON or 1}
{OFF or 0}
;CHANne1{l -

4}:HFReject? {1 or 0}

:CHANne1{l 4}:OFFSet <rea1 number>

;CHANne1{l 4}:OFFSet? <rea1 number>
:CHANne1{l 4}:PROBe {0.9 -
1000}
:CHANne1{l 4}:PROBe? {0.9 -
1000}
:CHANne1{l 4}:RANGe <rea1 number>

:CHANne1{l - 4}:RAN6e? <rea1 nuniber>

:CHANne1{l -
4}:TTL

HP 54501A
Programming Quick Reference Guide-7
 Command Argument Returned Format

Display Subsystem Commands

DISP1ay:COLumn {0 72}
..
-

DISP1ay:COLunin? —
{0 -
72}
DISP1ay:CONNect {ON or 1}
--
{OFF or 0} —

DISP1ay:CONNect? —
{1 or 0}
DISP1ay:DATA <b1ock data>
--
DISP1ay:DATA? <b1ock data>
--
DISP1ay:FORMat {1, 2, or 4} —

DISP1ay:FORMat? —

{1, 2, or 4}
DISP1ay:GRATicu1e {OFF} —

{GRID} —

{AXES}
--
{FRAMe} —

:DISP1ay:GRATicu1e? —
{OFF}
—
{GRID}
—
{AXES}
{FRAMe}
--
:DISP1ay:INVerse {ON or 1}
--
{OFF or 0} —

:DISP1ay:INVerse? —
{1 or 0}
:DISP1ay:LINE <string> --
:DISP1ay:MASK {0 255}
- —

:OISP1ay:MASK? {0 255}
--
-

:OISP1ay:PERSistence {INFinite} --
{SINGIe} —

{0.1 -
11} —

:DISP1ay:PERSistence? —

{INFinite}
—
{SINGIe}
—

{0.1 -
11}
:DISP1ay:ROW {0 24}
--
-

:DISPlay:ROW? —
{0 -
24}
:DISP1ay:SCReen {ON or 1}
--
{OFF or 0}

HP 54501 A
Quick Reference Guide-8 Programming
 Command Argument Returned Format

DISP1ay:SCReen? {1 or 0}
OISP1ay:SOURce {PMEMory
0-3}
DISP1ay:SOURce? {PMEMory 0 -
3}
DISP1ay:STRing <string>
DISP1ay:TEXT {BLANk}

:DISP1ay:TMARker {ON or 1}
{OFF or 0}
:DISP1ay:TMARker? {1 or 0}
:DISP1ay:VMARker {ON or 1}
{OFF or 0}
:DISP1ay:VMARker? {1 or 0}

Function Subsystem Commands

:FUNCt1on{l or 2}:ADD {CHANnel 4}

1-4}, {CHANnel 1 -

{CHANnel 4}
1-4}, {WMEMory 1 -

4}
{WMEMory
1-4}, {CHANnel 1 -

{WMEMory 4}
1-4}, {WMEMory 1
-

:FUNCt1on{l or 2}:INVert {CHANnel 1 -

4}
{WMEMory 1 -
4}
:FUNCt1on{l or 2}:MULTip1y {CHANnel {CHANnel 1 4}
1-4} -

{CHANnel {WMEMory 1 4}
1-4} -

{WMEMory {CHANnel 1 4}
1-4} -

{WMEMory {WMEMory 1 4}
1-4} -

FUNCtion{l or 2}:OFFSet <rea1 nuniber>

FUNCtion{l or 2}:OFFSet? <rea1 number>

FUNCtion{l or 2}:ONLY {CHANnel 1 -

4}
{WMEMory 1 -
4}
FUNCtion{l or 2} RANGe <rea1 nuinber>
FUNCtion{l or 2} RANSe? <rea1 number>
FUNCtion{l or 2} SUBTract {CHANnel 1 4},{CHANnel 1 -
4}
{CHANnel 1 4},{WMEMory 1 -
4}
{WMEMory 1 4},{CHANnel 1 -
4}
{WMEMory 1 4},{WMEMory 1 -
4}

HP 54501A
Programming Quick Reference Guide-9
 Command Argument Returned Format

:PUNCtion{l or 2}:VERSus {CHANnel 1 4},{CHANnel 1 -

4}
{CHANnel 1 4},{WMEMory 1 -
4}
{WMEMory 1 4},{CHANnel 1 -
4}
{WMEMory 1 4},{WMEMory 1 -
4}

Hardcopy Subsystem Commands

:HARDcopy:LENGth {11 or 12}

:HARDcopy:LENGth? {11 or 12}
:HARDcopy:PA6E {MANual}
{AUTomatic}
:HARDcopy:PAGE? {MANual}
{AUTomatic}

Measure Subsystem Commands

:MEASure:ALL? <rea1 nuniber>,...

:MEASure:COMPare <nieasureinent>, <upper>, < 1ower>
:MEASure:COMPare? •(measurements <rea1 number>,<rea1 number>
:MEASure:CURSor? {DELTa} <rea'l number>,<rea1 nuinber>
{STARt} <rea1 number>,<rea1 number>
{STOP} <rea1 number>,<rea1 number>
:MEASure:DEFine {DELay}.<rea1 nuniber>,...
{PWIDth},{MIDD1e}
{PWIDth},{UPPer}
{PWIDth},{LOWer}
{NWIDth},{MIDD1e}
{NWIDth},{UPPer}
{NWIDth},{LOWer}

HP 54501A
Quick Reference Guide-10 Programming
 Command Argument Returned Format

:MEASure:DEFine? {DELay} <rea1 number>,...

{PWIDth} {MIODIe}
{PWIDth} {UPPer}
{PWIDth} {LOWer}
{NWIDth} {MIDDte}
{NWIDth} {UPPer}
{NWIDth} {LOWer}
:MEASure:DELay — —

:MEASure:DELay? —

<rea1 number>
: MEASure: DEST mat ion {WMEMory 1 -
4} —

{PMEMory 1 or 2} —

{OFF} —

:MEASure:OESTination? —
{WMEMory 1 -
4}
—
{PMEMory 1 or 2}
{OFF}
--
:MEASure DUTycycle
-- --
:MEASure DUTycycle? —

<rea1 number>
:MEASure ESTArt <+ or -><integer> —

:MEASure ESTArt? —

<integer>
:MEASure ESTOp <+ or -><integer>
--
:MEASure ESTOp? <integer>
--
:MEASure FALLtime
-- --
:MEASure FALLtime? —

<rea1 number>
:MEASure FREQuency — —

:MEASure FREQuency? <rea1 number>

--
:MEASure LIMittest {MEASure}
--
{OFF} —

:MEASure LOWer <rea1 nuniber>

--
:MEASure LOWer? <rea1 nuniber>
--
:MEASure MODE {STANdard} —

{USER} —

:MEASure MODE? —
{STANdard}
{USER}

HP 54501A
Programming Quick Reference Guide-11
 Command Argument Returned Format

:MEASure:NWIDth
:MEASure:NWIDth? <rea1 nuniber>
:MEASure:OVERshoot
:MEASure:OVERshoot? <rea1 number>
MEASure:PERiod

MEASure:PERiod? <rea1 nuniber>

MEASure:POSTfai1ure {CONTinue}
{STOP}
MEASure:POSTfai1ure? {CONTinue}
{STOP}
MEASure PRECision {COARse}
MEASure PRECision? {COARse}

MEASure PREShoot
MEASure PREShoot? <rea1 number>
MEASure PUIDth
MEASure PWIDth? <rea1 number>
MEASure RESults? {1 -

8}<string>[;<string>],
{0}

:MEASure:RISetime
:MEASure:RISet1ine? <rea1 nuniber>
:MEASure:SCRatch
{CHANnel
:MEASure:SOURce 1-4}
{FUNCtion 1 or 2}
{WMEMory 1 4}
-

:MEASure:SOURce? {CHANnel 1 -
4}
{FUNCtion 1 or 2}
{WMEMory
1-4}
:MEASure:STATist1cs {ON or 1}
{OFF or 0}
:MEASure:STATistics? {1 or 0}
:MEASure:TDELta? <rea1 number>
:MEASure:TMAX? <rea1 number>
:MEASure:TMIN? i<rea1 nuinber>

HP 54501A
Quick Reference Guide-12 Programming
 Command Argument Returned Format

:MEASure:TSTArt <rea1 nuniber>

:MEASure:TSTArt? —

<rea1 number>
:MEASure:TSTOp <rea1 nuniber> —

:MEASure:TSTOp? —

<rea1 number>
:MEASure:TVOLt? <rea1 number>,{+ or -}<integer> <rea1 number>

:MEASure:UNITs {PERCent}
--
{VOLTs} —

:MEASure:UNITs? —
{PERCent}
—
{VOLTs}
:MEASure: UPPer <rea1 number> —

:MEASure:UPPer? —

<rea1 number>
:MEASure:VAMPiitude
--
—

:MEASure:VAMPlitude? <rea1 number>

--
:MEASure:VAVerage — —

:MEASure:VAVerage? —

<rea1 number>
:MEASure:VBASe
--
—

:MEASure:VBASe? —

<rea1 number>

:MEASure:VDELta? <rea1 nuinber>

--
:MEASure:VFIFty — —

:MEASure:VMAX — —

:MEASure:VMAX? —

<rea1 number>
:MEASure:VMIN
-- --
:MEASure:VMIN? <rea1 number>
--
:MEASure:VPP
--
—

:MEASure:VPP? <rea1 number>

--
:MEASure:VRELative {0 -
100} —

:MEASure:VRELative? {50 100}

--
-

:MEASure:VRMS
--
—

:MEASure:VRMS? —

<rea1 number>
:MEASure:VSTArt <rea1 number> —

:MEASure:VSTArt? —

<rea1 number>
:MEASure:VSTOp <rea1 number>

HP 54501A
Programming Quick Reference Guide-13
 Command Argument Returned Format

:MEASure:VSTOp? !<rea1 number>

:MEASure:VTIMe? <rea1 number> ^real number>
:MEASure:VTOP
:MEASure:VTOP? <rea1 nuniber>

Timebase Subsystem Commands

:TIMebase:DELay <rea1 nmnber>

:TIMebase:DELay? <rea1 number>
:TIMebase:MODE {AUTO}
{TRIGgered}
{SINSIe}
:TIMebase:MODE? {AUTO}
{TRIGgered}
{SINGIe}
:TIMebase:RANGe <rea1 nuinber>

:TIMebase:RANGe? <rea1 nuinber>

:TIMebase:REFerence {LEFT}
{CENTer}
{RIGHt}
:TIMebase:REFerence? {LEFT}
{CENTer}
{RIGHt}
TIMebase:WINDow {ON or 1}
{OFF or 0}
TIMebase:WINDow? {1 or 0}

TIMebase:WINDow:DELay <rea1 number>

TIMebase:WINDow:DELay? <rea1 number>
TIMebase:WINDow:RANGe <rea1 nuinber>
TIMebase:WINDow:RANGe? <rea1 number>

HP 54501A
Quick Reference Guide-14 Programming
 Command Argument Returned Format

Trigger Subsystem Commands

TRIGger:CONDition {ENTer}
{EXIT}
{GT},<rea1 number
{LT},<rea1 nuniber>
{RANGe},<rea1 number>,<rea1 number>
{TRUE}
{FALSe}
:TRIGger:CONDition? {ENTer}
{EXIT}
{GT},<rea1 number>
{LT},<rea1 number^
{RANGe},<rea'l nuniber>,<rea1 number?)
{TRUE}
{FALSe}
:TRIGger:DELay {TIME},<rea1 number>
{EVENt},<rea1 number>
:TRI6ger:DELay? {TIME},<rea1 nuniber>
{EVENt},<rea1 number>
:TRI6ger:DELay:SLOPe {POSitive}
{NEGative}

:TRI6ger:DELay:SLOPe? {POSitive}
{NEGative}
:TRIGger:DELay:SOURce {CHANnel 1 -
4}
:TRIGger:DELay:SOURce? {CHANnel 1 -
4}
:TRI6ger:FIELd {1 or 2}
:TRI6ger:PIELd? {1 or 2}

:TRI6ger:HOLDoff {TIME},<rea1 nuniber>

:TRI6ger:HOLOoff? <rea1 nuniber>

HP 54501A
Programming Quick Reference Guide-15
 Command Argument Returned Format

:TRI6ger:LEVe1 <rea1 number>

..
:TRIGger:LEVe1? —

<rea1 number>
:TRIGger:LINE {1 -
625} —

:TRIGger:LINE? —
{1 -
625}
:TRIGger:LOGic {HIGH} —

{LOW} —

{DONTcare}
--
:TRIGger:LOGic? {HIGH}
--
—
{LOW}
—
{DONTcare}
:TRIGger:MODE {EDGE} —

{PATTern} —

{STATe} —

{OELay}
--
{TV} —

:TRIGger:MODE? —
{EDGE}
—
{PATTern}
{STATe}
--
{DELay}
--
—
{TV}
:TRIGger Occurrence {1 - 16000000} —

:TRIGger Occurrence? {1 -
16000000}
--
:TRIGger Occurrence:SLOPe {POSItive} --
{NEGative} —

:TRIGger Occurrence:SLOPe? —
{POSitive}
—
{NEGative}
:TRIGger Occurrence:SOURce {CHANnel 1 -
4} —

:TRIGger Occurrence:SOURce? — {CHANnel 1 -

4}
:TRIGger PATH {CHANnel 1 -
4} —

:TRIGger PATH? {CHANnel 1 -

4}
--
:TRIGger POLarity {POSitive} —

{NEGative} —

:TRIGger POLarity? —
{POSitive}
{NEGative}

HP 54501A
Quick Reference Guide-16 Programming
 Command Argument Returned Format

:TRIGgei-:QUAL1ty {EDGE}
{PATTern}
{STATe}
{LOW}
{HIGH}
:TRIGger:QUALity? {EDGE}
{PATTern}
{STATe}
{LOW}
{HIGH}
:TRIGger:SLOPe {POSitive}
{NEGative}
:TRIGger:SLOPe? {POSitive}
{NEGative}
:TRIGger:SOURce {CHANnel 1 -
4}

:TRIGger:SOURce? {CHANnel 1 -
4}
:TRIGger:STANdard {525}
{625}
{USER}
:TRIGger:STANdard? {525}
{625}
{USER}

HP 54501A
Programming Quick Reference Guide-17
 Command Argument Returned Format

Waveform Subsystem Commands

:WAVefonn:COUNt? {1}
:WAVefon7):DATA <b1ock data» —

:WAVeform:DATA? —
<b1ock data>
:WAVeform:FORMat {ASCit} —

{WORD} —

{BYTE} —

{COMPressed} —

:WAVefonn:FORMat? — {ASCii}
— {WORD}
— {BYTE}
— {COMPressed}

:WAVefonn:POINts? <integer>
--
:WAVefonn:PREamb1e <rea1 nuniber>,... —

:WAVefonn:PREamb1e? <rea1 nuinber>,...

--
:WAVeforin:SOURce {CHANnel 1 -
4} —

{WMEMory 1 -
4} —

:WAVeform:SOURce? {CHANnel 1 4}
--
-

{WMEMory
-- 1-4}
:WAVefonn:TYPE? {AVERage}
{ENVelope}
--
{NORMal}
--
:WAVeform:XINCrement? <rea1 nuniber>
--
:WAVefonn:XORigin? —

<rea1 number>
:WAVeform:XREFerence? {0}
--
:WAVeforni:YINCrenient? —
<rea1 nuniber>

:yAVefonn:YORigin? -- <rea1 number>

:WAVefonn:YREFerence? <integer>

HP 54501A
Quick Reference Guide-18 Programming
Index

A B

AC RMS, 14-60 BEEPer Command/Query, 6-5

Acquire Subsystem, 8-1 BLANk Command, 6-6,6-20
COMPlete Command/Query, 8-4 block data, 1-18,3-23
COUNt Command/Query, 8-5 Buffer Deadlock, 3-4
POINts Command/Query, 8-6 BYTE format, 17-5
Syntax Diagram, 8-3
TYPE Command/Query, 8-7
c
ADD Command, 12-4
Addressing, 2-1
Addressing the instrument, 1-3
Calibrate Subsystem, 9-1
advisory line, 7-3
Syntax Diagram, 9-1
Algorithms, A-l TNUL1 Command/Query, 9-2
ALL Query, 14-11
alpha argument, 4-1 can-age return, 4-5
Channel Subsystem, 10-1
Angular brackets, 1-3
COUPling Command/Query, 10-3
arbitrary ASCII response data, 3-23
arbitrary block program data, 3-14
ECL Command, 10-4
HFReject Command/Query, 10-5
ASCII format, 17-5
OFFSet Command/Query, 10-6
AUTO timebase mode, 15-4
PROBe Command/Query, 10-7
automatic measurements, A-l
RANGe Command/Query, 10-8
Automatic Top-Base, A-2
Syntax Diagram, 10-1
AUToscale Command, 6-4
TTL Command, 10-9
AVERAGE Type, 17-2
Character data, 1-9,1-15
Averaging Mode, 8-2
Character program data, 1-9,1-15,3-14
character response data, 3-23
CLEAR DISPLAY, 6-9
Clear measurement, 14-38
*CLS (clear status) Command, 5-4
CME command error, 3-30
-

HP 54501A
Programming
COLUMN Command/Query, 11-4 Command (continued)
comma, 3-6 ERASe, 6-9
Command, 1-4,1-14 *ESE, 5-5
Acquire Subsystem, 8-1 *ESR, 5-7
AUToscale, 6-4 Function Subsystem, 12-1
BEEPer, 6-5 FUNCtionN:ADD, 12-4
BLANk, 6-6 FUNCtionN:INVert, 12-5
CALibrate, 9-2 FUNCtionN:MULTiply, 12-6
Calibrate Subsystem, 9-1 FUNCtionN:OFFSet, 12-7
Channel Subsystem, 10-1 FUNCtionN:ONLY, 12-8
CHANnelN:COUPling, 10-3 FUNCtionN:RANGe, 12-9
CHANnelN:ECL, 10-4 FUNCtionN:SUBTract, 12-10
CHANnelN:HFReject, 10-5 FUNCtionN: VERSUS, 12-11
CHANnelN:OFFSet, 10-6 Hardcopy Subsystem, 13-1
CHANnelN:PROBe, 10-7 HARDcopy:LENGth, 13-2
CHANnelN:RANGe, 10-8 HARDcopy:PAGE, 13-3
CHANnelN:TTL, 10-9 HEADer, 1-14
"•CLS, 5-1,5-4 *IDN, 5-9
common, 4-4 *1ST, 5-10
Common Commands, 5-1 LER, 6-10
COMPlete, 8-4 LONGform, 1-14
COUNt, 8-5 ^LRN, 5-11
Cross-Reference, 4-13 LTER, 6-11
DIGitize, 6-7 Measure Subsystem, 14-1
Display Subsystem, 11-1 MEASure:ALL, 14-11
DISPlay:COLumn, 11-4 MEASure:COMPare, 14-12'
DISPlay:CONNect, 11-5 MEASure:CURSor, 14-14
DISPlay:DATA, 11-6 MEASure:DEFine, 14-15
DISPlay:FORMat, 11-8 MEASure:DELay, 14-17
DISPlay:GRATicule, 11-9 MEASure:DESTmation, 14-18
DISPlay:INVerse, 11-10 MEASure:DUTycycle, 14-19
DISPlay:LINE, 11-11 MEASure:ESTArt, 14-20
DISPlay:MASK, 11-12 MEASure:ESTOp, 14-22
DISPlay:PERSistence, 11-14 MEASure:FALLtime, 14-24
DISPlay:ROW, 11-15 MEASure:FREQuency, 14-25
DISPlay:SCReen, 11-16 MEASure:LIMittest, 14-26
DISPlay:SOURce, 11-17 MEASure:LOWer, 14-27
DISPlay:STRing, 11-18 MEASure:MODE, 14-28
DISPlay:TEXT, 11-19 MEASure:NWIDth, 14-29
DISPlay:TMARker, 11-20 MEASure:OVERshoot, 14-30
DISPlay: VMARker, 11-21 MEASure:PERiod, 14-31
EOI, 6-8 MEASure:POSTfaUure, 14-32

Index-2 HP 54501A
Programming
Command (continued) Command (continued)
MEASure:PRECision, 14-33 •••RST, 5-16
MEASure:PREShoot, 14-34 RUN, 6-15
MEASure:PWIDth, 14-35 •SAV, 5-18
MEASure:RESults, 14-36 SERial, 6-16
MEASure:RISetime, 14-37 •SRE, 5-19
MEASure:SCRatch, 14-38 •STB, 5-21
MEASure:SOURce, 14-39 STOP, 6-17
MEASure:STATistics, 14-40 STORe, 6-18
MEASure:TDELta, 14-41 System Subsystem, 7-1
MEASure:TMAX, 14-42 SYSTem:DSP, 7-3
MEASure:TMIN, 14-43 SYSTem:ERRor, 7-4
MEASure:TSTArt, 14-44 SYSTem:HEADer, 7-6
MEASure-.TSTOp, 14-45 SYSTem:KEY, 7-7
MEASure:TVOLt, 14-46 SYSTem:LONGform, 7-9
MEASure:UNITs, 14-48 SYSTem:SETup, 7-10
MEASure:UPPer, 14-49 TER, 6-19
MEASure:VAMPlitude, 14-50 Timebase Subsystem, 15-1
MEASure:VAVerage, 14-51 TIMebase:DELay, 15-3
MEASure:VBASe, 14-52 TIMebase:MODE, 15-4
MEASure:VDELta, 14-53 TIMebase:RANGe, 15-5
MEASure:VnFty, 14-54 TIMebase:REFerence, 15-6
MEASure:VMAX, 14-55 TIMebase:WINDow, 15-7
MEASure:VMIN, 14-56 TIMebase.-WINDowDELay, 15-8
MEASure:VPP, 14-57 TIMebase:WINDow:RANGe, 15-9
MEASure:VRELative, 14-58 •TRG, 5-23
MEASure:VRMS, 14-60 Trigger Mode, 16-1
MEASure:VSTArt, 14-61 Trigger Subsystem, 16-1
MEASure:VSTOp, 14-62 TRIGGER:CONDITION, 16-4/16-5,16-13
MEASure:VTIMe, 14-63 TRIGGER:DELAY, 16-6,16-16
MEASure:VTOP, 14-64 TRIGger:DELay:SLOPe, 16-17
MENU, 6-12 TRIGGER:DELAY:SOURCE, 16-6,16-18
MERGe, 6-13 TRIGGER:HELD, 16-7,16-19
*OPC,5-12 TRIGGER:HOLDOFF, 16-4,16-20
*OPT, 5-13 TRIGGER:LEVEL, 16-1,16-3/16-4,16-21
parsing, 3-1 TRIGgerLINE, 16-22
POINts, 8-6 TRIGGER:LOGIC, 16-5,16-23
*PRE, 5-14 TRIGgerMODE, 16-24
PRINt, 6-14 TRIGGER:OCCURRENCE, 16-6,16-8,16-25
*RCL, 5-15 TRIGGER:OCCURRENCE:SLOPE, 16-6,16-8,
Root Level, 4-4 16-26
Root Level Commands, 6-1

HP 54501A Index-3
Programming
Command (continued) Common Commands (continued)
TRIGGER:OCCURRENCE:SOURCE, 16-6, *LRN Query, 5-11
16-27 "OPC Command/Query, 5-12
TRIGGER:PATH, 16-4/16-5,16-28 *OPT Query, 5-13
TRIGGER:POLARITY, 16-7,16-29 *PRE Command/Query, 5-14
TRIGGER:QUALIFY, 16-6,16-8,16-30 *RCL, 5-15
TRIGGER:SLOPE, 16-3,16-32 *RST, 5-16
TRIGGER:SOURCE, 16-3,16-7,16-33 *SAV Command, 5-18
TRIGGER:STANDARD, 16-7,16-34 *SRE Command/Query, 5-19
TRIGGER:TIME, 16-6 *STB, 5-21
•TST, 5-24 Syntax Diagram, 5-1
TYPE, 8-7 *TRG Command, 5-23
VIEW, 6-20 *TST, 5-24
*WAI, 5-25 *WAI Command, 5-25
Waveform Subsystem, 17-1 COMPare Command/Query, 14-12
WAVeform:COUNt, 17-9 COMPlete Command/Query, 8-4
WAVeform:DATA, 17-10 Compound command header, 1-5
WAVeform:FORMat, 17-12 compound header, 4-5
WAVeform:POINts, 17-13 compound query, 3-3
WAVeform:PREamble, 17-14 COMPRESSED format, 17-5
WAVeform:SOURce, 17-16 CONDition Command/Query, 16-13
WAVeform:TYPE, 17-17 CONNect Command/Query, 11-5
WAVeform:XINCrement, 17-18 Controllers, 1-2
WAVeform:XORigin, 17-19 COUNt Command/Query, 8-5
WAVeform-.XREFerence, 17-20 COUNt Query, 17-9
WAVeform:YINCrement, 17-21 COUPling Command/Query, 10-3
WAVeform:YORigin, 17-22 CURSor Query, 14-14
WAVefornrYREFerence, 17-23
Command and Data Concepts, 2-1
D
command error, 3-4
Command header, 1-5
Command Table
Data Acquisition Types, 17-2
TRIGgerMODE, 16-2
DATA Command/Query, 11-6,17-10
command tree, 4-1,4-4,4-9
DDE device specific error, 3-30
-

Command Types, 4-4

deadlock, 3-4
Common command header, 1-6
decimal numeric program data, 3-14
Common Commands, 3-27, 4-4, 5-1
DEFINE Command/Query, 14-15
-CLS, 5-4 definite length arbitrary block response data, 3-23
*ESE, 5-5
Definite-length block response data, 1-18
•ESR Query, 5-7
DELay Command/Query, 14-17,15-3,16-16
-IDN Query, 5-9
DELay SLOPe Command/Query, 16-17
"IST Query, 5-10

Index-4 HP 54501A
Programming
DELay SOURce Command/Query, 16-18 EOI, 1-9
Delay Trigger Mode, 16-6,16-13 EOI Command/Query, 6-8
DESTination Command/Query, 14-18 ERASe Command, 6-9
Device address ERASE PMEMORYO, 6-9
HP-IB, 1-3 error number, 7-4
device clear command, 3-2 ERRor Query, 7-4
Device Listening Syntax, 3-8 error queue, 5-4
Device Talking Syntax, 3-19 ESB event status bit, 3-30
-

device-specific error, 3-4 -ESE Command/Query, 5-5

DIGitize Command, 6-7,8-1,17-2 *ESR Query, 5-7
Display Subsystem, 11-1 ESR, event summary, 5-5
COLumn Command/Query, 11-4 ESTArt Command/Query, 14-20
CONNect Command/Query, 11-5 ESTOp Command/Query, 14-22
DATA Command/Query, 11-6 Event Status Register, 5-8
FORMat Command/Query, 11-8 Example program, B-l
GRATicule Command/Query, 11-9 Channel Setup, B-2
INVerse Command/Query, 11-10 Digitize, B-9
LINE Command, 11-11 Hardcopy, B-ll
MASK Command/Query, 11-12 Measurement Setup, B-6
PERSistence Command/Query, 11-14 Timebase Subsystem, B-4
ROW Command/Query, 11-15 Waveform Template, B-12
SCReen Command/Query, 11-16 EXE execution error, 3-30
-

SOURce Command/Query, 11-17 execution error, 3-4

STRing Command, 11-18 Exited, 16-4
Syntax Diagram, 11-1 exponential -
NR3,3-23
TEXT Command, 11-19
TMARker Command/Query, 11-20
F
VMARker Command/Query, 11-21
DSP Command/Query, 7-3
duty cycle, A-5
falltime, A-5
DUTycycle Command/Query, 14-19
FALLtime Command/Query, 14-24
falltime measurement, 14-1
E falltime measurements, A-l
Field Command/Query, 16-19
FORMat Command/Query, 11-8,17-12
ECL Command, 10-4 frequency, A-5
Edge Definition, A-2 FREQuency Command/Query, 14-25
Enter statement, 1-2 frequency measurement, 14-1
Entered, 16-4 Function Subsystem, 12-1
Envelope Mode, 8-2 ADD Command, 12-4
ENVELOPE Type, 17-2 INVert Command, 12-5

HP 54501A
Programming
 MULTiply Command, 12-6 IEEE 488.2 instruments, 3-1
OFFSet Command/Query, 12-7 IEEE 488-2 standard, 3-1
ONLY Command, 12-8 Individual Status, 3-34
RANGe Command/Query, 12-9 Infinity Representation, 4-6
SUBTract Command, 12-10 Initialization, 1-11
Syntax Diagram, 12-2 input
VERSUS Command, 12-11 vertical, 6-4
Functional Elements Input Buffer, 3-1/3-2,3-4
Input Buffer, 3-1 instrument
Output Queue, 3-2 serial number, 5-9
Parser, 3-2 Instrument address
HP-IB, 1-3
integer NR1,3-23
-

G
Interface Capabilities, 2-1
Interface select code
HP-IB, 1-3
GRATicule Command/Query, 11-9
Interrupted Condition, 3-4
group execute trigger (GET), 3-3 interrupted error, 3-26
GT, 16-4 INVerse Command/Query, 11-10
INVert Command, 12-5
H *IST Query, 5-10

K
Hardcopy Subsystem, 13-1
LENGth Command/Query, 13-2
PAGE Command/Query, 13-3 key codes, 7-7
Syntax Diagram, 13-1
KEY Command/Query, 7-7
HEADer command, 1-14
HEADer Command/Query, 7-6
headers, 4-1 L
HFReject Command/Query, 10-5
HOLDoff Command/Query, 16-20
HP-IB, 1-3 LCL local, 3-30
-

leading colon, 4-5 / 4-6

learn string, 5-11
LENGth Command/Query, 13-2
LER Query, 6-10
level
*IDN Query, 5-9 trigger, 6-4
IEEE 488.1,3-1 LEVel Command/Query, 16-21
IEEE 488.2,3-5,4-4 Limit Test Event Register, 6-11
IEEE 488.2 defined syntax, 3-5

Index-6 HP 54501A
Programming
UMittest Command, 14-26 Measure Subsystem (continued)
LINE Command, 11-11 PREShoot Command/Query, 14-34
LINE Command/Query, 16-22 PWIDth Command/Query, 14-35
linefeed, 4-4 RESults Query, 14-36
linefeed (CRLF), 4-5 RISetime Command/Query, 14-37
LOGic Command/Query, 16-23 SCRatch Command, 14-38
Longfonn, 1-8 SOURce Command/Query, 14-39
LONGfonn command, 1-14 STATistics Command/Query, 14-40
LONGform Command/Query, 7-9 Syntax Diagram, 14-4
LOWer Command/Query, 14-27 TDELta Query, 14-41
Lowercase, 1-8 TMAX Query, 14-42
*LRN Query, 5-11 TMIN Query, 14-43
LT, 16-4 TSTArt Command/Query, 14-44
LTER Query, 6-11 TSTOp Command/Query, 14-45
TVOLt Query, 14-46
UNITs Command/Query, 14-48
M
UPPer Command/Query, 14-49
VAMPlitude Command/Query, 14-50
VAVerage Command/Query, 14-51
Making Measurements, A-l, 14-2
VBASe Command/Query, 14-52
MASK Command/Query, 11-12
VDELta Query, 14-53
MAV -
message available, 3-30
VFIFty Command, 14-54
Measure Subsystem, 14-1
VMAX Command/Query, 14-55
ALL Query, 14-11
VMIN Command/Query, 14-56
COMPare Command/Query, 14-12 VPP Command/Query, 14-57
CURSor Query, 14-14
VRELative Command/Query, 14-58
DEFine Command/Query, 14-15
VRMS Command/Query, 14-60
DELay Command/Query, 14-17 VSTArt Command/Query, 14-61
DESTination Command/Query, 14-18
VSTOp Command/Query, 14-62
DUTycycle Command/Query, 14-19
VTIMe Query, 14-63
ESTArt Command/Query, 14-20
VTOP Command/Query, 14-64
ESTOp Command/Query, 14-22
Measurement Error, 14-2
FALLtime Command/Query, 14-24
Measurement Setup, A-l, 14-1
FREQuency Command/Query, 14-25 MENU Command/Query, 6-12
LIMittest Command, 14-26
MERGe Command, 6-13
LOWer Command/Query, 14-27
message exchange protocols, 3-1
MODE Command/Query, 14-28
Message terminator, 1-3
NWIDth Command/Query, 14-29 -
width, A-5
OVERshoot Command/Query, 14-30
mnemonic, 4-1
PERiod Command/Query, 14-31
Mode
POSTfailure Command/Query, 14-32
Delay Trigger, 16-6
PRECision Command/Query, 14-33
Pattern Trigger, 16-4

HP 54501A
Programming
 State Trigger, 16-5 OPC operation complete, 3-30
-

TV Trigger, 16-7 Operation Complete, 3-31

MODE Command/Query, 14-28,15-4,16-24 -•OPT Query, 5-13
MSG message, 3-30
-
OUTPUT command, 1-3
MSS (Master Summary Status), 5-21 Output Queue, 3-2,3-4,5-12
MSS master summary status, 3-30
-
Output statement, 1-2
Multiple data parameters, 1-8 Overlapped Commands, 4-7
Multiple numeric variables, 1-19 OVERshoot Command/Query, 14-30
Multiple program commands, 1-10
Multiple queries, 1-19,3-3
P
Multiple subsystems, 1-10
MULTiply Command, 12-6
PAGE Command/Query, 13-3
N Parallel Poll, 3-34
Parallel Poll Configure, 3-34,3-36
Parallel Poll Register Enable, 3-34
-
width, A-5 Parallel Poll Unconfigure, 3-37
new line character, 6-8 Parser, 3-2,3-9
NL, 1-9,3-6,4-4 parsing, 3-1/3-2
Normal Persistence mode, 8-1 PATH Command/Query, 16-28
NORMAL Type, 17-2 Pattern Trigger Mode, 16-4,16-13
Notation Conventions and Definitions, 4-7 period, A-5
nrl numeric response data, 3-23 PERiod Command/Query, 14-31
nr3 numeric response data, 3-23 period measurement, 14-1
Numeric data, 1-9 PERSistence Command/Query, 11-14
Numeric program data, 1-9 + width, A-4

Numeric variables, 1-17 POINts Command/Query, 8-6

NWIDth Command/Query, 14-29 POINts Query, 17-13
POLarity Command/Query, 16-29
PON power on, 3-30
-

0 POSTfailure Command/Query, 14-32

-PRE command, 3-34,5-14
PREamble Command/Query, 17-14
OCCurrence Command/Query, 16-25 PRECision Command/Query, 14-33
OCCurrence:SLOPe Command/Query, 16-26 PREShoot Command/Query, 14-34
OCCurrence:SOURce Command/Query, 16-27 PRINt Query, 6-14
offset
PROBe Command/Query, 10-7
vertical, 6-4
proggram message unit, 3-9
OFFSet Command/Query, 10-6,12-7
Program command, 1-4
ONLY Command, 12-8
Program data, 1-8,3-14
•OPC Command/Query, 5-12
Program example, B-l

Index-8 HP 54501A
Programming
 Channel Setup, B-2 Response data, 1-18,3-23
Digitize, B-9 response data separator, 3-25
Hardcopy, B-ll Response Generation, 4-7
Measurement Setup, B-6 Response header, 3-21
Timebase Subsystem, B-4 response header separator, 3-26
Wavefonn Template, B-12 response message, 3-2 / 3-3,3-21
Program message, 1-4,3-2 / 3-3,3-6,3-9,4-6 response message terminator, 3-26
Program message syntax, 1-4 response message unit, 3-21
Program message terminator, 1-9,3-2,4-5 response message unit separator, 3-26
Program message unit, 1-4,3-6 response messages, 3-2
program message unit separator, 3-10,4-5 RESults Query, 14-36
Program query, 1-4 risetime, A-5
Program syntax, 1-4 RISetime Command/Query, 14-37
Protocols, 3-1 risetime measurement, 14-1
pulse width measurement, 14-1 risetime measurements, A-l
PWIDth Command/Query, 14-35 Root Level Command
ERASe Command, 6-9
PRINt Query, 6-14
Q Root Level commands, 4-4,6-1
AUToscale Command, 6-4
BEEPer Command/Query, 6-5
QUALify Command/Query, 16-30 BLANk Command, 6-6
Query, 1-4,1-7,1-14 DIGitize Command, 6-7
Query command, 1-7
EOI Command/Query, 6-8
query error, 3-3 / 3-4
LER Query, 6-10
query message, 3-2 / 3-3
LTER Query, 6-11
query message unit, 3-21
MENU Command/Query, 6-12
query program header, 3-10
MERGe Command, 6-13
Query response, 1-13
RUN Command, 6-15
query responses, 4-7 SERial Command, 6-16
Question mark, 1-7
STOP Command, 6-17
QYE query error, 3-30
-

STORe Command, 6-18

Syntax Diagram, 6-1
R TER Query, 6-19
VIEW Command, 6-20
ROW Command/Query, 11-15
RANGE, 16-4 RQC request control, 3-30
-

RANGe Command/Query, 10-8,12-9,15-5 RQS -

request service, 3-30

*RCL Command, 5-15 *RST Command, 5-16
real numberNR3,3-23
- RUN Command, 6-15
REFerence Command/Query, 15-6

HP 54501A
Programming
 Status Reporting, 3-28
*STB Query, 5-21
s
STOP command, 6-15,6-17
STORe Command, 6-18
STRing Command, 11-18
*SAV Command, 5-18
string program data, 3-14
save register, 5-18
string response data, 3-23
save/recall register, 5-15
String variables, 1-16
SCRatch Command, 14-38
Subsystem
SCReen Command/Query, 11-16
Acquire, 8-1
semicolon, 3-6
Calibrate, 9-1
sensitivity
Channel, 10-1
vertical, 6-4 Display, 11-1
Separator, 1-5
Function, 12-1
Sequential commands, 4-6
Hardcopy, 13-1
SERial Command, 6-16
Measure, 14-1
serial number, 5-9,6-16
System, 7-1
Serial Poll, 3-32
Timebase, 15-1
Service, 5-19
Trigger, 16-1
SETup Command/Query, 7-10
Waveform, 17-1
707,1-16 Subsystem commands, 4-4
Shortform, 1-8
SUBTract Command, 12-10
Simple command header, 1-5
suffix multipliers, 3-16
SINGLE timebase mode, 15-4
suffix program data, 3-14
SLOPe Command/Query, 16-32
suffix units, 3-16
SOURce Command/Query, 11-17,14-39,16-33,
sweep speed, 6-4
17-16
Syntax Diagram
space, 3-6
Acquire Subsystem, 8-3
*SRE Command/Query, 5-19
Calibrate Subsystem, 9-1
standard + width, A-4
Channel Subsystem, 10-1
standard width, A-5
-

Common Commands, 5-1

STANdard Command/Query, 16-34 Display Subsystem, 11-1
Standard Event Status Enable Register, 5-5
Function Subsystem, 12-2
Standard Event Status Register, 5-5,5-12
Hardcopy Subsystem, 13-1
State Trigger Mode, 16-5,16-13
Measure Subsystem, 14-4
STATistics Command/Query, 14-40
Root Level Commands, 6-1
Status, 1-19 System Subsystem, 7-2
Status Byte, 3-31
Trigger Subsystem, 16-9
Status Byte, 5-19
Waveform Subsystem, 17-7
status data structures, 5-4
syntax diagrams, 3-5
status register, 5-1
syntax error, 3-4
Status registers, 1-19
Syntax Overview, 3-5

Index-10 HP 54501A
Programming
System Subsystem, 7-1 Trigger Level command, 16-1,16-3
DSP Command/Query, 7-3 Trigger Logic command, 16-4 /16-5
ERRor Query, 7-4 Trigger Mode, 16-1
HEADer Command/Query, 7-6 EDGE, 16-1,16-3
KEY Command/Query, 7-7 TV, 16-1
LONGfonn Command/Query, 7-9 Trigger Occurrence command, 16-6,16-8
SETup Command/Query, 7-10 Trigger Occurrence Slope command, 16-8
Syntax Diagram, 7-2 Trigger Path command, 16-4 /16-5
Trigger Polarity command, 16-7
Qualify command, 16-6,16-8
Trigger
T
Slope command, 16-3
Trigger
Trigger
Source command, 16-3,16-7
Trigger
Standard command, 16-7
Talking to the instrument, 1-2
Trigger
Subsystem, 16-1
TDELta Query, 14-41
CONDition Command/Query, 16-13
TER Query, 6-19
DELay Command/Query, 16-16
Terminator, 1-3,1-9
DELay SOURce Command/Query, 16-18
TEXT Command, 11-19
DELay:SLOPe Command/Query, 16-17
Timebase Subsystem, 15-1
FIELd Command/Query, 16-19
DELay Command/Query, 15-3
HOLDoff Command/Query, 16-20
MODE Command/Query, 15-4
LEVel Command/Query, 16-21
RANGe Command/Query, 15-5
LINE Command/Query, 16-22
REFerence Command/Query, 15-6
LOGic Command/Query, 16-23
WINDOW Command/Query, 15-7
MODE Command/Query, 16-24
WINDow:DELay Command/Query, 15-8
Occurrence Command/Query, 16-25
WINDow:RANGe Command/Query, 15-9
OCCurrence:SLOPe Command/Query, 16-26
Timebase Window mode, 15-1
OCCurrence:SOURce Command/Query, 16-27
TMARker Command/Query, 11-20 PATH Command/Query, 16-28
TMAX Query, 14-42 POLarity Command/Query, 16-29
TMIN Query, 14-43 QUALify Command/Query, 16-30
TNUL1 Command/Query, 9-2
SLOPe Command/Query, 16-32
*TRG Command, 5-23
SOURce Command/Query, 16-33
TRG trigger, 3-31
-

STANdard Command/Query, 16-34

Trigger Bit, 3-31 Syntax Diagram, 16-9
Trigger Condition command, 16-4 /16-5
Trigger Time command, 16-6
Trigger Delay command, 16-6
TRIGgerMODE
Trigger Delay Source command, 16-6
Command Table, 16-2
Trigger Event, 16-6 TRIGGERED timebase mode, 15-4
Trigger Event command, 16-6
Truncation Rules, 4-1
Trigger Field command, 16-7 •TST Query, 5-24
Trigger Holdoff, 16-4
TSTArt Command/Query, 14-44
trigger level, 6-4
TSTOp Command/Query, 14-45

HP 54501A Index-11
Programming
TTL Command, 10-9 Voltage measurements, 14-2
TV Trigger Mode, 16-1,16-7,16-13 Vp-p,A-5
TVOLT Query, 14-46 VPP Command/Query, 14-57
TYPE Command/Query, 8-7 VRELative Command/Query, 14-58
TYPE Query, 17-17 Vrms,A-6
VRMS Command/Query, 14-60
VSTArt Command/Query, 14-61
u
VSTOp Command/Query, 14-62
VTIMe Query, 14-63
Vtop, A-5
UNITS Command/Query, 14-48
VTOP Command/Query, 14-64
Unterminated Condition, 3-4
UPPer Command/Query, 14-49
Upper/Lower Case Equivalence, 3-8 w
Uppercase, 1-8
URQ user request, 3-30
-

URQ, user request, 5-5 *WAI Command, 5-25

user-defined + width, A-4 Waveform Data Conversion, 17-4
User-Defined Measurements, 14-1 Waveform Subsystem, 17-1
COUNt Query, 17-9
DATA Command/Query, 17-10
v
FORMat Command/Query, 17-12
POINts Query, 17-13
PREamble Command/Query, 17-14
Vamp, A-6 SOURce Command/Query, 17-16
VAMPlitude Command/Query, 14-50
Syntax Diagram, 17-7
VAVerage Command/Query, 14-51
TYPE Query, 17-17
Vavg, A-6
XINCrement Query, 17-18
Vbase, A-6
XORigin Query, 17-19
VBASe Command/Query, 14-52
XREFerence Query, 17-20
VDELta Query, 14-53
YINCrement Query, 17-21
VERSUS Command, 12-11
YORigin Query, 17-22
vertical input, 6-4
YREFerence Query, 17-23
vertical offset, 6-4
white space, 3-8
vertical sensitivity, 6-4
WINDOW Command/Query, 15-7
VFIFty Command, 14-54
WINDow:DELay Command/Query, 15-8
VIEW Command, 6-20
WINDowRANGe Command/Query, 15-9
VMARker Command/Query, 11-21 WORD format, 17-5
Vmax, A-5
VMAX Command/Query, 14-55
Vmin,A-5
VMIN Command/Query, 14-56

Index-12 HP 54501A
Programming
 x

XINCrement Query, 17-18

XORigin Query, 17-19
XREFerence Query, 17-20

YINCrement Query, 17-21

YORigin Query, 17-22
YREFerence Query, 17-23

HP 54501A
Programming